Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Amtomt,
Physiology,
am)
Hygiene.
TEXT-BOOK
BY
JOSEPH
C.
MARTINDALE,
M.D.,
PHILADELPHIA
ELDREDGE
17
"St BROTHER,
Norih
Seventh
1874.
Street.
^-AJ^SlB
-^
"
la
the
OfflM
of
the
of
Llbnriiu)
it^J-"s?'^
CoDgttu
at
WutalngcoD.
Preface,
TN
this
preparing
-^
clear,
concise
technical
been
Our
"cts
and
The
of the
of
them
in
law
is
these
they
whole
we
all
act
being.
so
The
as
Laws
of
of
we
must
we
the
with
or
10999L
to
and
serve
pre-
acquainted
know
the
them.
of which
each
system
Health,
the
organs
observe
can
unity
the
how
be
organs,
produce
to
first ; because
must
closely connected
to
have
retained.
it ; and
the
from
form, that
understand
We
of
economy
subject, both
functions
can
we
of many
are
oi^iis
the
possible
in
of this kind.
given
systems, before
our
the
hypotheses
such
are
keep
can
composed
in
in
health.
of
and
readily
and
before
state
govern
body
of
before
which
and
as
the
present
Physiology
location
is needed
to
"cta
^ve
to
free
work,
general reader,
and
the
as
with
easily grasped
its part
the
be^n
body,
The
and
the
Anatomy
knowledge
laws
to
be
may
has
and
aimed
speculations
inconsistent
aa
endeavor
student
with
All
have
we
language,
terms.
omitted
book,
yet
forms
per-
the
each
tions
func-
other,
harmony
Hygiene,
are
in
not
PREFACE.
VI
applied
the
to
as
much
so
give
neither
clear
idea
pains
complete
The
the
is
following
Drowning
Glossary
A
made
of
the
in
Care
text
is
of
of
the
and
spared
useAil
the
and
1872.
will
as
the
text
to
make
and
it
for
information
Sick;
as
so
any
of
under
from
Asphyxia
their
and
Glossary
appended,
book
engravings
Antidotes
Words.
that
desired
reference
be
may
information.
J.
Philadelphia,
plication
ap-
Anatomy
in
been
Poisons
Index
their
respect.
much
Disinfectants
Diseases
the
mentioned
have
this
such
by
facts
contains
heads:
copious
to
the
expense
Appendix
separately,
hence,
after
illustrated
of
possible
as
part
learned.
fully
nor
each
system
understood
been
book
entire
the
better
be
have
Physiology
This
of
preservation
can
of
preservation
the
to
C.
M.
CONTENTS
?%X^1^
CHAPTER
Remarks.
General
PAOX
Section
1.
11
Introduction
.
Section
2.
of
Composition
tlie
16
Body
CHAPTER
11.
Motor
Section
1.
The
Section
2.
Anatomy
Tissnes
the
of
Apparatus,
19
Body
.
of
the
22
Bones
....
Section
3.
Physiology
Section
4.
Anatomy
and
of
Section
5.
Anatomy
of
the
Bones
...
of
Physiology
"
the
""
38
Joints
.
the
41
Muscles
.
...
Section
6.
of
Physiology
the
49
Muscles
CHAPTER
III.
Nutritive
Section
1.
The
Membranes
Section
2.
The
Section
3.
Anatomy
Section
4.
Pliysiology
Section
6.
Anatomy
Section
6.
Physiology
of
the
Apparatus,
Body
64
.
of
lands
the
Body
57
.
the
of
Digestive
System
69
.
the
of
of
Digestive
Circulatory
the
System
68
System
76
.
of
the
Circulatory
System
86
.
Section
7.
The
Section
8.
Absorption,
Lymphatic
System
91
.
Secretion,
and
Excretion
96
.
Section
9.
Section
10.
Physiology
Section
11.
Animal
Anatomy
of
the
Respiratory
System
99
.
of
the
Respiratory
System
103
Heat
108
....
Vll
CONTENTS.
VUl
IV.
CHAPTER
Sensory
Apparatus.
PAGl
of
Section
1.
Anatomy
Section
2.
Physiology
the
of
of
Section
3.
Anatomy
Section
4.
Physiology
Nervous
the
the
of
of
Organs
124
.....
135
Sense
Special
of
System
Organs
the
.111
System
Nervous
.....
147
Special Sense
....
V.
CHAPTER
Hygiene.
Section
1.
General
Section
2.
Air
Section
3.
Water
Section
4.
Clothing
Section
5.
Section
6.
Section
7.
Exercise
Section
8.
The
.159
Remarks
.
160
.169
.
174
.........
188
Food
.
Sleep
190
.'
...
'.
194
.........
Teeth
and
202
Organs
other
......
CHAPTER
VI.
Section
1. Growth
Section
2.
Decay
and
and
Development
Death.
and
Development
207
.......
211
Death
........
CHAPTER
VII.
Appendix.
Section
1. Care
and
of the
their
Sick.
Asphyxia
from
Drowning.
Poisons
Disinfectants.
216
Antidotes
........
Section
INDBZ
2.
Glossary
of
Diseases.
Glossary
of
228
Words
.
286
LIST
OF
ILLUSTRATIONS.
^"o5";"
no.
PAOB
Frontispiece.
1. Organic
Cells
2. Filaments
12
Tissue
Fibrous
of
3. Filaments
of
4. Cartilage
Cells
Connective
Tissue
20
5. Fibres
6.
Elastic
of
Adipose,
Tissue
Fat
Tissue
.
7. Fasciculi
of
8. Human
Skeleton
9. Human
Muscle
Bones
Skull
of
11.
Vertebra
12.
Humerus,
13.
Radius
14.
Bones
16.
Femur,
16.
Tibia
of
Keck
the
Ulna
and
Wrist
and
Thigh-bone
or
17.
18.
Bones
Section
of
Foot
the
op
Bone
.
19.
Muscles
of
the
Front
20.
Muscles
of
the
Back
21.
Elbow
of
of
the
the
Body
Ciliated
23.
Different
Body
.
Joint
.
1*
46
60
Epithelium
Kinds
37
43
....
22.
33
34
31
33
Fibula
and
31
31
Hand
the
of
28
29
Arm-Bone
or
26
27
Trunk
the
21
21
10.
20
21
or
19
of
Glands
55
68
IX
LIST
OP
ILLU8TKATION8.
FIG.
24.
PAGS
Section
of
Tooth
61
.
26.
Permanent
26.
Stomach
Teeth
62
Intestines
and
64
.
27.
Human
Livee
66
28.
Obgans
Digestive
Common
the
of
Fowl
72
.
29.
Digestive
30.
Heart
Organs
and
of
Ox
an
73
Blood-vessels
large
75
.
31.
Position
32.
Valves
of
Heart
the
Veins
THE
IN
76
79
.
33.
Aorta
and
Branches
its
80
34.
Carotid
Arteries
81
35.
Arteries
of
Forearm
the
.82
36.
Lymphatic
Trunks
92
.
37.
Cartilages
38.
Vocal
of
Larynx
the
99
Membrane
99
.
39.
Larynx,
40.
Air-cells
Trachea,
Bronchi
and
101
102
...
41.
Brain
42.
Base
Spinal
and
Cord
114
Brain
the
of
115
.
43.
Left
Half
of
Brain
the
116
.
44.
Section
of
46.
Anastomosis
46.
Human
the
Spinal
Cord
121
.
Nerves
between
121
Eye
137
.
47.
48.
Muscles
of
Section
of
the
Eyeball
138
.
the
Eyeball
140
.
49.
Human
60.
Section
61.
Root
62.
Natural
Ear
of
op
141
the
Skin
144
.
Hair
145
Waist
179
.
63.
Deformed
Waist
179
u^i^
Anatomy,
Physiology,
Hygiene.
and
CHAPTER
I."
General
Remarks.
I.
Section
Introduction.
All
1.
bodies,
into
separated
The
and
rocks.
stones,
All
and
controlled
yet
bodies
according
ultimate
the
fixed
to
elements
composition
they
3.
into
ent"r
Every
origin is
in
power
of
composed
are
of
the
all
of
its
similar
parent
parts
elements
and
or
and
by
they
nourished
it is
These
subject
into
enter
when
bodies.
been
a
laws,
arranged
inoi^nic,
has
developed
be
fixed
unorganized
unorganized
living
ele-
Life-force.
any
soib,
nltimate
ultimate
bodies;
; it must
water,
All
of
vegetables;
certain
to
when
is
it is
reproduction
air, gases,
organic,
composition
all
of
be
may
nnorganized.
Life-force.
without
organized
body
and
according
called
organized
from
the
earth
the
composed
or
laws, yet
are
and
all animals
are
Vital
the
on
organized
arranged
by
matter,
comprise
bodies
organized
combined
ments
; the
comprise
bodies
2.
the
bodies
unorganized
ores,
of
masses
clasaea
two
organized
the
or
living
growth
by
to
food
or
death.
; its
crease
in-
it has
An
12
ANATOMY,
unorganized body
no
of
power
4. All
reproduction,and
acid ; and
acid
exhale
and
from
body,
and
while
in
explains
death
life
only, and
various
changes
such
Life, and
its
growth,
takes
bodies
Two
for the
are
and
highiy magnified.
^^^
body
or
of
animals
their
; but
is the
a
their
and
cell
A
cell, called
times
at other
form
primitive
they
in
so
are
These
the
con-
cells
dergo
un-
of the different
modified
retain
they
glandular
fibrous
the
the
among
Sometimes
in the
as
cells of the
that
they
can
tissues where
the
of fine filaments.
cell in all
orj^anizedbodies
the formation
the
the difierent
speciesof animals,
the
very
are
found
vegetables.
and
animal
cell wall
in
starting-point
body
sphericalin
primitive cell.
primitive form,
in the
7. The
of
part composed
smaller
generally
the
^f
less
more
are
These
filamentaryappendage.
much
IS
scarcely be recognized,as
cells
the
phenomena
most
are
nuclcus,
nearly
and
the
Bubmaxiiiarygiand,
parts
body during
place.
organic cells,which
second
oiv
from
same
in it.
on
the
or
contents, with
ceHs
is the
its movements,
^F^^
Rg.
of
its organs
body
of the
treats
ganic
one
of
anatomy
^j^^
1.
carbonic
organized
an
positionof
phenomena,
death
organized
of
meat
as
carbonate
parts of
constantlygoing
are
Vital
when
Fig.I.
exhale
their nourishment
ammonia,
as
and
Physiorogy
which
called
end
6. All
The
explains
are
obtain
they
the structure
life.
changes
Vegetables absorb
of the component
of rest.
in
as
and
oxygen
mals
ani-
of lime.
treats
state
absorb
; and
food,
in ttoo classes
comprised
their support.
phosphate
growth, no
no
dea'th,
Animals
oxygen
Anat'omy
5.
parent,
no
are
unorganized substances,
lime, and
HYGIENE.
vegetables,for
and
life,no
no
vegetables.
carbonic
in
has
organized bodies
and
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
similar
difiers but
; thus
little from
of them
whole
the
the
is alike.
It
organic world.
corresponding parts
composition of bone
that in another
and
In
of
in
this is
GENEBAL
of the
true
into
in the
there
Thus
in
the
is also
othet
the
distinguishone
is great
diversity
of those
differ in size,
blood-vessels
in the different
diversityin
animals.
This
to
an
established
an
that
another, and
enables
tinguish
dis-
to
even
species,and
same
of
development
species,and
the different
of the
the
conform
to
speciesfrom
individuals
composition
general arrangement
and
it is made
to
structure.
the
heart
It is this
organs.
animal, by which
us
the
indeed
kingdom
similarityof
similarityin the
arrangement,
with
case
the
animal
shape,and
the whole
that
so
is great
of all
structure
structures.
in
body,
general class by
one
Although
of the
13
BEMABK8.
know
them
apart.
9. Each
speciesof
animals
of
general arrangement
Physiologyof
of every
other
characters.
yet reference
in
more
vary
or
less from
will be
aid
in
province
our
Anatomy
will
reference
structure
species will
one
It is
of the
varies
and
Physiology of
made
in
other
to
the
this work
in
to
general
speak principally
the human
of
the
and
those
species;
species,whenever
illustration
in
theme
such
under
consideration.
10. The
human
study
body
may
of th^
The
three
divisions
are
Apparatus, which
and
of
The
a
includes
Mo'tor
the
joints;
everything that
is
divisions,
of the system.
the
Nu'tritive
; and
by
prises
com-
the
Sen'sory
of motion,
means
consciousness.
Cell is the
livingbody.
three
of the
Apparatus, which
Primitive
the
muscles, and
sensation, volition,and
11.
the functions
Apparatus, which
Physiology
the
chapters,correspondingwith
or
and
Anatomy
startingpoint
Tis'sue is the
composed,
and
texture
in the formation
of which
is itself formed
from
any
the
14
primitive cell.
of
one
the
or
taken
tissues,and
When
When
differingm
two
structure,
Appara'tns, as
When
12.
become
with
the
finite mind
The
of form
and
the
manifold
law
by
Being
and
is
the Creator
the
plan,
Although
greater than
all these
all this
amid
things.
diversity
regularityexhibited
nature
the
and
in
unchangeable
forth
Omniscient
an
Ruler
and
One
arranged
and
order
live,and
comprehension, yet
every
an
governed, we
unity in
that
exists
everywhere
; the
organs
called
we
it is
in its
know
to
operations of
as
in which
which
by
is limited
its
world
the
shape
which
are
arrangement
man
nervous
several
when
or
together,they
the laws
conceived
that
harmony
the
are
apparatus.
understood
have
must
structure
there
of
be
in
system in the
and
Sys'tem, as
systems,
contemplate
we
can
similar
taken
acquainted with
enough
organs
more
are
specialfunction, as
of
the nutritive
impressed
man
or
any
called
are
HYGIENE.
capable
several
together,they
system.
are
Origan is
An
more
lungs.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
according
and
to
tent
Omnipo-
of the universe
I
,
-""3ij*;oo-
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. Name
the
each
class
Give
the
does
2.
3. What
into
classes
comprise
which
the
all
matter
be
may
separated.
What
?
of
composition
are
I.
organized bodies.
distinguishingfeatures
Of
between
unorganized
organized
and
bodies.
ganized
unor-
bodies?
the
classes
the distinctions
between
4.
Name
6. Define
6.
Define
in the
7.
of
their
8.
what
may
What
does
form
of animals
said
similarity of
is said
organized
bodies
divided.
are
State
Physiology.
primitive
be
which
them.
Anatomy.
the
formation
What
into
and
of the
structure
of the
this difference
of
organic
How
are
they
modified
vegetables ?
primitive
cell in
organized bodies
What
difference
give
cells.
rise ?
of structure
in organized bodies
To
do the Anatomy
Why
9.
of another
each
speciesdiffer from
one
those
the
are
and
Anaiomy
Define
division.
In
11.
An
of
Physiology
and
species ?
How
10.
15
BEMABKS.
GENEBAL
is the
what
A
organ
world
An
system
is said of
What
12.
primitive
the
cell the
starting point
?
apparatus
unity
tissue?
in the
the system
of
and
is
What
of the
creation
jJ^OO
(
Section
II.
Composition
1. There
which
the
into
Body.
the
TJl'timate El'ements,
fourteen
axe
enter
of
of the
composition
human
in
plants, and
animals.
all
The
are
but
the
ultimate
they
Prox'imate
first class
second
exist
constitute
Flu'orine.
alone
each
in the
body
other, forming
all
all
solids
4. The
of
are
often
albumen, fibrin,and
proximate
of
Chloride
of
comprise
sodium, and
elements
and
called
"protein compounds,"
Chloride
and
Potassium,
of
fat.
of
The
comprise
stances
sub-
of lime.
organic
third
"albuminoid"
class
stances,
sub-
such
stances
sub-
casein.
of the
firstclass
Carbonate
of Potassa,
are
Water,
of
Lime,
Phosphate
of
gives fluidityto
such
phosphate
Magnesia, Phosphate
5. Water
inorganic, and
crystallizablesubstances
are
organic, and
as
divided
are
or
It
elements
remaining
Chlo'rine, Phos'phorus,
with
El'ements
are
class
origin,and
are
which
water, chloride
as
The
elements
in
body.
3. The
The
seldom
variously combined
are
proximate
of the
elements
Of
body.
Ni'trogen,exist
substances
or
the blood
and
fluids of the
the secretions, so
that
body.
they
16
move'
in their
6. Water
and
is estimated
entire
drink,
all
and
enamel
be about
to
the
from
the
It forms
firmness
and
body.
gives them
of the
bones
all
animals
the animal
kinds
9. Carbonate
It
the saliva.
helps
It exists in most
of it is formed
10.
mostly
11.
bones
12.
other
obtained
Carbonate
of the
ear
Carbonate
lymph.
It
the
from
and
is
but
in
tissues of the
only
tion
direc-
any
exists In all
all fruits.
the
in
the
blood, and
the
blood.
greater part
found
the
body.
in
muscles,
It is
the
readily
fluid form.
It is
the food.
is found
formed
of Potassa
helps to
in
albumen
is found
always
of Lime
are
out
body.
fluids
and
teeth, and
of lime
bones,
vegetables;
of Potassium
in water,
soluble
dissolve
The
fluids of
dissolved
be
nearly
in the
fruits and
in the
Chloride
blood, and
to
in
is found
of Soda
kind
man-
freely.
and
be bent
phosphate
vegetables,and
and
addition
an
it.
bones
then
may
The
animal
classes of
of it
may
solids
muriatic
breaking.
of meat
of the
solidity. It
substance, which
without
the
It is useful
as
and
races
partake
large part
dilute
by
body by
of Lime
Phosphate
the
through
Its use,
digestion.
among
the lower
of fluids
as
After
food.
the
four
taken
of the teeth.
passage
it aids in
of it taken
is found
even
in
thirds
organs.
of Sodium
mepibranes, and
two
amount
than
comprises
of the
; and
their
perform
more
The
is contained
performed
7. Chloride
to
the solids
keeps
can
calculated
been
This
that
lungs,the skin,
in
they
body.
system, has
poimds.
and
has
water
that
constitute
to
of the
weight
the
half
it
readily.
more
daily into
HYGIENE.
; and
body
condition, so
natural
functions
of the
the
easilythrough
more
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
dissolve
almost
is found
in the
The
bones.
entirelyof
small
it.
the albumen
in the blood.
13.
of
Phosphate
in very
14. The
of
Magnesia,
quantityin
small
17
BEMABKS.
GENERAL
fluids of the
of the second
elements
proximate
are
body.
Starch,
Sugars, Fats.
is found
15. Starch
for food.
form
It has
of starch
16.
food, and
vary
is derived
abundant
in the
occurs
The
both
somewhat
in the
in
both
them
body
; but
human
it
body
Fibrin,
in the blood
is the substance
to
of the
elements
position.
com-
vegetable food.
The
and
sugar
ties
varie-
chemical
and
bones.
vegetable
several
their
animal
of the
marrow
and
are
adipose tissue
Casein, Globulin,
Fi'brin
causes
brain, in the
animal
is converted
human
There
fruits.
from
proximate
Albumen,
the
in
from
containingboth
requiresfood
18.
found
been
it
digestion,
used
granules.
it, which
It is most
of
process
particularlyfrom
17. Fat
also
is obtained
Sugar
of
the
During
into sugar.
in
and
lymph,
which
removed
from
circulation.
the
Albn'men
20.
in
occurs
serous
temperature
of 160",
of
21.
by
the
22.
an
23.
the
in
and
the
in milk.
juicesof
stomach.
the
Glob'nlin
the
forms
is the
into
Pep'sin is
found
mucous
Os'tein is the
substance
the
coagulatesat
respects resembles
the
It is
the
principal part
in the
of
the
red
puscles
cor-
of
in the secretions
of mucus,
membranes.
substance
of the
cartilage;
both
bones, and
of
and
blood.
the different
24.
It
body.
many
from
lymph,
igg.
Cas'ein exists
of
blood, the
cavities of
fluids of the
white
the
which
Cartilag'in
are
changed
18
ANATOMY,
Mns'cnliii
25.
It has
fibre.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
is the
the power
26. Hem'atin
HYGIENE.
of the muscular
principalsubstance
of
contractility
during life.
of the red corpuscles
coloringmatter
is the
of the blood.
M ela'nin is the
27.
and
the
; but
races
less
the
to
exposure
changes
The
29.
to
is the
tissues of the
brown
and
of
bile.
the
On
oxygen,
color.
grass-green
albu'minoid
black
hair,
races.
coloring matter
air, in
a
white
yellow and
eye, the
the
in the
abundant
in the
so
Biliver'din
28.
and
It is very
skin.
in
coloring matter
form
substances
be
body,
and
must
They
preservation.
are
found
in the
cereal
grains,in meats,
in milk.
in eggs, and
"""io"
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
II.
1. What
is said
of the
ultimate
2. What
is said
of the
combination
3. How
the
are
elements
of the
elements
proximate
in the
the
6. What
is remarked
6. What
is said
of the
7. What
is said
of
8. What
of the
9. What
of the
10.
What
of the
Chloride
11.
What
of the
Carbonate
of
Lime?
12.
What
of
Carbonate
of
Potassa?
13.
WTiat
of the
Phosphate
of
Magnesia,
14.
Name
the
15.
What
is said
of
Starch?
16.
What
is said
of
Sugar
17.
What
is said
of
Fat?
18.
Name
the
19.
Define
proximate
the
Hematin.
29.
What
of the
use
quantity of
Chloride
of
Phosphate
Carbonate
of
Soda
proximate
Fibrin.
20.
of
Define
each
class.
in the
in the
water
in the
body
body
?
?
system ?
?
?
Potassium?
elements
of
Soda,
of the
second
of
third
and
of Potassa?
class.
elements
Albumen.
Muoosin.
Melanin.
is remarked
elements
first class.
water
Sodium
Lime
proximate
27.
of the
of
of
Pepsin, Panoreatin,
26.
elements
divided
4. Name
body
ultimate
of the
class.
Casein.
21.
24.
28.
the
22.
Ostein, CartOagin.
Biliverdin.
albuminoid
substances
Globulin.
25.
23.
Musculin.
20
AMATOMY,
5.
of
Connec'tiTe,
fibrous
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
Are'olar
or
which
tissue
tissue, is compoHed
interlace
or
soft
tensible
i||l that
"
'''t^
"
9Sm
"i
other
and
yet
muscles
the
It
which
uihfjmB^^'"
Car'tilage
whitish
than
harder
the
parts
as
of
have
7.
but
the
they
cartilages
^^Rk^^R^'A''
ji
ifll'
of
the
but
between
place
at
such
to
time
same
form
and
ftom
them
to
form
the
the
the
consists
of
oarti-
into
in
glass
bone.
solid
die-
to
permanent
changed
of
skelelon.
cartilages,
not
are
in
are
temporary
matrix,
appearance.
"
matrix
contains
nucleated
cells,
"
are
**^^'^*^^
iminddeii
in
comprises
fibrous
tissue
the
of
union
of
9-
mum.
are
in
arranged
cousists
I'i'brtHiaT'tilage
matrix
every
and
strength
the
single, or
oval
groups.
hiBiiiy mBgniBei
It
and
body
the
Cartilage
jaj^i^fa^'^'"'
which
'MMMB||M9a
jg
bone
adaptation
its
ossify
soon
'^^
than
stance
sub-
motion.
bones
8.
together
flexible
middle
^s"^i"''li"gground
of
difierent
tissue
elastic
tissue
appropnately
ig
softer
shape
in
li^es, which
^Hd^gBHggnmi
kept
tinguish
4,
Rg,
Bonneviixe
hence
called
are
called
smooth
the
is
bodj
,t
holds
bone
degree
first,all
cartilage;
These
be
to
moderate
At
the
i|gn(.g
and
It
and
tissue
require
is
appearance
hgament
fibrous
"""
g;nBtIe
or
m
'
their
the
connects
parts
~
places
impeding
' movements
so
and
their
in
ex
bonea
nerves
vessels
is
strong
very
skm
without
It
slightly
holds
it
blood
'
of filaments
each
cross
white
^R^
HTGIENB.
form
the
of
with
of
pure
the
cartilage.
bones, accompanied
tissue
it is well
with
fibfOUS
cartilage
intermixture
fibrous
cartilage ; and
imbedded
of
between
the
cells.
pure
Fibro-cartilage combines
with
the
adapted
moderate
to
elastic
the
erty
prop-
firmest
flexibility.
APPARATUS
MOTOR
Elas'tic
10.
of
usually
not
of
of
the
tissue
the
and
of
is
posed
com-
beneath
the
called
body,
the
the
giving
the
to
balls
eyewhere
every-
skin,
beauty
fat.
cheeks,
almost
the
and
the
behind
occurs
''''''''^""'^"
are
among
in
and
it
roundness
stitution
con-
which
epacea
hollows
the
temples,
;
does
yellowish substance,
occupies
muscles,
It
cells,
connective
it
size.
tlie
to
organ.
delicate
with
all the
and
any
is
alone
tissue,
essential
be
of
found
or"t
human
Fig.
It is
form.
never
in
the
brain,
eyeballs, the
the
6,
AOipi
lids,
eye-
or
the
cord.
Bpinal
Mus'cnlar
12.
fibres, called
Both
tissue
by
these
into
and
; and
or
faseiculi
tissue,wliich
viewed
fibres
through
distinctly
are
of
soft, red
these
bwidleg
the
connective
When
together.
composed
fibres
together
fibres
the
is
muscular
collected
are
found
fibres
fojutiimU.
are
rounded
sur-
holds
the
them
scope,
micro-
striated
marked
eiriated
muscular
are
or
called
fibres.
Fig.
muscular
Tlie
13.
intestines, and
posed
cular
are
of
fibres
UpoD
this
called
power
and
the
stomach,
blood-vessels,
which
possess
shortened,
of
coat
the
fibres
therefore,
arc,
posed
com-
ftbroua
important
any
to
seem
It
tbe
seldom
is
Ad'ipose,
filled
with
substance
tougli, duE-yclIow
fibres.
mingled
masses
11.
is
coarse
'tissues, and
in
tissae
are
striated,
not
umtrifUed
the
power
their
depend
are
^''^.'""dlai
and
"'""'i-
fibres.
All
contractility, hy
extremities
all the
"It
com-
muscular
of
brought
motiona
7,
the
of
nearer
the
which
they
cf
together.
body.
22
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
QUESTIONS.
I.
SECTION
2.
what
the
3.
Into
4.
What
5.
Describe
the
6.
Describe
cartilage.
is said
what
7. From
cartilages,and
8. Of
may
of
the
are
why
Of
what
fibro-cartilage.
elastic
11.
Describe
adipose
12.
Of
is
name
given
to
these
tissue.
is it found
Where
tissue.
tissue
is muscular
composed
How
it appear
does
under
is said
What
What
cartilage consist?
Describe
13.
is it ?
tissue?
10.
microscope
use
formed
bones
Describe
the
fibrous
tissue.
9.
what
of
filaments
the
converted
be
animals
of
tissue
fibrous
connective
does
what
body.
tissue.
fibrous
the
Bescribe
the
of
tissues
the
1. Name
of
the unstriated
muscles
What
is
power
possessed
fibres ?
by muscular
""HOO'
II.
Section
Anatomy
1. The
Bones
of the
interior
of
hard
are
body,
and
where
Bones.
the
firm, and
they
serve
are
as
placed
in the
frame-work,
or
The
muscles.
is to
important
periods of
life.
the
child ; yet
one
bone
is two
the
to
are
for
body
the
what
of
attachment
the
frame-work
building.
Th'e number
2.
bones
and
organs,
in the
hundred
of bones
Many
they
of them
afterwards
adult.
and
in
The
the
body
are
in two
grow
number
eight,
besides
varies
or
at
more
difierent
pieces in
usually given,
thirty-two
teeth.
Of
be divided
as
in the
vertebrae.
4. The
like
its shaft
The
the
An
5.
elevation
and
color, and
which
or
to
the
chalk-white
and
air
the
as
rounded,
bone
in
and
as
at
the
in
the
is called
bone
called
are
body they
removed
the
the young,
that
advances
they
of
from
in
bluish-
the
body,
the bones
blood
atid
posed
ex-
assume
tough,
are
easily broken
not
are
cess.
pro-
foram'ina.
are
the
from
is called
light,they gradually
In
elastic, so
person
orifice
in the
are
appearance.
somewhat
on
apertures
When
is in them.
tremities.
ex-
largerthan
are
are
bone
its
of support
is
bone
are
long
called
are
base
broader
or
more
the bones
6. While
but
two
ends
long bones
prominence
or
part of
as
head.
single aperture
fora'men,
white
of the
of the
end
is called
the
upper
and
cylindrical,
main
and
body,
or
furnishing a
joints. When
thigh-bone,it
The
tube.
in the
as
irregularbones,
the
less
or
may
in the
as
; and
more
are
extremities
shaft, thus
the
bones,
ankle
and
long bones
mostly hollow,
broad
wrist
in the
bones,
is called
; the
limbs
long bones,
the
limbs.
form, and
body
classes
four
into
lower
and
in the
bones
3. The
the lower
sixty in
limbs, and
the upper
sixty-fourin
in the trunk,
head, fifty-four
in the
bones, thirtyare
these
23
APPARATUS.
MOTOR
life,they become
and
harder
brittle.
more
7. The
bones
composed
are
are
nearly twice
of animal
but
until
with
which
In
adds
increase,
matters
of the material
easilyfractured
more
equal;
of the
in old persons
young.
bones
the
cavities ; in the
fat; and
are
In
matters.
is about
matters
fully three-fourths
hence, they
Fishes,
of these
They
water.
as
mineral
grows
compose
in the
than
few
person
they
bones
the
as
and
matters
heavy
as
in
are
Mammalia,
Birds, many
to their
perfectly solid
many
of them
lightness.
of
are
; in
them
Reptiles, they
are
hollow,
hollow,
but
are
and
contain
are
filled with
filled
air,
24
ANATOMY,
8. When
bones
bon"ilack
called
burned,
are
become
they
matter,
but
when
of
bones
When
mineral
matters
animal
or
which
matter,
which
bone, and
into
dissolved
are
in
out,
dilute
is
entirely
white
pure
muriatic
leaving only
retains
is very
then
are
matter
of
are
animal
color,
commerce.
steeped
are
the
char
brittle,and
animal
the
HYGIENE.
to
as
very
parts left
9.
so
black, and
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
the
acid, the
the
cartilage,
original form
of the
be tied
even
knot.
The
10.
bones
is firm
which
loose and
; and
compact
exterior
an
interior
an
layer,
layer,which
is
spongy.
The
11.
and
of
mostly composed
are
of the
shaft
substance, but
compact
The
and
filled with
are
their
bones
spongy.
long
bones
long
is
extremities
in the form
are
more
are
of hollow
boft,"yellowfat, called
of the
mostly composed
less
or
cylinders,
mar'row
or
medul'la.
The
12.
broad
with
layer
bones, and
short
bulk
is
13.
the
substance
compact
of spongy
bones
that
in
strength,as
in the skull.
The
where
an
muscles.
also
helps
thin
The
of
layer
in the
the
the
is needed
reduce
to
bones
of the
shafts
substance
spongy
near
enlarged surface
It
have
long
increases
increasingtheir weight
abundantly
most
occurs
intervening.
are
stance,
sub-
compact
gives strength to
abundantly
most
of
material.
substance
compact
bones, and
it
substance
irregular bones,
of spongy
it is found
hence,
layers
two
externally,while
composed
The
have
bones
joints,and
therefore,
in all bones
force
the
of
of
falls
and
blows.
14.
The
is covered
exterior
with
early life,this
but
it afterwards
surface
fibrous
membrane
becomes
membrane,
may
so
be
blended
called
at
joints,
perios'teum.
separated from
with
the
the bone
the
as
In
bone
not
;
to
26
ANATOMY,
be
from
easily detached
which
nourish
lines the
it.
bone,
the
muscles
for the
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
contains
serves
as
of
the
blood-vessels
the
medium
ligaments.
surface
interior
it
and
and
It
HYGIENE.
ment
of attach-
similar
long bones,
membrane
and
is called
the
endos'teum.
first all bones
At
15.
deposits of calcareous
points, called
continue
the
16.
and
The
in
in the
grow
the
of
short
cartilage,but
made
are
in
whole
all the
bones
bone
is
of the
wards
after-
or
more
deposits
fied.
ossicoijjpletely
is not
body
pleted
com-
twenty-fifthyear.
in
grow
length by
continuous
cartilageat
their
extremities
manner
from
their
same
bones
one
These
ossification.
the
the
bones
ossification
bones
but
about
long
of
until
Ossification
until
matter
centres
increase
to
of
composed
are
from
grow
; the
edges
all parts
of
growth
broad
borders
or
their
external
surfaces.
17.
deposits continue
Calca'reous
throughout
life ;
added, while
the
The
bones
during
18.
of
The
old
and
of the
bones
The
the
median
line
part of the
a
situated
and
across
containing
orbits,and
decays, and
of the
constantly
is removed.
times
many
into those
of
eight bones
of
and
the
for the
the
the
base
the
the
the
Fari'etal
two
united
nose.
the
forehead; the
and
at
of
the
cranium,
of the
bones,
together
the
in
the
posterior
and
having
spinal cord
; the
Sphe'noid bone,
from
side
important foramina
base
Tem'-
containing
spinal column,
passage
of the
numerous
bone, situated
of
two
cranium,
the
ear;
head,
the
forming
behind
divided
are
side
the
to
foramen
bone,
Eth'moid
is
ear.
skull, resting on
large oval
Fronfal
top
the
Head
each
on
one
the
at
bone
in the
therefore, changed
are,
composed
leading
orifice
situated
the
is
Skull
poral bones,
made
bone
new
bone
efiete
be
life.
of
growth
body
the
long
thus,
to
to
; and
brain, between
side,
the
the
28
AHATOMY,
24.
The
bones
PHYSIOLOGY,
of
face, which
the
mouth
and
the
of
bridge
forming
cheeks.
25.
Eftoh
the
of
the
named
and
four
nose
in the
contains
feur
They
are
An'vil,
the
the
bone
the
that
only
weigh
together
in
aid
which
small
very
trils
nos-
bones,
Orblo'nlftr
the
"he
part
Hal'let,
so
are
each
of
hearing.
and
Btir'mp,
the
prominent
bonea,
sense
of
roof
Halar
two
Ear
small
very
the
the
most
the
forming
bones,
the
the
of
ing
ITa'sal bones, form-
two
and
two
wall
loner
Tnr'binated
two
; the
Laoh'rjrmal bones,
two
; the
two
back
the
of
the
on
the
Bituat"d
jaw,
the
jaw
upper
part
greater
of
pairs, are
bonea,
upper
orbit
in
the
Pal'"te
one
HYGIENE.
are
the
AND
few
grains.
The
26.
pelvis, and
the
the
of
root
The
of
Spinal
1,
pbltis."
bra
to
It
Ih
one;
riba;
12,
10,
in
the
shape,
\(yy;^^
at
the
main
is
which
with
surface
Each
the
the
verte-
part,ealled
half
upper
nearlyJ
projections,
posed
com-
called
from
extends
KTf.
seven
is
Colunm
pelvis.
of
consists
*||^^"""the body,
?niH;T,DteTi-
called
twenty-four bones,
vertebrsB.
skull
num,
ster-
bone
tongue,
the
bone.
Hy'oid
27.
the
of
ribs, the
the
spinal column,
Tnmk
the
those
into
separated
are
of
bones
cylinder
and
the
it has
flat:
"
which
These
Ver'tebraB
The
28.
Their
classes.
spinalcord.
three
into
the
classes:
the
the
with
each
lower
other.
The
processes
is called
turns
lower
31.
surface
Lum'bar
the thorax
from
vertebrae
and
32.
to
vertebraB
the
the head
their lower
Between
each
attached
neck, and
so
that
falling,seldom
thickness, so
as
and
fiimish
them.
to
their
and
The
surface
two
of the
are
processes
vertebrae
other
both
is
extend
number, and
of the lumbar
their bodies
vertebrae.
are
Their
flat.
a
plate of
fibro-cartiholds
the
them
spinal
produces
injury.
to
spinalcolumn.
8*
rotates,
their upper
the
longer,and
are
of either
those
number,
are
five in
are
pelvis.
longer and
are
larger,than
upper
; and
flat.
both
are
in
vertebrae
of the
those
larger,than
The
dorsal
of the
twelve
are
ribs which
twelve
the
processes
bodies
head
the
Dor'sal vertebrae
for
support
supporting
its
it.
on
30. The
li^^Sil.ttbC^.""
vertebra
is called
vertebra
Fig.ll. avertebeaopthbNeck.
nearly horizon-
first cervical
second
surface
interlock
The
tal.
is
they
short,and
aU
surface
that
so
convex,
are
smaller
are
upper
and
concave,
the
canal,
of the other
of either
those
than
and
number,
in
seven
The
; and
Cer'vical vertebrae
The
29.
or
form
vertebrae.
lumbar
are
vertebrae
back
dorsal, or
divided
are
to
as
ments.
liga-
vertebrae; the
neck
cervical, or
so
the bodies
behind
arranged
are
processes
and
for muscles
attachment
pointsof
as
serve
29
APPARATUS.
MOTOR
give the
any
forward
and
These
plates vary
backward
curve
in
to
30
Yellow
33. The
number
inclose
Ante'rior
34. The
length of
vertebrae,and
the
of
Poste'rior Ver'tebrai
bind
them
side.
Ribs
They
ribs; the
In
in
the
from
36. The
childhood
to
while
its form
are
is called
its apex
into
these
an
same
Pel'vis is
The
and
coccyx,
The
the two
Sa'cmm
hip-bones,at
front
the
two
ribs
are
to
the
but,
eighth,and
in
width, they
several
thorax.
It is in
united
in later years
the
the
Tho'rax,
neck
at the
time
ribs,
tightlacing often
admirably adapted to
the blood-vessels
to
bone.
one
It is conical
Chest
or
in
; but
It is
oval.
into
vertebrae, the
dorsal
by
pieces
permit
the
which
are
of
movements
organs.
38.
39.
at
by cartilage,
lowest
the first to
the
true
or
cavity formed
shape, with
other
the
from
these
spinalcolumn.
called
are
each
the twelfth
eighth
each
on
united
are
the
the sternum,
within
helps to
; twelve
with the
from
; but
changes
The
are,
part of the
37. The
number
ribs increase
Ster'num,
of the front
in
spinalcanal, and
back
united
ribs
falfie
gradually diminish
and
posteriorpart of the
and
cartilage,
are
front,and
length,the
decrease
ribs
of
means
three
called
are
the
the
in the
upper
by
next
united
not
all united
seven
sternum,
and
the entire
firmly together.
covers
twenty-fourin
are
are
In front,the
or
ligament
combine
firmlytogether.
The
35.
them
joining
of the vertebrae,within
bodies
extends
ligament
the
They
of motion.
freedom
Ver'tebral
between
spinal canal.
the
considerable
situated
are
behind, which
of the vertebrae
entirelyto
as
HYGIENE.
sue,
ligaments, composed of yellow^elastic tis-
twenty-threepairs. They
the arches
so
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
and
column.
of four bones
hip-bones.
is a triangularbone
the back
convex
composed
; the
situated between
behind, and
is
the
sacrum,
continuation
is
concave
of the
the
in
spinal
40.
In
The
wards
41.
into
united
They
ligaments.
the
In
cavity,
thigh-bone
42.
is
They
two.
Fig. 13.
"niculau*
Fig,li,
is
are
the
TraHmmng."
Ta.
the
TmWubi
in
bony
socket,
or
the
head
which
in
by strong
sacrum
each
clavicle,
number
extremity
upper
the
scapula,
the
early
union.
cup-like
of
the
t"
thirty-
humerus,
the
Fig. 14.
Fig. 13.
nt
after-
are
by ligamente
deep
acetab'alnm,
of
Fig. 12.
Hg.ia,
sacrum.
placed.
bones
The
theae
together, forming
hip-bone
the
called
the
to
front
in
grow
each
of
aide
attached
are
united
are
afterwards
life, but
pieces, but
four
of
the
of
end
lower
the
to
bone.
one
Hip-bones
The
joined
coasists
Jt
life
early
is
Coc'oyx
31
APPABATD
HOIOB
i,The"haf[i2,tb8h8adofaiBhi
-1, The
elbow;
'hicb
tiro
u^
I1"SD,
"
1. The
phaluig"fl Df
the
2, tlie
qIhb;
artlculatea
at
carpal,
orwriitbo
thumb
and
nt
the
the
flp.
2, tb"
metB-cupiil
32
ANATOMY,
ulna, the
and
radius
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
the
carpus,
HYGIENF
the
meta-carpus, and
^ptwr
langes.
43.
ClaVicle,
The
upper
Its
scapula.
the
towards
drawn
in
It is held
Hu'merus,
TJl'na is
The
is
and
little
the humerus
being
the muscles
is
arm-bone,
or
which
envelop it.
long, cylindrical
glenoid cavityof
the
the
scapula to
is
the
Car'pus
The
These
rows.
and
49.
The
palm
They
fingersand
Fhalang'es
in the
bones
stronger than
required
limbs, and
52.
The
the
of
with
at
the
Meta-ear'pas is composed
bones
The
articulates
stronglybound
are
in
ments,
togetherby liga-
are
those
to
the wrist
from
the three
The
lower
in each
bones
the
fingers are
the
to
extremities
are
extremities
the
of the
weight
finger,and
the
named
little finger.
of the upper
support
bones, forming
the thumb.
thumb.
of tho
of five
extend
also
ulna, both
the wrist.
of the
The
two
composed
bones
the
to
wrist-joint.
the
of the hand.
first bones
50.
form
is
with
outer
or
It
wrist.
the
at
It articulates
side). It is attached
and
forearm,
hinge joint.
the upper
on
side of the
radius.
elbow, forming
the
at
inner
or
the
than
longer
(the thumb
elbow
the lower
on
Ba'dius
The
47.
are
from
to
46.
the
back
upper
positionentirelyby
The
bones
the
the
at
two
sternum
the sternum.
bone, situated
45.
the
from
is to
use
extends
gular
Scap'ola,or shoulder-blade, is a broad, thin,trian-
44. The
the
or
larger
and
they
; because
the head.
bones
of each
lower
limb
are
and
tella,
pathe
phalanges.
53.
The
Fe'mnr,
or
thigh-bone, is
the
longestbone
in the
MOTOR
It
th^^ia,
54.
placed
extends
The
front
to
the
cavity
deep
of
is
kneecap,
or
the
musclesof
the
the
lower
to
kase
t, tin
edge,
bone,
edge,
upper
tendon;
thelegbya
Fig. 15.
at
hip-bone
chestnut"haped
At
knee-joint
of the
some
le
the
in
knee-joint
Patella,
ID
attached
from
the
at
33
APPARATUS.
it is
while
Fi)r.ifi.
eitemal
apkle
it ia connected
with
tibia
the
by
strong
ligament
55.
of the
the
Tho
TiVia,
leg.
tibia
and
The
the
or
dun-bone,
tibia
fibula
joins the
join
the
and
Fib'nla
the
femur
tarsus
at
at
the
the
the bones
are
knee
; and
ankle.
both
34
56.
The
the
and
the
middle
of
composed
of
which
bones,
These
are
the
form
heel
foot.
the
Keta-tar'sas
is
of
These
the
HYGIENE.
sereti
together by ligameDts.
instep
The
57.
is
Tar'su
bound
strongly
AND
PMYSIOLOQY,
ANATOMY,
foot.
five
of
composed
and
the
bones, forming
tarsus
arranged
are
Fig. 17.
BO
the
give
to
as
spring, giving
the
of
force
58.
elasticity
falls
and
toes, and
arched
an
to
the
which
step, and
like
acts
serving
to
break
jars.
three
bones
in
great
the
are
bones
two
form,
the
sudden
Fhalau'ger
The
smaller
foot
the
in
each
of
the
toe.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1.
What
IB
remarked
2.
What
is
said
3.
Hov
are
bones
the
long
Describe
6,
What
ie
6.
What
is the
7.
What
of
process
their
is
the
the
4.
remarke'l
of
of
said
color
II,
the
bonea?
number
of
clMaified
bonei
booM.
?
of the
foramen
bones
?
id
and
oat
of
the
bod;?
What
elasticitjf
of
the
weight
tutd
compoaitioD
of
the
boD"s
is
34
56.
Telt'sus
The
bound
strongly
the
and
57.
of
is
are
heel
the
form
These
the
and
hones, forming
five
of
composed
These
foot.
the
of
vhich
bones,
aeren
foot.
the
Heta-tar'suB
The
of
composed
together by ligaments.
instep
middle
the
is
HYOIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
tarsus
arranged
are
FIR. 17.
BO
as
spring, giving
force
the
58.
of
Fhalau'ger
the
bones
two
step,
which
and
acts
serving
to
like
break
jars.
are
the
form,
the
sudden
and
toes, and
smaller
arched
an
elasticity to
falls
The
loot
the
give
to
three
the
in
bones
in
great
toe.
each
of
the
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1.
What
ia remarked
2.
What
3.
Uov
4.
Describe
6.
What
6.
What
ia
What
of
the
the
long boitai.
process
their
is said
color
of
clawified
bonea
bonea?
number
the
the
is the
of
emarked
7.
are
said
of
of
the
II.
bonea
fbrtunen
bonea
?
in
and
oat
of
the
body?
elasticity T
of
the
weight
and
oompoeidon
of
the
bonea?
What
ia
8. What
9.
What
is the^'eflfectof
10.
What
is the
of the
bones
11.
What
long
bones
steeping
bones
the
in acid
?
,
the
between
difference
bones
the
burning
from
produced
are
35
APPARATUS.
MOTOR
exterior
the
and
interior
layer
is said
What
between
difference
is the
12.
What
is said
of the
13.
What
is remarked
the
of
shaft
the extremities
and
of the
marrow
in the
layers
of the
the
broad
compact
bones
In the
substance
Of
short
the
bones
stance
sub-
spongy
?
14.
Describe
the periosteum.
The
15.
How
is
cartilage changed
into
completed
16.
How
17.
What
18.
How
19.
endosteum.
bone
At
what
grow
is ossification
age
?
do
different
the
is
change
classes of bones
the
bones
of
Describe
the
bones
which
20.
How
the
two
21.
What
is said
of
22.
What
of
23.
How
are
are
the
divided
head
the
compose
the
bones
?
skull.
in the
bones
Describe
the
layers arranged
of the
skull
sutures?
of
shape
bones
many
the
in the
in
skull
the
the
face ?
single bones
of
the
"ce.
bones
of the
24.
What
is said
25.
What
is remarked
26.
How
27.
Of
28.
Name
29.
Describe
30.
The
dorsal
31.
The
lumbar
32.
The
intervertebral
33.
The
yellow ligament.
34.
The
anterior
35.
Describe
the
ribs.
36.
Describe
the
sternum.
37.
Describe
the
thorax.
are
what
the
bones
is the
the
of
of
spinal
three
the
the
which
are
composed?
in
pairs ?
ear
separated
trunk
the
face
in each
bones
column
classes
cervical
of the
Describe
the
vertebrse.
of
vertebraj.
vertebrae.
vertebrae.
and
ligament.
the
posterior vertebral
ligaments.
"
38.
Describe
the
pelvis.
39.
Describe
the
sacrum.
40.
Describe
the
coccyx.
41.
Describe
the
hip-bones.
42.
What
43.
Describe
the
44.
Describe
the
scapula.
45.
Describe
the
humerus.
46.
Describe
the
ulna.
47.
Describe
the radius.
is said
of the
extremities?
upper
clavicle.
vertebrae.
36
ANATOMY,
PHYSIOLOGY,
48.
Describe
the
carpus.
49.
Describe
the
meta-carims.
60.
What
the phalanges
are
61.
What
is said
62.
Name
the
63.
Describe
the
femur.
64.
Describe
the
patella.
66.
Describe
the
tibia.
66.
Describe
the
tarsus.
67.
Describe
the
meta-tarsus.
68.
What
of
the
bones
the
are
of the
lower
of
the
fingers?
extremities?
limbs.
lower
of the
phalanges
HYGIENE.
AND
toes?
3""KOO-
III.
Section
Physioloqy
1. The
Bones
its
preserve
; and
muscles, thus
united
fiirnish
adapted
afford
places
the
to
of
offices
portant
im-
most
of attachment
varied
for
They
are
movement;
yet
strength,having
all
moulds
who
by Him
to
serve
of wonderful
several
body, and
protection
admit
to
as
examples
to their
of the
they furnish
becoming
together,so
they
the framework
shape. They
organs
the
are
Bones.
the
of
been
things
in infinite wisdom.
2. In the
that
they
The
compact
shafts
of the
in the
pelvis,which
body
3. The
but not
where
spongy
their
they
lees liable
the
long bones,
in the
; and
for
is
substance
sustain
increases
at
dislocations.
the
joints,so
This
blows, and
in the
strength;
for
of the
the bulk
; it also increases
articulate
is porous
weight of
the
is
the
exposed to injury,
is most
skull, which
weight
to
required to
exterior
abundant
required
are
observe
may
their interior
is most
substance
which
we
Their
special use.
substance, and
of compact
spongy.
of the bones,
structure
designed
are
composed
and
general
the amount
that
substance
thus
they
bones,
of surface
are
helps
to
much
break
prevents injury. In
that
animala
contain
bones
material
4.
; as
be
may
rod ; for
solid
it is
known
truth, that
column
will
column
ofmaterial.
of
example
this
in the
rye. and
light,yet have
support
the
solid
same
familiar
occurs
principle
culms
or
of
wheat,
as
which
are
very
strengthenough
ripenedfruit,
their
about
in
crsuiam
is
waved
when
even
much
stems
corn,
tube, and
hollow
well-
the
plants,such
many
alligators.
hollow
than
coDtaining
amount
is
spongy
same
support
greater weight
and
in
be if in
iKine would
weight of
to
the
stronger thau
bones
long
of the
amount
in snakes
noticed
shaft of the
The
much
small
(."omparatively
tha
to
the
falls,
injury from
less liable to
therefore
are
close
remaio
bodies
whose
or
creep,
ground, and
371
APPARATUS.
MOTOR
passing breeze.
5.
The
htunan
in
ovate
similar
form,
the
to
thp,tit
egg,
so
The
smallest
is moat
is
and
ia
and
in
altogether,it
is situated
injuryfrom
reduce
to
is
Si
resist pressure
to
strongest end
it tend
very
siiape of an
well adapted
liable to receive
sutures
Fig.18.
the
bony
case
force
all sides.
"ont, where
in
external
on
The
violence.
of blows
exactlysuited
and,
to
it
sidered
con-
proteet
6. The
spinal coltimn
is the back-bone
of the
the
all the
circulation.
cord;
important
It
it admits
also
of
organs
provides
varied
of
a
of
body.
It furnishes
attachment
support and
tect
pro-
and
respiration,digestion,
canal
movemont,
tnal jH
protect the spinal
backward, forward,
to
iird.
38
ANATOMY,
and
either
to
helps
to
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
secure
brain
from
HYGIENE.
of
it
fibroHiartilage,
shocks
the
occasioned
by
to the
poses
pur-
for which
they
and
the bones
to
elasticity
is
hand
but
are
The
for locomotion,
are
give
to
as
for
are
facilitate the
to
as
limbs
the lower
limbs
upper
shaped
so
arranged
so
adapted
are
designed.
object;
of any
extremities
are
the
prehenBion, and
grasping
lower
and
upper
firmness
and
the step.
-""o'i9"oo-
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. Mention
of the
some
2. What
is said
of
substance
oompact
general
is remarked
4. What
is said
of the
of the
shaft
bones.
the
of
structure
abundant
most
3. What
of
uses
the
III.
the bones
Where
is the
spongy
substance
of the
bones
long
in the
bones?
Illustrate
by
familiar
example.
5. What
is remarked
6. What
are
7. To
what
the
of
the
of the
uses
the
and
of the cranium
use
column
spinal
the upper
are
purposes
and
shape
?
the
lower
limbs
adapted?
-oo^O^oo-
Section
Anatomy
or
Physiology
and
1. The
joining together of
while
between
called
the
dovetail
so
or
the
more
skull
to
overlap
are
and
; but when
other,
as
union
joints are
Those
and
toothed,
the frontal
sutures
each
Some
the
immovable,
are
sutures
Ser'rated
by
less motion.
or
other, as between
as
formed
bones.
more
possess
these
called
are
bevelled,
of
When
into each
bones, they
aire
others
bones
sutures.
two
Joints.
the
of
articulations,are
joints, or
immovable,
IV.
so
are
as
to
parietal
the
between
edges
the
parietal
and
39
APPARATUS.
MOTOR
Squa'mous
called
are
sutures.
The
2.
have
in the
jointsof
ankle-jointshave
lateral motion,
3. Some
vertebrse
The
4.
socket
wrist
and
the
together with
between
as
the
head
of the bones
the two
is
of the
rotated
forearm, by
which
joints,in
head
the
another
fullest
bone,
admit
of
of
bone
one
in the
as
free
motion,
the
are
fijtsinto
shoulder
almost
in
movement
and
direction.
every
The
5.
flexion
two
and
bone
extension.
toward
the
as
in the flexion
of the
leg backward
upon
oppositeof
The
synovial
been
forward
upon
thigh.
It
which
All
membranes.
it is
attached,
the
arm,
is the
Extension
brings the
back
limb
and
ment
move-
to
an
tended
ex-
into the
enter
composition of
ligaments
the
of these, except
the
ligaments,
described.
and
of fibrous
are
band-like
help
to
band-like
the
tissue,and
joined to
forming
The
At
which
bones, cartilages,
fibro-cartilages,
ligaments, and
capsular
the bones
with
7. The
8.
flexion.
structures
joints,are
the
forearm
the
of the shaft
is the movement
bone
other
called
hinge-jointsare
straightenedposition.
or
have
the
Flexion
one
6.
in
movements
of
with
rotary motion,
.admit of the
hip-joints.They
the
The
knee-joints,
rotated.
are
cup-shaped cavity of
the
the
Some
side.
skull, by which
jointswhich
halt and
and
toes.
either
to
articulations
the hands
which
the
elbow
of motion.
hinge-like motion,
motion
to
in the
as
fingersand
joints have
also in the
and
the
the
or
next
in their kind
jointsvary
motion,
hinge-like
and
movable
the
the
strengthen
the movable
the
ligaments. They
are
flexible.
very
edges
joints,so
ligaments
of two
of the articular
as
the
are
The
to
form
lateral
kinds
are
posed
com-
capsular
surfaces
of
cylindricalsacs.
ligaments
which
joints.
joints,the
which
fibro-cartilage,
ends
gives
of the bones
to
them
are
very
covered
smooth.
40
ANATOMY,
polished surface,and
of
At
friction.
forms
which
both
around
the
These
ends
the
bones
External
joint.
The
the
forming
so
joints,
lower
movement,
lateral
10.
in
as
the
closed
attached
are
them
sac
the
to
securelytogether.
is lined
with
oily fluid,called
an
still further
reduce
the friction in
The
forward
and
11.
The
the head
but
hinge-like,
it may
rotated, thus
hand.
which
13.
The
The
joint,and
is the
is the
largestof
hinge-likein
14.
Creator
much
In
and
no
more
is the
joint,in
the
atlas
which
from
side to side, as
freedom
to
for
joints,and
as
of
hinge motion,
grasping objects.
the head
best
also
well
the movements
have
the
body.
femur
of the
instance
of
ball
the
the
glenoid cavity of
joint in
thumb
them
hip-joint,where
acetabulum,
and
is between
socket
in the
be moved
admirably adapts
are
fingers
side,
the head
occipitalbone
ball and
movable
giving
of
movements
the
moves
elbow-jointis
; and
vertebrae.
shoulder-jointis
12. The
upward
chewing.
or
of the head
It is the most
mouth
closingthe
between
and
do"vnward
backward
and
of the humerus
scapula.
the
and
the axis, or
of
in mastication
as
occur
to the
admits
opening
movement,
atlas ; but
the
of
secretes
is attached
jaw
hinge-like,and
be
at
joint.
or
the
is open
edges
capsular ligament
which
synovial membrane,
9. The
a
the
to
making
to hold
as
that
bag
; thus
to
of the
surface
internal
Syno'via,to lubricate,and
the
like
amount
capsular ligament
joined
are
of the
is
there
joint
HYGIENE.
bones
the
each
surfaces
articular
in
lessens
cylindricalsac,
ends.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
both
it and
the
The
in
moves
and
socket
knee-joint
ankle-jointare
their movements.
part of the
human
clearlyexhibited,
of the
movable
is the
frame
than
joints,and
in
wisdom
of the
tlie admirable
their
adaptation to
struction
con-
the
42
ANATOMY,
2. The
muscles
and
the
and
its insertion.
while
generally the
bluish-white
inelastic.
the
form
thus
of
these
the
flattened
4. Each
muscle
which
"ei8'cia,
is
muscles
their
is invested
holds
its fibrils
in
enveloped
flattened
in grooves
in the
beneath
the
the
phalanges.
or
the
over
those
at
The
6.
between
entirely
bones,
or
holds
the
kept
in
the wrist
the tendons
are
more
pass
or
muscles
and
confined
places by
ing
pass-
which
fingers,
the
beneath
ligaments of
the
less invested
fibrous
together.
often
of the
of
ligaments,
with
reduces
serous
the friction
points,
muscles
the
are
muscular
give to
fibres
and
are
appearance,
which
muscles
the
only moderately
blood-vessels
These
the
their
red
or
sensitive.
nerves
; hence
The
run
them.
parallel to
muscles
their
tinue
con-
group
firmer
their
in the tendons
at
each
are
The
few
others
sheath, called
and
of
but
from
insertion, and
and
is characteristic
are
; but
fibrous
together;
are
ligament
bones, they
blood-vessels
they
are
points of attachment,
cylindricaltendons
or
When
called
membrane,
or
flexible,but
still stronger
ligaments,as
beneath
pass
yellowish
ing.
glisten-
origin or
with
is
lengthwise,and
the
to
to
movable, and
aponenro'ses.
called
are
width
same
able,
mov-
of
cylindricalcords
or
is least
gradually narrowed
are
muscles
of the
origin
spinal column
bundles
very
of the tendons
Most
its
spinal column.
are
and
strong
the
is most
tissue,striated
very
fleshypart
and
the
sinews,
or
fibrous
are
from
called
are
to
point that
farthest
one
to the bones
point that
the
nearest
one
is the
tendonfly
They
origin is
The
the insertion
muscle,
HYGIENE.
their tendons
by
of
attachment
generally the
is
3. The
attached
are
points of
and
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
animals.
nerves,
tendons
their white
although
contain
color
and
insensibility.
7. The
names
of the muscles
are
mostly
their attachments,
shape, their position,
or
derived
their
from
their
physiological
44
ANATOMY,
Some
action.
each
penniform
and
in
muscles
circular
all
twelve, which
9.
bend
to
in the
and
the
muscles
the individual
all the
without
in
The
a
their
be
in the
them
the
or
move.
body.
The
are
the
The
Fal'pebral Orbic'ular
The
O'ral
voluntary
only
move
embrace
embraces
the
control
in
and
the
act
heart,
continue
of the person.
admit
respiration
;
but
of the mind.
Neck.
elevates
muscle
as
nearly
which
always independent
12.
are
classes,called
The
organs
will, as
Head
as
hand,
some
involuntary muscles
muscle
Occip'ito-front'al
of
laxes,
re-
so
involuntary muscles
class
The
act
act
the
; and
will, and
other
the
they
two
They
This
11.
13.
into
of the
to
from
of
Muscles
other
straightened.
arm
divided
of the
regular movements
in
straightenthe limbs,
or
control
some
the
elbow
the
the
of
pair act
shuttingof
involuntary muscles.
influence
are
exception
of each
the
the
the
contracts
during life,without
action
limited
muscles
extend
they
the intestines,and
their movements
in the human
pairs, with
at
arm
the stomach,
in
run
mouth, and
fiexors, because
opened,
wishes
muscles
in
joints,as
may
under
act
feather,
produced.
of the
is
voluntary and
muscles
of
the
at
bending
The
10.
others
muscles
one
called
are
the hand
when
as
is
extensors, because
called
entire
an
the
five hundred
; when
motion
the limbs
ranged
ar-
therefore,called
; and
around
arranged
other
each
muscles
Some
like
single. The
are
thus
and
arranged
are
than
are
oppositionto
are,
their fibres
sphincter muscles.
more
are
These
body.
feather, and
at
triangular,
are
have
; some
the muscle
direction, as
8. There
; some
bi-peniiilbrmmuscles
orbicular, or
called
some
tendon
muscles
of
HYGIENE.
spindle-shaped,terminating
are
flattened
side
one
called
are
them
radiated
called
are
like
of
of
extremity
and
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
the
closes
eyebrows.
the
eyelids,
winking.
Orbic'ular
muscle
closes
the
mouth,
and
46
the
by
mouth,
Tem^pond
The
15.
draws
the
toward
face is turned
Muscles
17.
and
The
18.
The
aids
The
muscle
the
20.
the
When
draws
downward
arm
the
ward,
for-
ribs.
of the
abdomen.
and
organs,
of
depress the
side
one
They
only act,
side.
of
Part
draws
backward,
muscle
and, with
shoulder
the
Straight Abdom'inal
the
front
Back
the head
backward,
contracts,
Trunk.
the
the muscles
that
the
Latis'simus
sides contract,
the
draws
abdominal
Trape'zius muscle
The
of
muscle
and
the
to
of
spine,and
21.
and
is turned
The
the
chest.
sides
compress
Muscles
produce
side alone
one
Part
Oblique' and
respiration.
body
both
respirationby elevating
the
occupy
ribs in
in
External
support and
the
opposite side.
muscle
Ser'rated
Great
and
19.
the
across
when
Front
Pec'toral
Great
forward
but
the
the
of
muscles
muscle, when
downward,
head
the
of
angles
the
jaw.
Stemo-mas'toid
The
16.
elevate
Mas'seter
and
lower
in the
movements
ture,
aper-
smiling.
in
as
of the
shape
lips.
muscles
Zygomatic
The
14.
of the
movements
HYGIENE.
in the
changes made
various
the
produces
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
Trunk.
the shoulder
to
or
draws
the
the
back
toward
side.
one
downward
the humerus
pectoral muscles,
is the
chief
agent in climbing.
22.
Ehom'boid
The
muscle
draws
the
scapula upward
and
backward.
23.
ribs, and
thus
Supe'rior Ser'rated
The
the
both
Infe'rior Ser'rated
assist in
Muscles
24.
The
position.
Dertoid
muscle
muscle
aids
in
in
elevating
depressing
the
them
respiration.
of
the
muscle
Upper
raises
Extremities.
the
^rm
to
horizontal
MOTOR
forearm
the
on
the
on
bend
or
the
forearm
straightensthe
or
bends
Vl'no-car'palFlexor
the
of the
direction
28.
extends
Sa'dio-car'pal Flez'or
; and
wrist
flex
arm.
The
27.
muscles
arm.
Tri'ceps muscle
The
26.
Brachial
Bi'ceps and
The
25.
47
APPARATUS.
bends
hand
the
on
the hand
in
the
on
the
ulna.
La'dio-car'palExten'sor
The
the
the wrist
extends
forearm.
29.
the
on
Flex'ors
The
back
in front of the
fingers,close
of the
Muscles
30.
The
retain
the
31.
The
of
Olu'teal
the hand.
open
the
position.
muscle
Sarto'rius
the Exten'sors
Extremities.
rotate
erect
an
and
Lower
the
muscles
in
body
and
fingers,
flexes
the
the
leg upon
thigh ;
leg across
one
the other.
32.
Vast'us, Internal
External
the
the
leg upon
38.
on
The
the
34.
pelvis,and
flexes it
35.
foot
in
on
they
are
the
leg,and
the
unite
turns
the
bend
toes
and
extend
and
raise
in other
tendons
form
and
the
thigh
leg outward,
the
foot
the TiVial
antagonistsof
Oastrochne'mius
The
The
muscle
of the
muscles, which
jumping,
38.
bend
outwardly.
Ferone'al
Ante'rior
37.
muscles
and
on
the
leg,
the toes.
The
Peronelal
it
rotate
Exten'sors
The
Crural'is,extends
thigh.
the
on
but extend
36.
Adduc'tor
and
Bi'ceps Flex'or
The
the
Eec'tus,
thigh.
Fectine'al
The
Vast'us, and
of the
Sole'us
body
active
upon
tendon
of the heel.
SJuyrt
muscles
the toes
extend
in
the
walking,
movements.
of the Gastrochne'mius
the
and
Long
bend
the foot.
and
the
the
muscles
of
and
Achilles, which
Sole'us
cles
mus-
is inserted
48
ANATOMY,
39.
Di'aphragm
The
from
the abdomen
in
it,which
muscular
thorax.
Three
cava.
; for it aids
muscle
is
the
are
the inferior
and
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
in
HYGIENE.
partition separating
important orifices
of the
oesophagus,the
is
diaphragm
ist
ex-
aorta,
important
very
respiration,
coughing, yawning,
ing,
sneez-
and
crying.
oo5"?o"
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. Describe
the muscles.
2. How
the
are
and
origin
terms
the fascia.
6. How
the tendons
what
kinds
8. How
9. What
is said
11. What
is the
21.
quadriceps
The
are
by
is meant
synovial bursse
in the
nerves
muscles
muscles
derived?
How
the
Define
ferent
dif-
the
and
they arranged,
are
how
fingers ?
35.
The
diaphragm
The
30.
and
The
14.
12. The
of
pectineal
the
toes
muscles
and
36.
?
adductor?
The
38. The
poral
tem-
great pectoral
The
24.
27. The
flexors
34.
peroneal
tendon
trapezius?
sartorius
31. The
The
15.
triceps?
29. The
palpebral
serrated?
The
extensor?
^.
oblique?
26. The
gluteal
soleus
17. The
23.
muscles
involuntary
zygomatic
?
external
radio-carpal
33. The
gastrochnemius
brachial
and
extensors
The
rhomboid?
The
biceps
28. The
muscles
sterno-mastoid
19. The
22.
muscles
occipito-frontalmuscle?
orbicular
oral
extensor?
Extensor
voluntary
16. The
25. The
What
What
and
the
body
of the
use
latissimus?
of the
37. The
muscles
masseter?
flexor?
39.
in the
great serrated?
deltoid
of
names
of the
13. The
The
flexor
the
flexor
are
and
place
blood-vessels
muscles
10. What
18. The
bones?
act
orbicular
endowed
of muscles.
many
they
to the
in
kept
of the
are
they
are
4. Describe
7. From
do
insertion
is said
what
attached
the tendons.
6. What
With
muscles
8. Describe
are
V.
?
The
and
The
carpal
radio-
and
tensors
ex-
32. The
biceps
tibial
of Achilles
?
?
50
ANATOMY,
4.
When
creased
muBcle
in
length,
becoming
it is increased
changes
muscle
the
is
The
5.
As
the
the
the
muscle
other
on
side
the
the
on
one
side
relax
in
muscle
these
bent,
of
of
and
must
the
and
flexor
while
the
when
the
antagonistic
flexion
so
the
but
softer;
is relaxed
are
contracts,
elbow,
firmer,
op^posite sides
movements
By
and
and
muscles
two
softer.
is
smaller
the
the
ness,
thick-
relaxes,
arm
larger
extensor
and
and
the
and
muscle
smaller
When
flexor
breadth
a
shoulder
is de-
fleahy part
When
becomes
becomes
placed
are
but
HTGIENB.
or
in
firmer.
becomes
and
jUxor
produce
to
and
extended,
o^er, and
as
and
relaxes
arm
and
body
increased
observed.
contracts
extensor
it is
between
be
may
but
length
arm
its
contracts,
larger
in
the
grasping
AND
PHYBIOLoaY,
ex-
ewA
to
joints, so
extension.
the
corresponding degree
muscle
;
on
both
thus,
Fig. 2t.
^^muscles are
although
moment,
each
6.
may
under
the
influence
their
movements
of
the
are
mind
at
the
same
directly oppo^te
to
other.
The
be
manner
iUitMraied
by
vikick
by Fig. 21,
muscles
wAicA
produce
represenis
these
the
mevements,
elbov"joinL
The
tendon
at
end
one
scapula,while
the
the ends
brought
are
to
be moved
of the
muscle,
towards
regvlate all
the movements
sittingand
standing ;
This
limbs.
upper
to take part
life,
of
with
This
is done
whenever
in the
vocal
our
we
in
as
in
of the
movements
in the duties of
to engage
us
mxiy
be
we
learn
to
The
sustenance
in
organs
The
surgeon.
of the
result
educated
tion
conversa-
musician, and
; and
ways.
the
skilful
heart
of the
exact
of
movements
into
enter
be
may
skater, the
of the
involuntarymuscles
circulation
various
education
of this
lungs, in respiration
;
in the
in
ing
perform anything requir-
graceful movements
of the
movements
in
and
leaping ;
their movements.
the
forearm
voluntaryrrmsdes,
manifold
enables
voluntary muscles
witnessed
motion
friends.
our
The
8.
the
the
boimd
all the
exercise
to
all
power
in its
bodies, and
our
in
the
over
and
in
and
liftingweights ;
attached,
are
the shoulder.
the vdll
of
hence,
in
tracts,
con-
scapula is
that
so
muscle
they
the
origin in
is inserted
the
to which
But
its
end
When
the bones
not
has
the other
at
other.
as
the power
By
7.
muscle
forearm.
each
to
end
drawn
are
the
of it and
so
is at the other
hand
of
nearer
the thorax,
to
of the flexor
the tendon
bones
of the
one
51
APPARATUS.
MOTOR
and
of the stomach
the
ments
move-
and
vessels,
blood-
intestines,
digestion.
9.
It is
provision made
wise
should
respiratorymuscles
of the will.
engaged
When
without
either
food
suspend
or
the
or
drink,
breathing for
our
; but
listen
to
or
either with
Creator, that
the
the
aid
without
or
when
our
minds
are
tinues
pastimes of life,the respirationcon-
attention
our
our
asleep,or
are
we
in the duties
act
by
short
when
desire to swallow
we
attentivelyto
period by
noise, we
any
will.
10.
in the
a
The
size and
same
great
measure
person
strengthof the
at
upon
different
their
use.
muscles
periods
may
vary
very
mueh
of life,depending in
Exercise
tends
to
incre^
52
them
soft and
become
to
individual
an
strength,while
size and
in
them
depends
weak.
the
upon
HYGIENE.
of exercise
want
The
size of the
muscles, the
of the
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
of endurance
power
and
development
in
training
and
nerves,
permits
tivity
ac-
of the brain.
nmscles
When
11.
tired,and for
is
time
regained again by
become
to
exerted
tired
when
depends
will remain
tendons
for
in their small
; and
skilftil arrangement,
would
inconvenient,
the
fleshy muscular
hand
would
foot,what
hands
be rendered
body
and
harmony
the
large and
the
delicate
vocal
will
find
nature's
of the
muscles
by
much
God!
the
the
to
eye
sounds
and
lead
and
our
of the
when
we
thoughts
would
of life.
tendons
entire
calf of the
those
or
study
leg ;
of the
and
body
human
from
unity
they be
wonderftiUysweet
Every part
Creator,
ear
the
beauty
whether
in the
the
in
the
and
in their movements,
which
made.
of
of
the
organ
they
produce
to
the
joints,the muscles,
as
feet.
for
purposes
skill has
so
the
The
pose.
pur-
muscle
tendons
destroyed,and
for many
arranged
are
the
make
powerful Gastrochnemii,
organs,
impress
the
of action
are
the
All
be
nice mechanical
what
for
would
they
and
bulky
their
that
to
substituted
be
the
to
bulky
hands
hand, what
feet would
entirelyunfit
With
power
muscles
more
the
fibres
foot
and
the
if substituted
monstrous
no
possess
the
attach
in
as
human
be ; and
the muscles
of
where
power
in the
; but
moderate, they
effort
admirably adapted
are
prove
tendons
both
they
convey
small
weak,
are
They
Suppose
power
longer period.
to
serve
the
follows
soon
the
much
and
tone
this
the muscles
the muscles
and
at the ends
of corUractility.
They
13.
their
When
strong
are
contracted
The
12.
of
required for
time
upon
they become
of covdractUity
; but
the muscles
bones
The
rest.
their contraction.
by
when
or
kept steadilycontracted
are
it
monious
harbears
aright,we
nature
up
to
MOTOR
53
APPABATUS.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1.
What
2.
Of
this
doe3
all
these
may
depend
fleshy
the
changes
5.
Describe
6.
Explain
the
do
7.
What
8.
What
is
are
produced
9.
How
do
the
What
is
11.
What
is said
12.
Of
13.
what
their
What
tendons
6*
we
of
is
of
and
of
their
relaxation
How
use
is
is
the
the
the
bones
by
Upon
contraction?
what
How
the
size
of
the
voluntary
act
at
feet
what
of
strength
the
What
ments
move-
?
Of
muscles?
muscles
and
elbow-joint.
muscles
in
contractility
tendons
of the
in
muscles.
extensor
voluntary
muscles
and
the
produced
the
the
loss
hands
and
involuntary
of
body?
the
affected
flexor
of
respiratory
the
muscle
educating
remarked
the
the
make
are
affect
of
by
of
muscles
observed
remarked
in
of
part
movement
use
use
remarked
action
said
10.
about
be
how
use
is
contraction
of
the"contraction
movement
is
of
power
What
does
How
4.
is- the
use
excited
How
consUtate
muscles
the
what
power
3.
and
do
VI.
ends
the
of
is this
use
the
muscles
muscles
the
?
?
muscles
What
arrangement
of
the
bones
Joints,
muscles,
CHAPTER
III."
Nutritive
Apparatus.
I.
Section
The
1. Tbe
and
Membranes
meiabranea
the
of
elements
membrane,
and
The
From
varieties
and
3.
from
to
one
and
in
and
the
4.
The
the
Coliim'nar
fiat
blocks
divided
the
nar,
colum-
are
of
of
consists
of
hexagonal,
It is found
pavement.
into
membrane
mucous
cells, which
of
the
layers
many
Epithelium
cells, pointed
membrane
of
Epithe'linm
The
Ciliated
that
cilia, or
fine
attached
at
the
is similar
filaments, arranged
to
the
free
of
consists
Epithelium
columnar
mucous
are
the
of
ia
of
of
membranes.
serous
hexagonal
in
like
same
Epithelium.
pavement,
the
Pave'ment
surface
called
consists
in
is found
layers
arranged
are
free
is
the
squamous,
The
nose.
four
basement
epithelium
the
form,
Epithe'linm
mouth
layer, a
in
It
eermu
the
and
Squa'monB
scales.
the
occupies
epithelium.
thin
ttie
possess
membranes,
the
as
cellular
ciliated
the
The
broad,
the
dilference
both
into
layer.
Layer
mucous
the
several
fibrous
divided
are
Tliey
are
Body.
the
body
; which
Cellnlar
and
serous
the
raembranea.
mucous
anatomical
2.
of
It
end.
one
and
stomach
to
single layer
the
extremity
of
is found
Intestines.
columnar,
like
somewhat
the
of
cells.
except
the
lashes,
eye-
Thtoe
APPARATUS,
NUTRITIVE
have
the
thia
means
foiuid
of
power
the
bronchial
the
tubes,
pharynx,
5. The
Base'meiit
thin
as
Bome
cases.
the
fibrous
elastic
i_
and
layer,
cellular
6. The
of
the
The
by
organs
and
shining,
lubricates
or
few
state
of
of
health.
The
investing
brdh-
MEnuBjut
ducm';4,
ihe
iu^uai"jar,
therefore, closed
is attached
inner
goes.
other
to
surface
is smooth
which
senun,
extensible.
without
of
They
sodium,
basement
contain
only
lymphatics
they
when
is
secrete
of
consist
thin
sensibility
which
serum
chloride
and
in
composed
phosphate
of
Ume,
Boda.
lungs;
membrane
numerous
are
principal
the
have
they
albumen,
of
tissue.
transparent,
They
epithelium,
of fibrous
they
and
thin
are
; but
The
peritoneum,
araclmuid
cUm-.
liquid,called
of pavement
layer
although
pliosphate
8.
the
and
blood-vessels
water,
aud
layers
more
rves,
the
seroua
membranes
serous
membrane,
a
a^
are,
but
CiiiAiiD
teb
of
Mucous
"'"*'"
membranes
tissue
Tn
epitbiltuu
without
and
the
mem-
are
serous
secretes
Fig. B2.
.1
it,
The
7.
and
"
communication,
connective
in
is
basement
which
l"iidy,
of
bo
penetrate
never
UembraneB
surface
outer
is
fibrous
lound
are
the
or
the
blood-vessels,
they
layer
cxtfirnal
any
but
and
tact
con-
It
J.
Se'rons
cavities
in
of
nerves,
tbin,
membrane
The
It is
the
detection
this
tissue.
lymphatics,
the
and
layer, composed
and
fibrous
is
of
trachea
by
^'
layer.
Beneath
of
another.
to
the
and
ear,
UembranQ
difficult
be
to
of
in the
cellular
the
with
and
forward,
place
one
part
upper
layer, beneath
homogeneous
and
membranes
mucous
and
nose
from
liquids
convey
in
backward
moving
membranes
serous
the
lining
of
are
the
pericardium, surrounding
the
the
cavity
brain
of
; the
the
two
the
abdomen;
synovial
pleura,
heart
'
56
of the
and
joints;
the
HYOIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
lining membrane
and
of the
heart
serous
membrane
blood-vessels.
9.
cartilages. It
secretes
joints,it
of the
fringes,from
of the
therefore, never
with
the
with
The
11.
to
them.
each
other
membranes
; but
they
and
of
consist
They
fibrous
with
alkaline
mucus.
than
vessels,
blood-
more
from
vary
white
of blood
latter of which
The
glands.
salts,and
surface
basement
epithelium,i|P^
an
layer,the
minute
and,
transparent
the amount
upon
passages
free
their
less
They
the
is
in
brane,
mem-
abundantly
secreted
mucus
viscid
clear, colorless,transparent,
water,
synovial
all continuous
are
supplied with
nerves.
margin
is secreted.
; and
are
are
more
communication,
They
sacs.
dark-red, depending
supplied
external
an
lymphatics, and
color
synovia
viscid
is
the
with
mucous
membranes
serous
of the
closed
form
At
folds, called
more
or
have
skin, and
is bathed
one
Membranes
which
body
not
membranes.
serous
much
which
Mu'cous
10.
forms
of
that of other
than
form
but
joints,
interior of the
liningthe
viscid
is
Membrane
Syno'vial
is
liquid, composed
of
proximate principle,called
miuiosin,
12.
The
principal
membranes
mucous
and
the
deep parts
bronchial
lungs,the
in the
tubes
which
those
are
the whole
ducts
alimentary canaL
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. How
are
the
membranes
of
I.
the
body
divided
What
do
they
poBsess?
2. Describe
3. Of
what
epithelium ?
the
does
cellular
the
layer.
squamous
Mention
its varieties.
epithelium
consist?
The
pavement
68
glands
sweat
it
branches
bunch
of
tubee
may
4.
The
5.
The
be
form
principal glands
Tii'hiilar glands
FIj,
the
the
be
may
and
of
the
These
the
the
is
gland
convoluted
Con'Tolnted
simple form,
as
at
mass
the
kidneys.
8.
The
Eac'emose
and
The
of
tubes
one
in the
as
in
branched,
glands
the
palate,
and
in
the
principal ducts,
sweat
glands
appearai^ce
glands
are
have
present
and
the
resemble
fibrous
of
the
tonsils, the
soft
the
pharynx,
glands.
rolled
into
are
the
by being
of
one
form,
compound
cluster
and
into
forms
two
complex
collect
walls
sebaceous
root
glands
rendered
glands
racemose
which
They
mucous
the
follicular
tubular
to
skin,
the
tongue,
are
end.
The
of
glands
secretion
the
the
duct,
conveyed
of
of
glands
into
or
which
surface
bottom.
open
canal
or
more
the
at
membranes.
The
the
glands
glands,
divisions
through
are
and
Follic'ular
common
the
the
nose,
small,
divided
of
branes
mem-
the
tubular
lesa
fibrous
intestine.
6. The
are
the
in
mucous
the
stomach,
reticular
uniform
in
of
7.
tubular,
the
and
imbedded
large
the
aa
short
layer
23,
minal
ter-
branching
the
or
racemose,
are
the
liver.
usually
They
more
kidneys
classified
the
are
rendered
vesicles, resembling
into
in
as
convoluted,
throughout.
diameter
in
Balivary glands;
network,
HYGIE
and
as
dilated
the
in
as
grapes,
branched
convoluted,
may
follicular, the
the
become
may
by becoming
complex
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
NATOMY,
grapes.
or
lined
more
with
The
membrane.
mucous
59
APPARATUS.
NUTRITIVE
principalracemose
glands
lachrymal, lingual,salivary,duodenal,
the
are
tracheal,
pancreas,
bronchial.
and
only Eetic'tQar
9. The
these
It is divided
are
these
lobules
finallyconverge
principalducts, which
have
fibrous
walls
Ducts
the
membrane,
mucous
same
the
as
lobes
into smaller
from
lobules.
and
are
into
into
lined
or
the
with
glands.
racemose
-ootO^oo-
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
is
1. What
2.
Describe
3.
What
gland
the
is
of
structure
the
is said
What
simplest
II.
the
form
of
the
glandular
secretions
glands.
of
gland
How
this
may
form
be
varied?
4.
How
the
may
5.
Describe
6.
The
follicular
the
7.
The
convoluted
8.
The
racemose
9.
The
reticular
principal glands
tubular
be
classified
glands.
glands.
glands.
glands.
gland.
"^"?oo.
III.
Section
Anatomy
1. The
and
System.
Digestive
the
formed
by
pancreas,
the
mouth,
the
the
Moufh
is the
space
the
palate,the
small
liver,and
the
intestine,the
spleen.
The
pharynx, oesophagus,stomach,
2. The
mouth,
large intestine,the
canal
the
tonsils,the
the
of
bounded
canal.
by
the
lips in front.
60
ANATOMY,
pharynx behind,
the
and
the cheek
inclosed
of the mouth
teeth, and
has
the
and
roof
of the
the
upper
teeth
arch
having
palate,and
the
soft
of the roof
of the hard
of
the
small
called
hard
; but
lower
cepting
ex-
highly vascular
palate
the
the
the
hard
the
covers
is back
softpalate
Both
glands.
TJ'vula,hangs from
the
floor
mouth,
; called
parts
The
racemose
the
The
a
freelymovable.
is
palate,and
numerous
of two
mouth
; the
is
epithelium.
squamous
palate.
mouth
and
it.
floor below,
the
The
the alveolar
by
Pal'ate is composed
3. The
body,
side.
arch
HYGIENE.
palate above,
or
tongue restingupon
membrane,
bones
each
on
is inclosed
the
mucous
the roof
the alve'olar
by
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
tain
palatescon-
small, tongue-like
middle
of
the
soft
palate.
4.
Ton'sils
The
throat.
They
kernel, and
They
lubricates
5. The
the
is
and
gland,
liquid,called
7. The
and
; named
the
the
angle
gland, which
tooth
of
and
food.
the
floor
the
resting on
aids
It
which
fuller
treat
three
tains
con-
probably
glands
gland, which
of the
is one-half
description
of the
Organs
jaw.
jaw, is
the
The
gland
of
of
the
about
size of
each
on
lary
submaxil-
all secrete
tongue
Sense.
largestof
external
ear
parotid duct
opposite the
two
inches
will
the
and
from
second
long,and
goose-quill.In
becomes
Special
the
of the
opens
this
is much
in front
lower
of the upper
called mumps
which
mv/ms^
saliva,
Parotid
in diameter
almonds.
secrete
glands
consist of
the
salivaryglands,is situated
molar
called
of movement,
follicular
Salivary glands
this
almond
an
mucus,
6. The
behind
freedom
side of the
the stomach.
to
organ
swallowing
and
racemose
often
are
in its passage
much
of
shape
glands, and
muscular
It has
mastication
both
secrete
food
the
Tongue
of the mouth.
in
follicular
each
on
and
size
popular language
compound
are
which
in
the
about
are
glands,one
two
are
the disease
enlarged.
be
found
in
the
Sections
NUTRITIVE
Snbmax'illary gland
8. The
of
the
lower
jaw,
duct,
two
slender
and
and
inches
communicates
9.
the
The
the
its
crown
the
into
socket
the
and
root;
is the
of
the
the
the
by
six
mouth
in
the
by
of
of
means
of
socket?.
bony
is called
24.
inserted
portion
is
ducts.
arches
p,
jaw
tongue,
small
alveolar
one
is situated
the
eight
angle
by
gland
side
or
the
the/an^
or
gums
neck.
10.
In
small
the
interior
pu^p,
and
nerves
each
with
and
of three
ivory,
Enam'el
(the
known),
covering
both
a
of
organic
Sen'tine
bone
bulk
stance,
sub-
teeth
:
dense
hardest
soft
The
substances
principal
is
containing
resembling
the
tooth
blood-vessels.
composed
forming
of
filled
cavity,
named
or
fixed
tooth
the
body;
or
mouth
jaw-bone
of
exposed portion
within
SnbUa'glial
beneath
the
lower
juat
with
The
mouth
firmly
are
and
upper
The
long.
with
Teeth
is situated
communicatea
floor of the
the
on
61
APPARATOS.
the
J.
and
tooth
j,^'^ TbTi^Mm'
substance
tooth;
bone
11.
horse
and
In
and
become
In
that
and
uneven
and
manner
12.
in
Man,
with
tim
milk
teeth,
Beptiles
ceed
hog,
one
in
and
the
fishes
another
almost
as
of teeth;
the
the
second
have
through
numerous
life.
as
arranged
of
in
surfaces
the
the
ranged
ar-
food.
cat, the
the
same
being.
all other
set
triturating
animals,
human
first aet
the
aa
alternately
grinding
are
tlie
near
feng.
are
the
tho
a,
cemo'nt-
aritj.
animals,
the
worn
omnivorous
of
the
herbivorous
substancea
teeth
of
palp
thinnest
substances
are
enamel;
i, tto
of
end
facilitate
thus
these
well
as
sets
and
the
three
teeth
and
the
as
the
as
carnivorous
dog,
these
ox,
of
the
tooth,
tlie
the
grinding-teeth
the
so
towards
the
layer
of
fang
thickest
the
thin
the
covering
of
crown
Cament',
and
enamel
the
mammals,
ia called
is called
set"
the
of
the
is
provided
temporary
permanent
teeth, which
or
t^th.
62
13.
On
The
temporar;,
each
teeth;
appear
irom
fifth
the
the
14.
the
of
infency;
to
the
The
which
teeth
pennajteat
jaw
and
Ihese
then
are
remoyed
succeeded
and
lai^r
in
five
are
gradually
are
thirty-two
are
number.
molars.
two
both
are
Fig.
lower
the
year,
in
twenty
are
and
they
but
fourteenth
teeth,
of
canine,
one
In
permanent
teeth,
and
upper
iucisora,
two
teeth
by
side
milk
or
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
INATOMY,
stronger.
number.
On
25.
Fig,
36,
4, moUra;
ATii"rorTnPoHiNI]rTT"nB.~I,
B, wl"loint"Uij
side
each
of
incisors,
two
15.
The
because
to
great
size
the
and
16.
the
and
canine
the
being,
are
rough
Their
have
small
between
which
points separated
has
four
crown,
by
mght
are
or
teeth
named
so
teeth
molars.
named,
so
are
them.
grooves.
their
animals.
eye-teeth,
teeth.
surface
and
of
called
are
placed
are
from
tribe
dog
grinders,
each
large
and
stomach
grinding
S.blcnnplds;
is,therefore, adapted
canines
called
are
three
oanine'
canine,
grinders, have
and
been
upper
groove
jaw
teeth,
The
in the
hions'plds,or
front
food.
the
canines
points, with
lower
the
!, rBulnes;
mul.
or
and
bicuspidsf,
two
and
strength
teeth.
fang,
wedge-shaped,
incisors,
lower
The
i"
of
the
are
cutting
or
human
the
canine,
one
crown
the
next
and
upper
inoi'sors
the
biting
to
In
the
Inrl9,"r";
Iho
;.
"-.,"!.," mivn;
placed
consists
The
next
of
to
two
molan,
or
grinding
surface,
The
molar
last
is called
and
The
17.
the wisdom
while
roots, and
The
Phar'ynx,
about
four
inches
mouth
to
18.
of
both
and
inches
the
behind
of
which
the
is much
the
the
abdominal
the
above.
The
the
layer
of
that
pharynx
all
are
Its
diameter.
nine
course
of the vertebrae,but
in front
walls
The
layer ;
layer
of
of the
cesoph-
middle
layer
brane,
mem-
mucous
of the mouth
that
ing
extend-
It is about
ynx.
phar-
or
glands.
racemose
large cavityin
the
tube
the
body,
Within
pelvis.
it
ing
extendfound
are
called
as
over
large accumulations
Stom'ach
the
is
small
form
the
ahdominal
viscera,
from
to
is folded
is called
the
and
the
called
are
contains
to
from
muscular
in
internal
to
This
oesophagus
pharynx
with
stomach.
fibrous
is the
viscera, so
The
fifth
internal
an
glands of
scattered
apron.
21.
the
layer externally;
; and
inch
an
an
few
abdomen,
peritoneum
the
paler than
membrane,
of the
walls
kidneys.
serous
fibrous
the
part of
into it from
two
cavity,
level with
into the
the heart.
diaphragm
the
stomach,
and
on
opens
thorax, is
; and
Abdo'men
The
from
is
The
exteraal
an
It contains
have
each.
the back
is continuous
to
and
is muscular
20.
from
open
it.
nearly
and
the trachea
which
roots
one
follicular.
is
neck
the
consist
agus
three
which
pharynx
long, and
through
have
QSsoph'agus,or gullet,is a
The
from
jaw
is muscular
openinginto
raeemose
19.
jaw
consist of
pharynx
cavities
the
cavities
membrane,
mucous
lower
larynx
layer,which
middle
the
only
or
The
the nasal
of the
walls
of
oesophagus,which
the
below, and
bicuspids,have
long, extending
vertebra.
cervical
molars
the
of the upper
those
year,
tooth.
incisors,cuspids, and
each;
root
the twentieth
about
side,usually appears
each
tooth, on
63
APPARATUS.
NUTBITIVB
is reflected
them
a
closed
the
sac.
portion of
intestines,like
Omen'tum,
and
in
the
upon
fat
broad
persons
of fat.
It is situated
from
the
in the
left
64
side
of
the
stomach
from
is from
still
stomach
irom
the
twelve
to
the
quarts
but
it
The
larger.
ia
called
into
stomach
long,
be
may
the
and
"om
It
will
and
eo
intestine
the
is
to
hold
to
as
oeaophagus
the
orifice;
small
four
distended,
from
ca/diac
The
diaphragm.
largest part
opening
the
HYGIENE.
the
inches
at
diamet"r,
two
beneath
just
nine
iu
to
one
become
the
abdomen,
inches
five
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
into
opening
called
the
pylor'icorifice.
Fig.
22,
26.
The
tvalk
composed
are
"serous
cuUir
of four
external
or
coat,
BO
in
fiiiTous
strength;
lining membrane,
and
and
6.
iho
iwrmni
2,
tiiB
the
They
riiio-
of
juany
tiie
ih6iuioeniiiugj"ion;B
(i,nt,
cX""tt^"igmoidflJure;
ii.eiifi
of
of
the
""""""
secrete
24.
The
Small
Intestine
tube, extending
from
is
the
are
are
sup-
phatics.
lym-
are
ous
numer-
very
simple,
lined
and
with
similar
to
membrane
These
glands
gaMric juice.
cylindrical and
stomach
tric
gas-
glands
lining
stomach.
the
tured
punc-
the
and
epithelium,
the
ing
be-
membrane,
mostly
them
and
richly
mucous
are
columnar
"vormLforni
a]i|"e'niig*i
B, UiB
7,
is
gastrie
iTts-
miiiiciii
of
23.
in
Flg.M,
minutely
blood-vessels
and
soft
its
by
f plied with
tubular,
is
mammillated
It
The
or
touch,
orifices
glands.
it
mucovs
the
everywhere
the
gives
caused
the
tract
con-
which
to
ranged
ar-
it to
the
exhibits
by
fibres
which
coat,
appearance,
mus-
direction
which
its
every
pulpy
the
enable
to
as
the
coata:
coat
having
stomach
the
of
to
the
much
targe
luted
convo-
intestine.
66
ANATOMY,
through
inches
The
the
orifice
Lirer
ia the
It ia flituated
againat
the
It haa
firm
brown
in
small
tinged
lobes
five
the
large
lobe
the
left
as
The
right
lobe
is
Ita
nine
and
lobe
is of
reddish-
is
twelve
weighs
divided
four
tive
connec-
inches
from
parts,
being
and
together by
to
unequal
two
below
ligamenta.
substance
held
are
is situatod
It
liver.
which
passes
about
four
three
about
and
body.
three
four
to
called
the
five
or
long,
right
times
as
one,
of the
bUe,
four
the
in
organ
joined bj
surface,
from
right
Qall-bladder
duodenum,
duct
into
about
abdomen,
it ia
which
broad,
the
duodenum,
the
yellow.
ia
inches
left
30.
called
six
It is divided
pounds.
and
liver
The
to
with
of
which
smooth
HYGIENE.
stomach.
side
to
lobules,
or
the
largest glandular
right
texture,
tissue.
from
the
AND'
into
of the
diaphragm,
color
into
duct
pancreatic
the
from
29.
PHYSTOLOOY,
contains
the
the
through
inches
inches
from
the
on
the
long,
and
under
side
secretion
of
stomach.
of
the
duct
hepatic
the
liver,
into
The
the
of
diameter
the
hepatic
of
goose.quill.
31.
just
The
Spleen
below
usually
four
ia situated
diaphragm.
the
or
five
inches
in
the
left side
It varies
long
and
much
three
of
the
abdomen,
in
size ; but
or
four
is
iDchea
NtJTRlTlVB
broad, and
in the
use
about
weighs
six
is not
system
67
APPARATUS.
It has
ounces.
no
duct, and
its
them
the
known*
H"o("^00^
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. What
do
alimentary
the
inclnde?
organs
Which
of
form
canal?
2. Describe
3. How
digestive
III.
the
is
month.
the
divided
palate
Describe
each
is
What
part.
the
nvula?
Describe
4.
5. Describe
6. Name
the
tonsils.
the
tongue.
the
7. Describe
the
parotid gland.
8. Describe
the
submaxillary
9. How
the
teeth
fixed
in the
pulp
of the
teeth.
part
are
of the
How
11.
the
these
are
13.
Describe
the
temporary
14.
Describe
the
permanent
15.
Describe
the
incisors.
16. Describe
the
bicuspids.
is remarked
the
stomach.
duct.
The
is
name
given
to each
the
The
Describe
the
in
of the
structure
animals
herbivorous
teeth.
?
In
The
pancreas.
teeth.
canine
The
molars.
the diflferent
teeth
19. The
stomach.
What
three
29. The
oesophagus.
Its orifices.
gastric glands.
its
teeth.
its coats.
Describe
31.
sets of teeth
two
pharynx.
23.
Describe
intestine?
Describe
sublingual gland*
What
teeth.
have
21. The
peritoneum.
25.
of the
roots
many
18. Describe
the
secrete
AVliat
The
jaws
arranged
12.
How
they
The
gland.
substances
animals
carnivorous
17.
do
tooth?
10. Describe
of
What
salivary glands.
are
villi ?
portions.
liver.
30.
27.
The
The
abdomen.
the coats
Describe
Describe
24.
the
22.
20"
26.
Describe
the
What
small
is the
its coats.
gall-bladder. The
spleen.
-^^j^^It^
tine.
intes-
large
28.
hepatic
68
IV.
Section
Physiology
1.
of
is that
Digestion
canal
is
does
take
not
in
place
into
readily absorbed
animals
and
are
before
more
they
The
2.
of
such
characters
into the
it for
prepare
in its passage
As
the
their
is
of them
one
indigestible
parts
The
3.
more
food
always
and
man,
complex
more.
Vegetable
animal
or
becomes
larger in
of
usually
digestiveorgans
it meets
the
mouth
with
five
; the
different
the
very
; and
that
so
of
the
the
certain
to
its passage
differentspecies of
food ;
than
in the
similar
mixed
digestive
the
but
they
are
camivora.
indigestiblethan
more
through
gastricjuice,in
digestive
large intestine.
canal
in carnivorous
are
of the food
other
alimentary
their
are
than
through
consists
less confined
the
herbivora
herbivorous
each
all
by absorption,leaving
in the
hence, the
food
digested in
in
vary
in
same
certain
The
discharged from
the naiure
substances
substances
the
to be
digestiveorgans
according to
animals
change
passes
composition,
it is removed
through the intestines,
the
the
and
absorption.
also differ in
digestivefluids
of food.
stances
sub-
these
undergo
mouth
kinds
other
bread, meat,
as
of digestionare
of each
be
to
and
food ; and
must
upon
as
man
such
process
feed
form
But
their
solid,and
is taken
food
action
This
they
the
by
be absorbed.
can
fluids,which
a
are
their circulation.
less
or
general
The
cases.
the
in
tary
alimen-
the
absorbed
because
vegetables;
portion
in
of the system.
vegetables,as
be
it may
that
which
inorganic substances,
food
which
by
process
the blood-vessels
and
lymphatics
System.
Digestive
the
changed
so
HYGIENE,
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
is
longer
animals.
to
those
In
of
the
character.
the
alimentary canal,
fluids
stomach
the
; and
saliva, in
the
bile.
NUTRITIVE
the
69
APPARATUS.
pancreatic juice,and
the
intestinal
juice, in
small
the
intestine.
In
5.
the mouth
tication
and
be acted
The
thorough
the
process
in
The
into fine
food
parts of it may
part
undergoes
msalivation.
grinding the
fluids.
the food
of
the
6.
stomach, and
the
During
mixed
is
the
saliva
the
by
the
four
sight
The
7.
three
or
stomach.
the
of
not
at
in
food
is
oughly
thor-
more
rest, but
little
during
hungry,
will
expressed, make
"
of saliva secreted
Dalton
by Pr,
or
abundance.
are
we
liva
Sa-
is secreted
more
is often
the saliva
in
in
twenty-
be
to
rather
is to moisten
lubricatingit so
the
it passes
saliva,without
food
may
easily
more
Hard,
salivq- to
and
puch
liquids,
but
requireany n^oistening,
The
its
facilitating
gtomach.
requiresless moistening ;
milk, do
irritation.
and
fluid,rendered
remain
as
hastily
pounds,
oesophagus to
food
moist
is
salivaryglands.
food, when
amount
as
the
jaws
estimated
function of
the
of
The
important
an
which
ptyaliriy
saliva,and,
been
mastication, and
down
of
water."
Its action
one.
from
digestive
the
odor
or
pain
the
mastication, it flows
the flow
hours, has
less than
while
of
mouth
the
of
source
named
and
the
mastication
saliva
submaxillary
is secreted
stimulate
of
substance
movements
Even
the
all
that
so
food
when
a
colorless,slightlyalkaline
less viscid
from
it remains
process
with
for
mas-
cutting and
the teeth,
of the food is
digestion;
becomes
in
readily by
more
mastication
first consists
particlesby
upon
operations;
two
be moistened
Wterfeying with
the
p^ss
by
at pnce
water
chemical
as
soup
into
instead
changes
in
digestion,
8. In
which
is
the
a
st(mach
food
vdth
meets
principallyof
the
the
cUgride
"iid
water,
holding
salts,and
phosph^tic
acid
an
in
the
gastric juice,
taste.
solution
a
It
lactic
sists
con-
acid,
peculiar principle.
70
ANATOMY,
called
a
The
pepsin.
be
gastricjuice may
bottle
glass-stoppered
it differs from
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
kept
fluids
long
time
9. The
digestion.It begins to
depending
juice acts
the
upon
as
from
of
quantity
solvent
food
the
twelve
hours,
The
gastric
substances, such
of
gluten
to
eaten.
the albuminoid
on
nine
during
few minutes
continues
food, and
of
flow in
in
In this respect
putrefying.
of the body.
without
all other
HYGIENE.
as
vegetables,changing
them
as
they
gastricjuice,the same
10. During digestion the
be
by
fibres
of
the
water.
muscular
coat
relaxation,by which
and
contraction
alternate
undergo
would
the
called
of the
food
is carried
the
and
forth
movement
peristaltic
The
stomach.
is
is
length
of time
is from
kind
back
of food
eaten.
hours,
quantityof gastricjuicesecreted in twenty-four
estimated to be about fourteenpounds. This is mixed
11. The
has been
with
food
the
with
food
the
and
again
secreted,and
when
it has
it is re-absorbed
digestion,
performed
it is
rapidly as
as
the
enters
along
circulation; therefore,
alimentary canal
12.
Although
it does
stomach
when
and
death
attacked, and
plausiblereason
life has
the
act upon
not
been
back
living animal
intestines
takes
more
are
place,
or
for this
given.
not
the
less
substances
injuredby
coats
of
it
the
therefore,the
during
the
digested by
protectionof
life ; but
stomach
this
are
fluid.
stomach
No
during
13. The
by
the
the
starchy and
intestine,where
and
The
Pancreatic
rapidly convertingdarck
juice is
into
estimated
to be
Bile
the
is
in
the
is neither
known
hours
days
without
particularuse
has
yet been
not
with
the small
that
a
; but
the
constant
has
been
in the
kept
twenty-
food, or
death
that
bile
will
of
process
experiments
discharged into
the
to
the
prove
and
intestine,
finallyresult.
undergoes
tion,
diges-
It is
change
some
along with
the
in
chyle
circulation.
albuminoid
the above
we
substances
the
the
fat into
starch
together in
of
is its
secretion,however, is
bile in the
name
animal
tains
con-
bile, unlike
The
it amounts
17. From
mixed
It
halfpounds.
of the
be
an
Its
determined
must
the
probable,however,
change
alkaline.
nor
digestion,is
in
food.
and
been
pounds.
acid
after
even
nearly tu}0
to
16. The
changes
of the
amount
Jaundice.
assist
so
during digestion,
the
The
as
which
continues
twelve
increased
into
it is the
golden-brown fluid,having
viscid,dark
disease
secretion, and
or
tiw
It is this that
fluids
other
four
and
sugar,
coloringmatter.
ten
It possesses
in
less than
rather
very
the
into
15. The
body
taining
fluid,con-
pancreaticjuice, secreted
into sugar.
alkaline
clear, colorless,
them
the bile.
called pancreatin.
peculiar principle,
active
the action
subjected to
are
into
unchanged
pass
alkaline fluid,
juice is a clear,colorless,
Intestinal
The
they
digested
not
are
juices,the pancreaticjuice,and
of the intestinal
the
fattysubstances
the
small
14.
71
APPARATUS.
NUTRITIVE
into
the
chyle,whence
; and
sugar.
small
they
are
changed
into three
into albuminose
chyle
is
; the
the mixed
All
these
pancreaticjuice
intestinal
substances
intestine, under
taken
into
the
juices
are
general
the circulation.
72
ANATOMY,
18.
of
All
food
taken
into
following classes,
the
AKD
PHYSIOLOGY,
the
belongs
system
the
to
starchy
fats, the
albuminoid
HYOIBNE.
one
or
more
matter,
substances
and
the
or
the
cess
pro-
Fig. 28.
be
these
which
by
summed
1st
The
m"uth,
food
It
into
juice, which
in
As
rapidly
in
the
smaU
the
and
starch
into
the
small
4th.
The
gmall
the
"obfowl."
the
juice, the
bile,
which
gest
di-
the
t"i
whole
the
the
chyle,
ance,
appear-
digested
is called
intestine
chyle U
into
and
milky
by
the
abaorbed
the
mass
chyle.
Jrom
lacteals
the
and
blood-vessels,
[.
i.ThefMophagni;
4,
tbs
giziurd;
b,
The
ishment
and
where
circulation,
iateillns,
5th.
them
intestine
jected
sub-
with
the
into
is
inose
mixed
that
BO
is digested
fat, changing
album
gives
it
fluid,
and
sugar,
are
food
where
and
The
which
IhB
them
it passes
intestinal
starch
sugar
albuminoid
the
pancreatic
ohyle.
itomtch
gastric
changes
stomach,
the
the
the
38.
the
the
as
interne,
to
Hg.
it is
albaminose.
Sd.
in
of
it, and
agus
(esoph-
Here
action
digests
substances
the
stomach.
the
to
mouth
the
and
pharynx
the
subjected
into
from
passes
the
through
thus
is
deglutition.
for
prepared
the
tion
mastica-
undergoes
insalivation, and
and
2d.
into
taken
is
it
where
may
follows:
as
up
digested
are
and
taken
into
it furnishes
support
nour-
the
to
the
whole
system.
innutritious
large intestine, to
and
be
the
excreted
undigested parts
from
the
pass
body.
on
into
74
ANATOMY,
into
thence
Abomasus,
the
and
digestivestomach,
acted
it has
digested until
Rennet
or
then
into
fluids in
the
by
upon
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
(5), which
the
each
HYGIENE.
small
intestine.
but
stomach,
true
It is
is not
ftdly
all.
them
passed through
is the
-OOX^OO-
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. What
is
animals
By
What
digestion?
kind
is needed
of food
by v^etables?
2.
State
3.
What
animals
IV.
general
the
characters
is remarked
of
of the
digestion.
digestive
in
organs
different
of
species
4.
Mention
5.
What
is said
6.
digestiveflnids
the
of
mastication
When
is
food
the
the
does
operations
in the
food
alimentary
while
undergo
insalivated?
canal.
in the
Describe
the
mouth
saliva,
and
What
when
secreted.
is said
What
7.
8. Describe
the
of time
is
gastric juioe
the
Describe
10.
required
for
11.
quantity
12.
What
is said
of
action
the
does
How
of
the
it act upon
stomach.
the food
What
length
of
is secreted
the
What
gastric juice
on
becomes
the
coats
of
it ?
of the
substances
of
14.
Describe
the
intestinal
15.
Describe
the
bile.
16.
Of
use
is the
17.
Into
18.
Of
kinds
what
what
what
place
While
6th.
secreted
gastric juice
What
3d.
saliva?
digestion ?
of
13.
takes
of the
peristalticmovement
What
stomach
function
the
gastric juice.
is the
When
9.
of
What
is all food
while
in
the
becomes
the
in
changed
is in
into
the
digested by
The
during digestion
the
4th.
gastric juice
system
?
2d.
What
'
composed
While
in the
becomes
of
1st.
What
stomach
the
undigested portions?
Describe
digestion
20.
Describe
animals,
as
the ox,
chyle?
in birds.
19.
sheep.
the
pancreatic juice.
the^mouth
intestine?
small
not
digestion ?
taken
food
of
juice.
bile
food
is the
are
deer, and
NUTRITIVE
APPARATUS
Section
Anatomy
1. The
of
Circulatohy
the
of
Organs
V.
Circulation
auJ
arteries,the capillaries,
2. The
hollow
Heart
is the chief
muscular
thorax,
but
conical
in
to
the
shape, and
is
more
it is attached
means
of the
extends
the
to
and
to the
the
rib.
The
heart
is
about
half
3.
The
heart
is
ten
the
stronger
and
the
into
the
U)
Is directed
ward,
up-
^*'
s
'.",'
the
Its
are
Ihe
a
two
larger
the
side
an
base
Pig, 30,
"""
cle,
ventri-
its apex.
than
base
by
ounces.
each
heart, and
^utricles
spinal column
right and
the
next
to
base,
the
of
separated by
next
its
three
interior
again separated
of
at
It is
is opposite
about
anriole,
The
aide.
the
forward,
inches, and
parts, called
is
right
in
is
apex
partitioninto
muscular
lungs
five inches,
weigidis
average
front of the
the
length of
the breadth
and
the
It is
the
cartilageof
sixth
and
the
to
left,and
the
to
to
the
everywherefree,except
from
downward,
directed
between
eighth dorsal
and
vertebra;
heart, the
left than
to
and
tlie
veins.
largeblood-vessels.
backward,
fourth
comprise
situated
organ,
where
right,and
the
System.
tllUaiticb-
The
and
J],,,cHor\"rt'i"i2,ViJioo"u
'
auricles;
is largerand
stronger than
the
'
76
ANATOMY,
II
Btoon-THSUJ."
PHVSIOLOQY,
1, The
AND
HYGIENE
NUTRITIVE
right side.
inches
The
of
Each
ventricle
blood, equal
capacity of
77
APPARATUS.
will
in
amount
auricles
the
hold
from
to
two
is rather
three
or
less than
ounces.
that of the
ventricles.
4.
The
the
The
left auricle
has
pulmonary
the four
right ventricle
and
it
It
has
of
valves, and
consists
of
sides
against the
but
three
close
which
ventricle,when
ventricle,and
They
ventricle.
arranged
shut
orifice between
in
The
circle,so
Hi'tral valve
separates
left ventricle.
It consists
tricuspidvalve
to
the
The
6.
are
in various
of that
which
sac,
The
dinm.
tissue; but
organ.
external
the
The
as
to
valves
the
act
the
left
folds,
from
are
the
like the
auricle
the
right
they
left auricle
folds,which
the
and
of
the walls
the
heart
arrangement, crossingeach
produce
heart
the
is inclosed
layers,and
ments
peculiar move-
in
is called
fibro-serous
the Pericar'-
of fibrous
strong membrane
one
membrane,
layer is a serous
layer is
internal
and
is shut.
in their
so
of two
consists
portion of which
7*
ways,
is open,
membranous
orifice when
the
fibrescomposing
muscular
springs from
orifice between
the valve
exceedinglycomplex
other
of two
close the
ventricle,when
springs from
close the
to
as
valve
Semilu'nar
The
the
pressed
are
auricle
the
it
of the
rightventricle.
the
of three
composed
are
the
ventricle,when
aorta, where
gives
Tricus'pid
The
folds, which
it
it
tricuspidvalve,
valve.
is shut.
The
lungs.
exert.
membranous
valve
in the
they
The
thick ;
thickness
from
the
inch
an
right auricle
of the
the
mitral
in the
are
the
cavity.
the
The
the
are
walls, and
thick ; and
force which
heart
of
to
the Aorta.
the
the
separates the
valve
fourth
pulmonary artery
walls nearly an
inch
valves
semilunar
the
into its
the
proportionto
The
5.
opening
about
is in
walls
less translucent
and
veins
has walls
gives off
left ventricle
off the
thicker
has
closelyinvests
the
heart, and
the
other
78
ANATOMY,
thus
tends
of
of
epithelium
layer,which
is
the heart
oily fluid,which
an
is lined
with
The
the
to
is similar
endocardium
pavement-like cells,and
closelyunited
smooth
very
Endocar'diimL, which
the
the two
them.
blood-vessels.
lining the
an
heart
called
membrane,
that
to
of the
that
pulsationof
with
interior
7. The
bathed
are
HYGIENE,
layer,so
each
rubbing togetherat
lessen
to
serous
of the external
surface
smooth, and
very
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
consists
flbro-elastic
muscular
of
structure
the heart.
8. A
the
human
and
heart
human
of
Arteries
ventricles
the
the
blood
The
firmness
waUs
is
the
muscles
smaller
Cap'illariesare
gQ^j^to
to
the
Pul'-
The
other
middle,
muscular
tribute
dis-
thus
of
course
they are
soft parts.
each
other
The
by
moses,
anasto-
affording several
nels
chan-
composed of
are
from
of fibrous
coats:
tissue,giving
thickest
or
three
coat, which
tissue,giving elasticity,
internal
the
is similar
to
coat, which
the
is
lining membrane
of the heart.
arteries
similar
; the
bones, where
to every
mainly
elastic,and
interior
the
thus
strength ; and
most
the
and
the
of elastic and
of the
As
is
from
Aor'ta
the
body.
with
the arteries
strength;
and
thinnest
branches
of
spring
branches, and
and
of the blood
of
and
contractility,
the
mostly along
coat, which
and
composed
smaller
off
give
connecting branches,
external
11.
ining
exam-
that
to
great trunks
two
to
the
in
frequently communicate
or
10.
by
similar
They
protectedby
arteries
is
heart
the
larger arteries
better
is very
of
appearance
cylindrical
tubes, which
of the
left ventricle.
the
which
the
be obtained
valves, may
ox,
are
artery from
monary
its
an
and
structure
being.
9. The
the
of the
heart
the
the
idea
good
pass
the
branching
until
minute
of
j7j\jq
from
they
are
the
of
tree, and
called
inch
in
become
capillaries.The
blood-vessels,ranging
an
thus
diameter, and
in
size from
connecting
the
termination
the
veins.
of
In
netvxirk
the
the
and
liver,
the
of
12.
Tlie
the
more
auricles
and
The
those
Anastomosis
other,
The
eoaU,
from
ascends
right
it
to
of
and
the
heart,
into
given
off
from
right
coronary,
carotid, and
body
the
rior
supe-
the
the
right
four
puN
set, which
$et, which
veins.
between
the
upper
with
^2,
f^
each
to
of the
run
usually
than
common
blood.
three
of
arteries.
the
heart
It
arches
from
the
column
abdominal
the
of
the
^-
lumbar
The
arteries
aorta,
coronary,
the
aorta,
tlie fourth
arteries.
left
; then
body, receiving
and
arch
the
the
companion
provided
the
spinal
the
iliac
the
in
deep
opposite
of
opposite
the
empty
into
called
more
are
of
and
aorta
finallydivides
called
they
as
the
through
trunks,
armposed
lefl ventricle
left of
the
from
mperfmil
and
reflux
are
is
of thoracic
vertebra
common
veins
Aor'ta
descends
names
the
prevent
the
together,
those
the
at
left auricle,
are
ia
pairs
those
from
arteries, but
to
the
to
that
ing
wound-
commence
terminate
the
of
and
veins
in
the
lungs
skin
similar
Tke
brane,
mem-
together
the
run
which
into
extremities,
arranged
very
14.
the
of the
lower
walls
mucous
without
like
until
venous
consist
arteries,
Many
as
in
numerous
close
so
or
heart,
empty
between
so
anywhere
converge,
the
veins
the
accompany
valves,
form
the
They
cava,
from
beneath
immediately
the
of
most
skin,
are
made
large
two
inferior
larger
arteries.
they
of the
veins, which
13.
and
in
and
monary
the
numerous.
gradually
finally terminate
auricle;
single layer
They
are
cylindrical tubes,
are
and
cava
where
be
them.
capillaries,and
approach
only
; but
of
commencement
membrane.
kidneys,
the
the
have
body
cannot
Teins'
larger
are
the
muscles,
finest puncture
some
with
they
structure,
all parts of
in
lungs,
the
arteries
the
elastic, structureless
transparent,
79
APPABATUS,
NUTRITIVE
are
the
left subclavian
the
show
"
im
tutu
^"^
^"^
innominate,
artery.
^^'
the
left
80
ANATOMY,
15.
the
The
left
oor'oiiary artery
innom'inate
AND
PHYBIOLOQY,
arteiy ascends
to
the
about
goes
to
left side
one
and
HYGIENE,
the
of
a
right side,
the
half
heart
and
The
inches, then
82
AHATOMY,
the
part
the
the
lower
facial
of
artery
the
head,
the
to
the
temporal artery
internal
^elid,
AND
PHYSIOLOOY,
parotid
to
the
maxillary
the
the
face,
upper
occipital artery
arteries
the
to
The
the
It
off
gives
the
to
the
orbit
19
The
each
side,
The
branches
the
muscles
and
the
ulnar
rKurrantBrtorjr;
7, interoiwiiu
gives
the
spinal
and
pleura,
neck,
the
chest
to
the
brachial
the
the
radial
side
of
reach
the
palm
the
of
""''"'^
the
^y
palmar
arch,
*'*'^
which
and
the
radial
'""
tl*^
give
side,
the
along
until
they
Here
hand.
arteries, forming
""^^i
artery
outer
forearm,
ceives
re-
artery.
The
artery
the
it
supply
hand.
ulnar
ner
in-
artery
which
along
passes
the
brachial
the
the
where
arm
of
name
and
along
passes
thn'm"P^"**"
u^'^ia^"t'^w''ih'B
i8imin",""rio.ioih.flngBr".
artery
gives
artery,
the
eating
the
tery
ar-
ftz'illary artery
and
^^
axillary
brain,
the
each
chest,
inner
*ey
when
and
the
iut""
forearm
Z.i"^* Ml^r!^; I
rib,
of
ears,
elbo^v,
the
divides
voii-
one
outwardly,
the
of
the
artery
arteriei,
first
and
side
Fig. 30.
to
artery
oplithalmic
curve
to
shoulder,
and
orbits.
abdomen.
The
artery
cerebral
of
branches
the
artery
the
subclavian
the
column,
20.
and
name
to
id
its contents.
the
the
the
gums,
carof
the
and
head,
nose.
rabda'vlan
assumes
At
the
and
over
pass
the
brain
and
braiu,
on
and
intemai
supplies
the
teeth, the
of
region
back
the
to
parotid gland,
the
to
temporal
artery
Fig. 33.
HYGIENE.
communithe
deep
superficial
branches
the
to
21.
be
and
aorta
the
to
aorta
descends
last
in the radial
easilycounted
thoracic
The
and
gives small
branches
is then
the
oesophagus,the pleura,and
abdom'inal
The
in
descends
then
Its branches
artery
splenic artery
to
arteries,which
the two
the
supply
the
mesenteric
large intestine;
diaphragm
; the
and
the
kidneys
of the back
muscles
the
coronary
liver,and
two
the
the
fourth
iliac arteries.
the
the
supply
supply
the
gives the
pancreas;
and
right,and
to
two
hepaticartery to
spleen and
supply the small
iliac
external
into
iliac artery.
internal
of the
contents
the
inner
the
femoral, and
the
poplitealartery.
and
The
over
the back
of the
anterior
The
leg to
hollow
the
to
and
to
25. The
the toes
Ths
the
and
of
the
curves
the
upper
to
is called
the middle
of the
tibial and
descends
under
it
the
upper
along
inner
the
joins with
plantararch
which
the
gives
of the foot.
its branches
to the
iliac passes
instep,supplying the
the bottom
and
supplies
iliac
tiliialartery descends
foot, where
forms
iliac
the anterior
anterior
of the
of the heart
veins
into
heel, and
the
cor'onaryvein
the walls
behind
internal
part
posteriortibial artery
branches
its upper
passes
divides
posteriortibial artery.
parts of the foot.
external
part, towards
its lower
then
the
thigh,where
poplit'eal
artery
knee-joint;
The
and
pelvis;
side of the
24. The
the
artery is divided
the
26.
the
the
muscles.
little to the
axis, which
arteries, which
23. Each
from
It
aorta.
abdomen.
of the
ankle
abdominal
into
the
arteries,which
lumbar
and
coeliac
the
the
through
spinal column
renal
two
inclines
it divides
the stomach,
to
the
spinal column'
the intercostal
to
front of the
the
are
wrist.
of
arch
it passes
the
the
at
aorta
vertebra, where
lumbar
the
at
called
to
artery
commences
vertebra, where
dorsal
fingers. The
the
along
diaphragm,
22.
and
palm
pulse may
83
APPARATUS.
NUTBITIVE
convey
the
rightauricle.
limbs
converge,
or
blood
84
together,and
into
unite
vein
one
is
ulnar
vein, below
vein
above
that
27. All
form
has
arm
axilla.
the
at
from
the
its blood
with
from
the
from
the
interior of the
remaining portion of
After
the
innom'inate
veins,
Superior Ca'va,
The
deep
and
arteries,
inner
veins
orbits,and
unites
the
lower
the
head,
unites
blood
the
from
the
internal
the
vein;
to
right of
and
the
form
the
the
aortic
the heart.
of
limha
into
the
accompany
the femoral
also unite
empty
pelvis,where
the
vein, on
veins
superficial
and
body
with
side, unite
on
the
The
into
the
right auricle
of
thigh.
ascends
then
in the
of the
returns
each
descends
thus
external
It then
neck.
innominate
the
on
which
the
towards
they pass
basiric
the neck.
vein
finallyunited
are
of the
side
which
one
terminates
arch, and
29.
subclavian
the
which
and
it is called
jugular vein,
the
axilla,and
receives
the
skull
the
at
the exterior
with
28.
and
cephal'icand
unite
arm
and
deep veins,
radial,the median,
the
vein, which
subcla'vian
ju'gular vein
these
joint.
the
Besides
elbow, and
the
companion
two
superficial
set;
there
HYGIENE.
thus grow
artery of the
Each
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
as
vein,
it is called
the
iliac vein.
30. The
form
the
column
Inferior
to
the
auricle of the
and
right of
of the
31. The
the
from
from
the
largerin
from
Pul'monary artery
artery which
veins
goes
goes
then
to
to
the
the
Pul'monary veins
the
left
ascends
in front
of the
in the
terminates
than
diameter
the abdominal
spinal
right
the aorta;
viscera
and
the
back.
artery which
The
each
the veins
rightventricle,and
32.
which
It is
heart.
it receives
muscles
Ca'va
from
rightlung, and
lung. They all
ascends
about
divides
into
the
lung.
are
the
the two
terminate
two
left
inches
two
from
right pulmonary
the
left
nary
pulmo-
right pulmonary
pulmonary
veins
85
APPARATUS.
NUTRITIVE
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. What
2. Describe
circulation
Its size
the heart
is the
3. How
each
of
do tlie organs
V.
interior
of the
and
comprise
weight.
heart
divided
What
is the
capacity of
cavity ?
The
the
Describe
4.
right auricle.
The
left auricle.
The
right
ventricle.
left ventricle.
the
Name
5.
semilunar
of the
The
mitral
valves.
is said
What
6.
valves
of the
heart.
Describe
the
tricuspid valve.
walls
the
heart?
The
valve.
muscular
of
Describe
the
pericardium.
Describe
7.
8. How
arteries ?
in
What
10.
Describe
11.
How
12.
What
13.
What
the
of
the
do
are
arteries
the
are
the
their
walls
of
is remarked
veins
Of
the
what
branches
is said
the
walls
composed
Describe
15.
What
16.
The
common
carotid
17.
The
external
carotid
and
its branches?
18.
The
internal
carotid
and
its branches
19.
The
subclavian
20.
The
axillary artery
of
the
the
arteries
arteries
the
valves
course
What
of
innominate
The
artery ?
?
brachial
The
larger
aorta.
coronary
arteries
the
artery
its branches
and
hand?
and
arm
is said
of
course
of
course
capillaries.
their
veins
of
14.
the
the
of
sets
two
their
are
the
and
its branches?
21.
The
thoracic
22.
The
abdominal
23.
The
iliac arteries
24.
The
25.
What
is said
of
26.
What
is said
of the
27.
What
of
subclavian
28.
What
of the
innominate
veins
29.
What
of the
veins
lower
30.
What
of the
iliac veins
31.
Describe
the
32.
Describe
the
aorta
and
aorta
and
the
the
its branches
their
and
popliteal artery
Describe
What
of
of
be obtained
heart
the
arteries.
branch
veins ?
of
is said
What
connecting
arteries
the
of the valves
idea
good
may
What
9.
the endocardium.
branches?
its branches
vein
coronary
veins
of the
of the
and
and
the
pulmonary
artery.
pulmonary
veins.
the
leg
and
?
limbs?
upper
jugular veins
and
the
to
the
limbs
superior
inferior
cava?
cava?
foot ?
to the
86
ANATOMY,
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
VI.
Section
Physiolooy
1. The
of the
a
is called
red
bright
color
in the
color
in
nearly black
its
parts
and
colorless
The
2.
white.
blood
The
diameter
the
-globulesare
of
of
of
^^jj^
of
red
the
mammals
than
they
in
less
much
The
and
from
3.
and
globule
is the
plasma
the
In
487
three
to
every
parts
1000
are
The
they
which
the
and
in the
the
1.
513
2.
487
most
larger
but
proportion of
red
globules.
blood-globulesfloat
is absorbed
tissues of the
plasma, having
the
structure
In
rather
are
blood, which
organs
average
generally smaller
are
the
the
resemble
size and
hundred
four
and
an
animals.
red, being
part of the
by
capillaries
into
blood-globules,
shape
different
or
liquid in
nutritive
it is the
in
and
globules
the
than
water,
is divided
small, having
; but
white
numerous
white
one
circular
are
The
man.
in
vary
than
two
of the stores.
globules
purple, or
plasina,
very
inch,
an
water-cracker
common
are
liquid,of
dark
cells,called
of minute
liquid,called
blood
The
1055.
red globules
of
It is heavier
the veins.
multitude
blood-vessels
and
thick,opaque
arteries,and
specificgravity being
two
It is
blood.
System.
iu the heart
circulates
fluid which
body,
Circulatory
the
of
HYGIENE.
are
body.
globules
followingcomposition:
1000
4.
When
the
blood
is removed
which
coagulation,or clotting,
twenty
minutes.
This
from
process
process
the
is
body, it undergoes
completed
in
depends entirelyupon
about
the
the blobd.
fibrinin
contract
to
After
and
continues
the
whole
of
the
dot
and
the
time
which
the
parts; called
plasma
for ten
and
87
APPARATUS.
NUTRITIVE
twelve
or
is
blood
In
with
unites
hours, during
separated
serum.
this
the
begins
into
two
change,
the
globules,forming
after
| Globules.
Fibrin.
Clot, containing
f Water.
Semm,
2.
blood-vessels,
a
clot is
which
checks
nature
and
it may
the
limb
the
wound
in the
body
and
in
of
of
the blood
in solution
of
are
the
contraction
as
one
heart
obtained
through
begins
immediately
of the
movement.
upon
coagulates
this
tion
coagula-
; but
in the
needed.
are
is estimated
weight
entire
and
of the
sixtypounds
blood, equal
from
and
organs
the
chyle
are
to dreulaie
and
blood
nearly
to
tissues
of the
vessels,
pressure
person
hundred
one
twenty pounds
holds
materials
The
the
by
mea;is
by elevating
as
man,
only
healthy
In
hours
ten
to
the
the
halfpints.
blood
intestine,and
; such
death,
in
smaller
twenty-four hours
to
weighing
man
formation
the
four
of the
by making
one-eighth part
about
have
7. The
These
the
hence,
sixteen and
for
twelve
Salts.
the
ways
and
After
quantityof blood
The
would
from
Albumen.
is retarded
one
large blood-vessels.
animals, from
is
hemorrhage
by bandages.
be about
to
This
formed.
it is wounded,
when
requires from
6.
the blood
of
be fiicilitated in various
heart
lower
the circulation
Whenever
5.
containing
extends
The
and
to
and
auricles
body.
in
the
small
dilatationy
forces
at
The
the
may
of each
be
tion
contracsame
the ventricles, so
ventricles
contraction
the
its circulation
the blood-vessels.
two
of
system.
contraction
in the
auricles
the
in
necessary
ment
mo-
that
the
considered
cavity is
imme-
88
ANATOMY,
diatelyfollowed
the auricles
they
and
about
are
the auricles
and
full.
cUtemate
Then
and
pass
in
successive
hence, when
stream;
flows
from
pulse
beats
is
it in
from
when
contraction
of
force
the
the
in them
jets.
In
the
in the
in
the
children,and
laries
capilsteady
blood
flows
the
blood
adult
healthy
in
to
arteries,thus
moves
wounded,
blood
artery is wounded,
this in
of
movements
pulse however
is
an
successive
frequent than
more
vein
it ; but
steadilyfrom
is no
the blood
or
also
through
waves
There
the
dilataiion
its
the jmlse.
constituting
into
ventricles,until
the alternate
duce
jets or
of
continued.
are
contraction
period
steady stream
into the
thus
dilatation
c"5nies
flows in
of contraction
9. The
the blood
HYGIENE.
Then
its dilatation.
by
which
during
repose,
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
the
minute
; but
rather
less frequent
it
in old
persons.
The
10.
auricle
of the
course
of the heart
large veins.
two
receives
pulmonary
is
artery
to
the
the
The
11.
left auricle
as
blood
the
is
and
the
and
blood is
changed
to
into
them.
In
the
arteries
from
it.
venous
organs
from
the
into the
sends
it through
It is then
conveyed
transmits
veins
capillaryvessels,between
acid
right
of the heart
and
the
blood
to
sends it through
which
it returns
to
the
the
pulmonary artery
right auricle.
circulation.
blood is
venous
body
this blood
system, from
the
the
In the
12.
and
The
"
circulation.
contracts
and
capillaries
called the Systemic
through
This
to
left auricle
of the
and
lungs.
to
follows
sends
in turn, contracts
pulmonary veins
called the Ful'monary
through
This
the
By contractingit
rightventricle,which,
the
circulation is
from
changed
into
giving off
capillaryvessels,between
systemic circulation,the
body
and
giving off
the
arterial
terial
ar-
acid
oxygen
90
ANATOMY,
blood
to
stream,
and
the
cause
the
blood
to
chest
towards
the
the
veins, while
the
force
its
on
the
by
it
presses
them
by
the
draw
gently
onward
veins
tinuous
con-
to
contraction
of
the
through
the
its return
prevent
the
it enters
return
is caused
veins
the
heart;
in
veins,
respiration,which
in
valves
which
with
in
which
voluntary muscles,
the
into
HYGIENE.
capillariesin
the
through
pass
the
of
movements
the
flow
circulation
The
heart.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
from
; and
the
by
capillaries.
^"^c
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. What
is said
2. Describe
3. State
the
the
of the
What
4.
place
said
of
globules
globules.
plasma.
of
the
blood
after
coagulate
death
of the
quantity
7. What
of the
materials
the alternate
is remarked
of blood
for
contraction
pulse ?
11.
Describe
the
systemic circulation.
12.
What
13.
the
Which
contain
of
the
of the
quantity
15. What
of the
velocity
In
small
veins
veins
blood-vessels
16. What
17.
the
What
?
of the
causes
What
position
com-
takes
is this
use
is
What
the
body?
dilatation
How
often
of the
does
the
heart
pulse beat?
the
blood
system
while
in
the
capillaries
of
the
?
contain
arterial
blood
Which
What
14.
the
circulatory organs
blood
venous
blood
the
circulation.
in
capillaries of
the
Qive
body?
and
pulmonary
In
plasma.
what
nourishing
the
the
of
Of
in the
Describe
lungs
of the
occurs
divided
10.
change
and
coagulation
during coagulation
the
coagulation
9. What
the
blood
plasma.
Of
does
Explain
The
proportion
6. What
8.
is the
of the
blood
5. When
How
blood-globules.
is remarked
in the
blood
of the
VI.
What
of blood
of the
in the
blood
of the
veins
the
in
relative
and
in the
arteries?
capacity
In
of the
arteries?
the
large
ries
capillaand
the
?
time
the
required
to
circulation
make
the
through
round
the
of the
arteries
circulation
Through
?
the
NUTRITIVE
VII.
Section
Lymphatic
The
lymphatic
of the
of the
of
consist
lymphatics.
of
tissues
the
follow
and
have
none
deep
vessek
called
in most
the
superficiallymphatics
the
while
are
lymphatic
substance
in the
deep lymphatics
The
set.
found
receive
eyeball. They
the
or
of which
are
that
body
detected
been
vessels
of
consists
system
and
organs
System.
Lymphatic
The
1. The
91
APPARATUS.
of
course
mostly
are
superficial
the
arteries,
found
the
near
skin.
The
2.
finer lymphaMe
pareiU tvhes,and
veins.
the
or
vessels
of them
Many
and
them.
become
thorac'ic duct
and
ascends
in front
the
chest, where
the
in
veins.
The
length,and
and
from
the
duct
; but
the
into
empty
4.
right
Nearly
all
in
are
size from
the
the
right
that
to
of
the
into
empty
head
all other
of
clavian
left sub-
and
goose-quill,
those
to
half
is about
the
the
the apex
the
coats, similar
duct
the two
inch
an
The
vein.
and
the
of
neck,
right lymphatic
parts of
the
body,
duct.
in their
of
of
other,
diaphragm,
right subclavian
side
smaller
moderately
each
the
can
jected
first in-
duct, and
into
empties
three
lymphaticsfrom
lymphaticglands
glands
of
the thoracic
thoracic
the diameter
arm,
with
justbelow
and
eiuptiesinto
the
unite
the
right lymphafic
lymphatics from
they
liquid is
spinal column
the
curves
composed
are
that
commences
It is about
vein.
its walls
it
colored
; called
of
small
so
gradually
larger and
lymphatic trunks
right lymphatic duct.
are
some
They
graat
3. The
than
numerous
more
are
long, ihread-like,trans-
are
course
hard
vessels pass
through
great trunks.
These
lymphatie
to
the
bodies, of
hemp-seed
to
a
an
pink color,and
almond.
They
vary
are
92
ANATOMY,
Tig. 3S.
left
lubcljiTlaii
lyraphait"
InnomlnBIe
the
To
of
tmuno
vein:
iha
4. the
psLyla;
right
T, of
3, Thonck
"1.
Tbdvii.
Ij^mphstiD
ibe
ialti;ll,rJBtit loaopiliuita
dlAplirAgm^
AMD
PHYSIOLOQY,
bsck;
doet
duct;
8, of
tbe
HYOIENS.
6, IrmpbUIn
cheit;
In
a, Iti tarmlDitiOD
of
6, "nperior
nln:12,aon";13,lii(erlor
Iha
thl^j
""
"iiin;14"*ft
onilforlgln
"it
most
along the
numerous
and
the
in
abdomen.
the
inflamed, and
are
5. The
called
fibrin,and
The
albumen.
from
6. The
is
absorbed
then
are
When
plasma.
obtained
similar
remarkably
from
During
the
digestionof
lacteals, the
giving it
white
it is
digestion,
and
four
and
pounds
of which
7. The
are
pure
villi,which
liquid.
and
lymphatics, called
refuse
8.
the
of
to
the
and
the
The
both
it, except
blood.
the
as
the
milky chyle,
intervals
the
In
ing
weigh-
man
total
of
of
amount
throughout
numerous
the
capillaryblood-vessels
During
the
passage
intestine,it
the
the
is
blood-vessels
and
of the
the
intestine,
of the
small
food
only
remain
teals,
lac-
to
large intestine.
capillary circulation
those
the
indigestible
part
chyleabsorbed
the
by the
of
fat, are
blood-vessels is carried
the
liver, by which
changed
previouslyexistingin the
right side
lungs,where
not
by
coagulates,and
chyle, through
or
blood
the
the
lacteals.
into the
pass
very
and
so
the
duct,
lymph.
are
digested food,
of
the
colorless
intestine,contain
gradually absorbed
of
during
the small
of the
be eliminated
absorption by
; but
length of
the
to
same
its
addition
it
the
forty pounds,
hours, is about
integratio
dis-
the
the thoracic
body,
food, and
the
clear and
matters,
fluid form,
as
composition
the
appearance
hundred
one
lymph
from
the serum,
the
has
lymph
to
less,
color-
from
changed
pure
the
to
taken
they
by
when
lymph,
is obtained
are
is
saline
water,
the system
when
which
lymphs
lymph
the
neck,
kernels."
"
fluid, consisting of
transparent
the
glands swell
contain
lymphaticvessels
of
sides
These
then
are
largerblood-vessels,
of the
course
groins, the
axilla, the
and
bronchi,
93
APPARATUS.
NUTRITIVE
fat
known.
definitely
into
blood.
substances
It then
through
all parts
similar
passes
to
of the
through the capillaries
disappears; but what becomes of it is
94
ANATOMY,
The
9.
chyle
duct
thoracic
absorbed
the
into
by the
left
heart, and
right
side
of the
lungs
where
the fat
chyle
is absorbed
is active, the
the
in
changed
various
muscles, the
the
blood
the
from
and
growth
needed
re-absorbed
by
so
as
fat is removed
of the
none
the
flow
the
the
to
like those
bones,
lungs, the
heart,
the
the
supply
food
system, they
in
body
nourish
absorbs
its
own
any
within
form of fat;
be
but
when
is the
case
is
body.
are
deposited
are
This
is
again
into
explains why
the
conveyed
the
than
system, which
cannot
the
absorbed
are
lymphatics, and
other
parts
protractedillness.
all pass
outward
is that
from
the
lymph
and
the
The
without
hence,
imoard, and
peculiarityof
chyle always
the thoracic
is towards
duct.
lymphaticvessels
in
are
readily towards
through
the
the
duct,
or
not
The
its flow
of the
waste
when
the
materials
direction, which
one
circulate
pass
Thus
for
right lymphatic
13.
by
needed
lymphatic system
in
absorbed
are
the
reaches
particularmaterials
from
from
pass
ingredientsof
each
lymphatic vessels
The
changed
un-
digestion is
organs,
body, during
12.
other
body.
nerves,
and
eye,
parts of the
sickness,and
the blood
when
be
can
found
other
insufficient to
are
of the
of these
more
in different
they
it
disappear.
the
tendons,
supply
to
digestion
development.
When
11.
the
to
parts of it
tissues
the
the
the
it
nutrient
and
organs
of
blood
the
the
capillaries,
the
in
all traces
When
10.
assimilated
soon
capillaries
it is then
portion of
is
and
blood,
the
When
it goes
rapidly than
more
the
through
the
by
vein, whence
disappears.
lungs, and
in the
completed, it
of the
HYGIENE.
lacteals is carried
subclavian
the
to
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
an
the two
is caused
by
The
and
chyle to
which
prevent
lymph
great ducts,
oppositedirection.
these vessels
the
but
passage
the movements
of the
lymph
of the chest
NUTRITIVE
the
respiration,
in
the force
These
pass
forces
contraction
the
are
of the
it is absorbed
which
with
95
APPARATUS.
same
the small
by
those
as
voluntary muscles,
which
and
lymphatics.
the blood
cause
to
the veins.
through
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
found
the
What
3.
Describe
lymphatic
of the
the
into
empty
the
is said
of
5.
What
of the
lymph
6.
What
of the
of
do
in the
lymph
lymph
the
duct.
right lymphatic
What
glands
between
blood
the
is said
What
body?
villi contain?
intestinal
and
lymph
the
during digestion ?
changed
in the
lymphatics
is there
is the
quantity
7. What
phatics
lym-
are
The
lymphatic
resemblance
How
lymphatics
duct.
duct
AVhat
finer
thoracic
each
4.
plasma
Where
consist?
system
?
is said
2.
vessels
does
what
1. Of
VII.
Of
what-
the
blood-vessels
use
these
are
vessels?
8.
Wliat
9. AVhat
is done
with
with
the
10.
AVhat
is done
11.
What
is remarked
12.
What
is
13.
What
causes
the
chyle
of
peculiar
the
absorbed
this
with
in the
lymph
by
deposits
flow
of
to flow
lacteals
the
in the
nourishment
the
by
absorbed
chyle
of
blood
chyle
fat?
and
lymph
lymphatics
the
through
"oo""4o*"-
VIIL
Section
Absorption,
Excretion.
and
1.
of the
The
Secretion,
body,
food
both
by
is absorbed
the
lympJiaticand
through
gases
contagious and
the
capillary vessels.
of the
membrane
mucous
that
of the
matters
and
through
miasmatic
the
lungs.
other
In
impu-
66
ANATOMY,
rities in the
AND
introduced
air,are
arsenic
particleswhen
fine,such
and
wall-paper,have
from
membrane
mucous
and
life may
even
patient in
if
skin
When
should
be
cuticle
is
The
liquidpoured
inflamed,
removed
have
stances,
sub-
into the
system
handling poisons,that
when
the
and
dropsy, is
and
ofl"n
the bones
and
of
excretions
the
human
6. Saliva.
2.
Sebaceous
3.
7.
Gastric
Perspiration.
8.
Pancreatic
4.
The
tears.
9.
Intestinal
5.
The
serous
5. Several
weighing
fluids
small
intestine.
and
juice,are
into it
in
again
always going
6. These
on
they
are
the
along
estimated, in
fortypounds,
that
then
in
and
the
from
twenty-four
tary
alimenwith
a
the
person
twenty-five
over
hours.
the
blood
and^
This
exhibits
absorption,which
sorbed
re-abthe
are
livingbody.
formed
are
assist
secreted
secretion
in the
fluids
and
It is
juice.
into
the blood
into
juice.
Bile.
discharged
are
juice.
mucus,
intestinal
10.
re-absorbed
hundred
one
pounds of
fluid.
are
the
from
matter.
of these
canal, and
organs,
when
absorbed.
disintegratedand
1. Mucus.
chyle
to local
the muscles
even
principal secretions
are
membranes
serous
the
by absorption;
4. The
the
by
out
the
been
body
in
as
and
where
the
is unbroken.
3.
and
in water;
body
removed, various
be absorbed
may
taken,
the
thirst
that
prolonged by immersing
be
the
the
through
produce poisoning.
to
as
by immersing
finelypowdered,
care
absorbed
takes
sometimes
milk.
so
solid
Even
artificial flowers
from
been
lungs
partiallyrelieved
be
hence,
as
of the
Absorption also
2.
may
green
HYGIENE.
PHYSIOLOGY,
from
conveyed
the
the blood
into
physical
the
and
by
the
different
alimentary canal,
chemical
changes
98
ASIATOMTy
The
10.
The
food is taken
them, becomes
from
longer be
no
of
faster than
until it becomes
claim
much
and
waste
ends
the
changes
decay
; but
It has
been
"
and
teach
the
us
or
the
body
comes
and
to
"
wonderfully made
due
Him
to
on
the
of life
these
own
our
conceptions
we
indeed
are
May
and
in
understand
is
who
can
feeble,while
feel that
to
age,
one
in the midst
"
in them
behold
we
strength
finallysteps
come
grows
life is
on,
more
death
of
powers
neither
and
trulysaid,
busy
ever
; in middle
woman
more
we
are
in size and
old age
be made
reverence
like
its presence
youth, the
death, and
as
when
clearlyshall
and
to
ing
perform-
of life and
fearfullyand
"
In
until
on,
death
evenly balanced,
still go
scene
bodies,how
of
those
growth becomes
in death
are
we
it remains
life and
full-grownman
more
body,
living,where
living frame.
are
the
Here
the
Thus
use.
advantage
the wane,
it is assimilated
it
these forces
of unceasing change.
and
time, then it loses its vitality
among
stronger than
are
life.
with
allotted
an
be removed
can
round
and
endowed
is hut
HYGIENE.
must
AND
PHYSIOLOGY-y
these truths
and
over
above
all!
"o:"co"
"
"
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1.
what
By
does
vessels
absorption through
VIII.
membranes
mucous
2. What
of
absorption through
3. What
of
absorption
4. Name
the secretions
5. What
is said
6. Whence
7.
do
'^hat change
be
not
removed
skin
fluid and
9. What
is remarked
come,
amount
of the
changes
of bone
excretions.
must
of the
is said
the
serous
secretions
fluids
what
is said
of the
the
What
place?
re-absorbed
that
are
and
what
is their
in the
is
8. What
10. What
of
and
of the
these
take
absorption
function
body?
If the
and
secreted
tions
excre-
result?
of material
growth
of life and
and
death
absorbed
decay
?
in the
living body^
of
APPABATUS.
MHTBITIVE
IX.
Section
Anatomy
of
The
1.
Bespiratory
trachea, and
the
muscles
in
2.
used
the
and.
hyoid
into
opens
produces
it
"Adam's
the
3.
the
at
is
situated
and
bone,
prominence
front
upper
the
above
the
the
below
at
pharynx
Th/roid
The
together with
the
and
The
in
the
larynx
cricoM
mm:
thorax,
of
top
the
and
the
the
ia the
the
the
It
and
thyroid,
is situated
consists
unite
which
epiglottis.
the
largest,and
larynx.
It
neck, called
of
cartilage
of
below
of the
composed
tongue
trachea.
trachea
middle
ia
the
the
cartilagea,and
part
of
root
arytenoid
37.
in
of
two
front,
and
Fig. 38.
ClITiLiau
38.
larynx,
behind.
ne"
Hg.
the
the
the
and
of
breathing.
apple."
cricoid,
System.
consists
system
lungs
Lar'ynz
The
Respiratory
the
"nUrior
portloa
Viiwof
Tmt
c"rUUge
a, tljhl
(..rrtraofdMrtUn^i
al
of tho
^
toc*1
ut""oM
Biucl*.
halt
;
4,
of
iBft
tlw
"rtllBg"
Tbrreld
cvtiUgH.
T, ltuuTleno[d
L^tl
mambtinB
"1,
LtRTnl.
Tni
c*rtlla(a;
Mdi"rabi.-1,
TociL
hilf
cricoid
OP
thyroid cutUife
lulf
of
th*
"mr
t-
100
ANATOMY,
4. The
being
behind.
with
of
wide
inch
an
It is situated
below
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
in
the
seal-ringin shape,
front,and
inch
an
wide
unites
and
thyroidcartilage,
of the cricoid
summit
6. The
is an oval-shapedplateof fibro-cartilage
Epiglot'tis
projectingabove
it in the
of
act
swallowing.
The
the mouth,
and
is towards
the
All
larynx.
membrane
Vo'oal
7. The
from
cricoid
cartilageto
called
8.
the
chink,
from
It is about
inch
an
dorsal
vertebra, it divides
the
to
each
into
largeblood-vessels,
and
subdivided
branches
smaller
9.
of
; thus
The
trachea
are
and
strong
bron'chi
The
pass
they are
and
the
air
membrane.
having
Numerous
racemose
the
mucous
The
composed of carbUagmovs
the
nected
oesophagus, and con-
membrane
beneath
divided
cells.
pinkish-whitemucous
minute
behind
tubes.
fibro- elastic
the
of
tubes, are
epithelium.
surface.
three-fourths
bronchial
to
agus.
oesoph-
reach
are
next
and
of the
ing
pass-
bronchial
bronchi
larynx.
lungs,where
they
called
rings,imperfect behind,
together by
the
the
cylindricaltube
growing smaller
tree, until
divisions
lung.
chords, is
the vocal
long,
into two
of the
edge
upper
arytenoid C9.rtilages.
to
its lower
at
strongly
tissue,and
of elastic
neck, in front
inches
; and
passes
of the
opening
the
four
in diameter
of which
one
bases
down
mucous
epiglottis,
are
of the
windpipe, is
or
larynx
sides
is the
glottis
epi-
towards
lined with
are
aperture between
or
and
glottis,
the
and
the
surface
concave
composed
are
front
the
Tra'ohea,
The
the
of the
life.
advanced
Chords
extend
narrow
surface
convex
ossifyin
to
larynx,and closingupon
; and
disposed
The
cartilage.
membrane,
glands
and
open
The
all lined
are
upon
ciliated
ded
imbedits free
are
separated from
blood- vessels.
They
root, where
they are
ligaments,and
The
shorter
but
rightlung
the
than
each
the
free
are
attached
left
the
to
is wider
by
other
and
ooe.
heart
the
the great
and
everywhere, except
to
the
bronchi, to
arteries
pulmonary
somewhat
the
and
nary
pulmoveins.
larger,although
It is divided
into
only
lobes.
into
their
at
two
three
it U
102
The
11.
of
lungs
eolor.
pmkish^gray
capacity, according
about
is
readily
to
as
The
12.
are
once
float
in
water.
ends
terminal
the
of
their
and
weight
weight
about
capacity
contain
hence,
they
bronchial
lobules,
one-twelfth
part
or
more
light
so
are
tubes
pidmonary
the
and
average
always
inflated
they
aubstanee,
health,
their
and
They
in
the
sex,
aduk,
pounds,
inches.
much
the
the
half
aponge-like
vary
age,
In
cubic
after
air
less
the
to
and
two
hundred
three
They
individual.
the
of
size
of
composed
are
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
ealkd
are
and
the
are
of
inch
an
'^
of
number
air-cells,
or
each
other
The
air-oells
size,
thin
they
of
2, portiunot
tube;
ni
oi"en
wiiiiin
ceiia
cells
"m lo iiio^tUe
air-
and
"lucous
membrane.
the
free
lungs
are
number
six
fourteen
The
Pleura
is
lung.
One
layer
the
chest,
during
of
respiration.
the
is
in
fine
blood-
closed
covers
so
that
of
the
lung
the
two
which
The
whole
the
large
tissue,
have
with
square
sac
is
structure.
the
with
Between
elastic
and
contact
hundred
lung
while
millions;
than
leas
walls
inch.
an
lined
there
of
nutnerous,
very
which
13.
the
elasticityto
surface,
not
each
and
firmness
to
their
of
bj^
are
lobulcs
the
II.
in
the
about
capillary
vessels,
quantity
gives
of
an
v."wo,Am"nl^MAan.
PKB."i.Bioiichini
loid
in
much
part
network
lobule
partitions.
surrousded
are
from
approach
diameter
They
cavities,
vary
one-hundredth
of
sists
con-
separated
by
yet
average
Hg.M,
lobule
E^h
diameter,
in
been
mated
esti-
extent
air,
is
air-
of
bly
proba-
feet
serous
while
sur"ces
for
membrane
the
rub
other
lines
together
103
APPARATUS.
NUTRITIVE
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
the
1. Name
IX.
respiratoryorgans.
2.
Describe
the
larynx.
3.
Describe
the
thyroid cartilage.
4.
Describe
the
cricoid
5.
Describe
the
arytenoid cartilage.
6.
Describe
the
epiglottis.
7. What
8.
What
9.
Of
ibeir
the
are
is said
what
the
the
are
membrane
lining
11.
Of
are
the
12.
Describe
the
pulmonary
and
13.
the extent
the
The
in
voice
lungs composed
What
is said
Respiratory
double
function
the other
to assist in the
the vocal
when
chords
the
produced by
the
looser
to
vibrate
the
sound
larynx
and
tense
the size of
diminish
except
is heard
drawn
the
are
closely
aperture, the
these
of the
singing,are
in
changes
and
production of
and
the
they
tions
vibra-
the voice.
chords,
vocal
the
as
different notes
The
2.
so
made
are
respiration.
When
chords.
but
produce
of the
part being
one
to
is said
System.
air is made
wei"?ht
X.
the
produced by
other,
of
pleura.
of the air
each
is said
their
of
What
air-cells ?
and
that
to
What
air-cells?
relaxed
composed
lobules
of the
of
is
glottis?
bronchi
Lar^ynx performs a
produce
is the
lungs.
Physiology
to
larynx lined
its branches
Section
1. The
is the
the
Describe
and
and
trachea
Describe
number
What
trachea
10.
what
what
With
chords
vocal
of
cartilage.
the
in
in
the
low
human
the
length and
notes, the
than
the
of the
narrowness
glottiswider
in
voice,
chords
when
the
tension
of
ing
glottis.Dur-
are
notes
longer and
are'^^
104
ANATOMY,
It is estimated
higher pitch.
voice
human
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
that
ordinary range
of
the
HYGIENE.
vocal
capable of
are
chords
in
hundred
two
and
and
chest
muscles
of the
the
upon
is bass
soprano.
The
depends
In
voice;
in
pends
pitch de-
of the vocal
woman
her
voice
the
size and
large and
are
hence,
is contralto
shape
or
of the
producing
coarse,
smaller, producing
they are
woman
in
than
man
upon
these
man
thickness
and
size of the
The
speaking.
tenor, while
or
tone
organs.
coarse
greater in
are
his voice
vocal
in
length,breadth,
These
chords.
used
the
upon
finer
softer voice.
and
4. Articulation,
sounds,
and
consonant
and
words, is made
teeth, and
the
vocal
The
5.
those
of the chestyso
and
but
through
it.
with
prevent
By
various
freelyinto
pass
and
the
entrance
trachea
the
all the
the
in
sort
of
guard
of
food
and
and
out
piratory
ex-
respond
cor-
intensity.
the
over
so
glottis,
stances
foreign subthey would be a
other
where
respiratorypassages,
the
movements
time
glottisare
passive,and
the
co-operation of
sounds,
such
as
laughing,sneezing,and
from
dghing from
sobbing and
and
the glottis
inspiration,
of irritation.
source
occurs
larynx co-operaiewUh
is alternately
glottis
enlarged
the
effort to open
stands
into the
6.
air to
are
those
Epiglof tis
to
the
inspiratorymovements
movements
as
in
During
the
active,requiringan
The
in
it relaxes
expiration,
The
syllables
palate,the tongue,
conjunction with the
act
contracted.
the
distinct
larynx.
permits
during
into vowel
throat, the
the
lips,which
the
of the voice
produce
to
as
respiratorymovements
and
opens
so
by
of the
organs
formation
the
or
want
of
the
larynx
lungs,
yawning, sighing,sobbing,crying,
coughing, are produced. Yavrfdng
fresh
air, and
often
emotions
of
irritation;
from
of
depressed feelings,or the want
from
emotions
crying mostly come
latighterfrom
the
with
fresh
of
air;
sadness,
coughing
106
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
on
that
so
death
of oxygen
to
or
greater
system
less
air is removed,
The
about
and
inch, which
cubic
13.
half
pounds.
The
quantityof
acid
the age,
with
In
great
in
as
14. The
the
and
the
close
of
acid
from
the
alcoholic
much
less
life.
sleep
is
of
amount
during
when
the
respiration,is,
in
twenty-four
lungs
varies
considerably
the
health
exhaled
is
amount
of the
nearly
vidual.
indi-
twice
awake.
doubled.
more
as
it diminishes
an
t^vo-thirds
T!ie
of the
of the
as
the
Tea, coffee,
quickly, but
from
the
day.
much
quantity is
in
is exhaled
also
low
lungs is
The
is less muscular
lungs, and
reduced
the
during
there
than
hour.
acid exhaled
than
carbonic
increases
effect.
same
until
greater then
half
carbonic
the
generally
the
have
during
less stationary,
or
increases
Food
rest.
and
nigh.t,
or
life it is
to increase
that it is one-third
night
at
it is sometimes
nearly
hmgSf
The
exercise
than
more
in diseases
is
the
one
feet.
after which
liquors,produce
only one-half
as
adult
drinks
organic diseases
where
at
most
is slower
that
In
Active
lungs,so
last
seldom
The
given off by
acid continues
fortieth year,
body
quantity,and
15.
of carbonic
youth.
the
the
half
cubic
size,and
quantity
atid
less than
inch, and
the
by
blood, is
woman.
until
they
the
man,
off
rather
man.
during
air
the
by
the
in the
life in
ike
air, at each
fourteen
the
sex,
amount
childhood
when
given
energiesof
support
to
or
acid
the
remains
to seventeen
cubic
one
about
to
amounts
of carbonic
and
nearly
average,
hours
by
blood
the
from
amounts
carbonic
When
of the oxygen
taken
all
and
hours.
venous
one-half
the amount
quantity of
one
cubic
so
twelve
degree unchanged,
When
HYGIENE.
each
on
six to
is decreased, the
depressed.
are
12.
in from
occurs
the amount
AND
ration
respiaction,
during
diminished
forms
in
of fever
creased
one-half; but it is mostly in-
skin, and, in
cases
of
small-pox, it
blood
in
the
membrane
capillaries
by
the
carbonic
the
oxygen
acid
The
the air.
the
of
Both
of
form
the
changes
of these
action
17. When
cent.,
per
of
is
estimated
absorbed
are
them
the
in
hence,
produced by
are
the
globules.
acid
the oxygen
acid
the
is decreased
to
ten
to ten
cent,
per
sustain
the oxygen
blood
the
use.
to
combination
blood
away
own
blood
conve}"d by
the
to
disintegration
venous
chemical
the blood
their
the
the carbonic
of
carbonic
the
blood, and
is carried
to
from
by
are
not
on
gases
when
its entire
cannot
and
color
the
the
or
formed
globules,and
in
the blood
by
is carried
solution,and
"rom
pass
appropriated
mostly
the oxygen
blood
the
by
is
tissues,and
lungs.
them
by
acid
of water
obtained
air to the
the
from
vapor
oxygen
carbonic
Tha
passes
and
the tissues,and
to
The
16.
107
APPARATUS.
NUTRITIVE
life.
As
the carbonic
decreased, with
that
each
acid
it
respiration,
every
individual
increased, and
is
will,on
an
been
has
render
average,
abotd
or
less than
this amount
small
exhaled
and
quantityof
oppressive odor
several
are
persons
one
is
air
supplied,more
or
less
result
injury must
18.-4
of fresh
mattery in
It is this
of
badly
breathing.
of the most
animal
which
the
the
heavy
in
room
animal
form^ is
gaseous
causes
ventilated
This
injuriousof
is
matter
exhalations
which
from
ably
probthe
lungs.
ooJ^Coc
"
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. What
Toioe
2.
joiany
doable
produced
Uow
are
function
is
X.
performed
by
the
larynx
How
is the
?
the
degrees of
different
tension
are
notes
the
of the
vocal
human
voioe
chords
or*^"**
jnodaoed
Of how
108
ANATOMY,
3.
The
what
Upon
these
are
5. With
the
function
of
sounds
6. What
the
often
8.
What
10.
What
11.
How
be
may
we
of the
pure
much
carbonic
cause
lungs
16.
What
separates the
carbonic
acid
17.
When
needed
to
air
during
occur
the
larynx
respiration?
in
respiration?
atmosphere?
during respiration ?
How
system?
the
by
given
does
decrease
lungs?
off from
the
in the
amount
increase
in the
lungs?
blood
exhaled
amount
from
lungs
of
acid
carbonic
the
is remarked
What
blood
of the
What
oxygen
gases
and
the
air unfit
for
breathing
supply each
individual
is said of
the animal
What
of
co-operation
of the
the
air in the
membrane
in the
is
an
decrease
is the
larynx co-operate?
cause
this
affect
acid
What
through
this
changes
is absorbed
conditions
the
in the
sounds
in the
place
15.
18.
pitch ?
system?
l.'{. How
from
words
oxygen
oxygen
What
distinct
by
composition
takes
change
affect the
exhaled
these
What
of
much
pass
The
is remarked
is said
into
produced
cause
How
14.
depend
the epiglottis?
breathe
does
oxygen
12.
formed
respiration.
do
9. What
of
voice
respiratory movements
What
lungs?
7. Define
How
the
of
strength
sounds
do
what
is the
with
the
does
HYGIENE.
tone
4. now
What
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
What
of fresh
amount
air is
exhaled
matter
from
the
body
-o-di^oo-
Section
XL
Animal
1. All
to the
have
mbstanceSy
influence
of
plants,but
the
of
scale, we
both
it is
is
produced
is known
each
they
greater
and
stronger
in
heat
find
maintaining
which
to
power,
living vary
in which
atmosphere
the
not
Heat.
in
as
less
animals
species to
the
Animal
and,
possess
so
Heat.
as
livingthings
to
is feeble
power
as
we
ascend
the inherent
peculiar to
body
but
degree,of resistingthe
This
cold.
temperature
in
placed ;
are
or
temperature, according
itself.
maintain
in
in
power
The
heat
this
perature,
tem-
NUTRITIVE
2. ATiimals
of their
bodies,
animals
and
into
uniform
nearly a
or
their temperature
in which
the water
3. The
they
atmosphere
107"
only
111", which
the
The
the very
of the
much
in
below
80"
4"
an
from
swallow,
of any
in
to
from
is about
thorax
the
in temperature
range
varies
blood
100"
100",
der
un-
the
6" cooler.
When
from
is raised
body
human
becomes
body
1"
of cold
any
110",
to
insensible,
well
so
2"
is the
body
the very
be increased
may
or
human
and
yoimg
as
old cannot
or
2"
The
it is 110"
in
by
all
at
same
resist the
The
middle-aged.
the
1"
during sleep.
6. The
the
in the
the temperature
the
in the
of the
temperature
it is reduced
in
while
fowl, it ranges
; and
exercise
temperature
lock-jaw,it is
; and
varies
often
in cholera.
of the
heat
long
body
is probably
series of chemical
process
of
produced
changes which
nutrition; but
these
take
changes
in the tissues
placeduring
are
not
well
understood.
7. In
much
follows.
depressing effects
by
from
are
about
to
soon
ages ; but
heat
the
the Arctic
be 107"
to
body, mostly
it is 98", and
feet
and
death
5.
with
97" to 105"
In
111".
to
than
100", while
to
the temperature
and
is from
climate
higher
temperature
tongue
is lowered
or
98"
The
102".
cause
much
common
of the human
tissues
from
hands
varies very
are
reptiles
livingcreature.
4. The
to
maintain
the
found
In the
is
the
live.
been
14".
birds and
fishand
the
100"
to
it reaches
other
of
from
has
temperature
warm-blooded
The
of temperature in mxmvmals
range
fox, the
; but
temperature
and
cold4"looded,
temperature
warm-hlooded, and
are
man,
the
animals.
cold-blooded
the
the
according to
classes; called
two
indvding
mammals,
air
be divided
may
109
APPARATUS.
the
animal
is
kept
10
coldest
heat
up
to
of winter
weather
that
the
the
temperature
the natural
standard.
body generates
of the
In the
internal
lower
so
gans
or-
ani-
110
ANATOMY,
is maintained
covering of
himselfin
woollen
places of
In the
8.
is
but
summer
season,
of the
by
of the
means
glands
sweat
evaporated,and
from
body
be
may
and
cause,
in
this
When
colds.
cold
and
more
of
state
be
garment
slowly,injury will
so
on,
body
is prevented
heat
of
the
fruitful
its
of
source
perspirationfrom
removed,
or
take
that the
any
remain
we
place so
idly
rap-
temperature,
but if
surely result;
will.almost
put
the
its natural
below
body
sickness
other
additional
an
the
perspiration
evaporation from
evaporation will
of air, the
reduce
or
; and
the
by
increased
standard.
it becomes
is in
by exercise,
or
of the
temperature
reduced
the temperature
This
body.
Its
ing,
cloth-
by
or
perspiration,in
to
as
weather,
warm
the natural
body
is warm,
100".
artificial heat
of the
account
the
draught
rise above
coolingprocess
rapidly
On
surface.
does
the
the
risingabove
Evaporation is
9.
the weather
out
thus
comfortable.
although
the
the surface
upon
warms
perspiration. Whenever
by
pour
equable
an
preserve
not
clothe
forced to
himself
abundance,
is
body
of the
means
to
make
to
as
so
is increased
the
resorts
man
to
as
HYQIfiNE.
body by
; but
wool
or
also
abode
the temperature
warmth
hair
in the
goods or furs so
He
temperature.
his
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
cooling goes
on
follow.
seldom
-""o"0=Io"-
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
XI.
t
1. What
2. How
is remarked
animals
may
of
the
be
classified ?
of
the
range
What
of
the
temperature
the
6. How
may
6. How
is the
heat
of
7. How
is the
heat
of the
8. How
is it reduced
9.
What
is said
temperature
of
the
of
the
of
during
the
evaporation
is said
body
human
the
body
maintained
summer
from
substances?
be
of each
class ?
in birds?
and
in mammals
body produced
body
of
What
of temperature
3. What
4.
temperature
changed
during
season
the surface
the
season?
winter
?
of the
body
CHAPTER
IV."
Sensory
Apparatus.
I.
Section
Anatomy
Fer'voTU
1. The
the
of
System
and
the
body
; and
lympathetic
ganglia, mainly
General
The
called
The
br^
has
white
substance
white
substance
the
white
the
for
its
of
composed
all
exterior,
but
the
of
the
its
the
and
of
spinal
of
the
and
nerves
body.
Nerves.
of
nerve
substanee.
gray
exterior,
spinal
the
the
kinds
the
for
systems,
parts
of
two-
and
substance
its interior
for
two
brain,
to
viscera
substance
gray
the
Structure
is
system
of
into
them
by
the
to
and
nervous
matter;
divided
ByBtenii composed
distributed
Character
2.
off
^ven
nerves
the
be
may
System.
syitein, consisting
oerebro-Bpinal
cord,
Nervous
the
cord
and
the
has
the
substance
gray
for
its interior.
3.
The
tubular
into
while
in
white
fibres, of
fragments
the
by
nerve-fibres, and
The
sizes,
average
of
composed
and
slightest
nmilar
than
inbstance
gray
cells, nuclei,
more
various
is
soil
so
to
These
violence.
about
as
transparent
the
be
broken
called
are
g^'^j
of
inch
an
diameter.
4.
are
avbstance
and
in
is
granular
structure
two-thirds
the
their
of
nerve-fibres,
The
matter.
to
of
composed
white
diameter.
gray
but
in
The
nerve-
nerve-fibres
gize
are
not
nerve-cells
112
ANATOMY^
more
nuclei, and
the
kind
nuclei
5.
spinal cord,
and
At
body.
their
cords; and
until
and
in
nerves
The
from
come
of fibres
bundles
of
from
and
from
corao
Three
unknown.
are
and
the
the
of
modes
of
enclosed
in
neuri-
similar
are
to
or
from
its
spinal cord, to
tissues.
root, when
one
or
the
undivided
brain,
two
two
-fibreSy
nerve
in the
by
ariHe
termination
the
various
organ,
of
nerves
remains
the
it ends
point ;
one
an
tissue, called
of the
with
is said to
nerve
course
in the
other, and
these
-fibre
nerve
of
substance
it connects
origin,where
each
elastic
-fibres
Each
larger.
are
drical
cylin-
their
lymphatics
bundles
composed of
and
nerve
the
distributed
in
supplying
with
the
like white
appear
fine filaments
nerves,
from
off
organ.
are
of the white
those
numerous
thence
are
off branches
to
company
connective
of
lem'ma.
and
given
are
origin,they
fiimishes
matter
-cells
nerve
pairs,and
The
of that
blood-vessels
The
in
they give
organs.
generally found
6.
the
finallyreduced
they are
tissues
which
in
granular
nerves
Cer'ebroHBpi'nal
The
the
to
The
imbedded.
are
brain
are
matrix,
of
substance.
gray
HYGIEKE.
wall, with
delicate
have
of
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
or
roots, when
more
The
points.
more
is for
nerves
the
its
ner
man-
moat
part
been
detected.
8.
and
forming
By
They
toes.
the
the hands
and
forming
nerve-fibres.
or
two
consist of concentric
cavity,which
Tac'tile
nerves
contains
corpuscles found
feet.
a
They
in the
fingers
single nerve
in the
consist of
cavity,which
-fibre.
papillaeof touch
single layer of
contains
2d,
from
one
in
brane,
mem-
to
four
nerve-fibres,and
9. The
corpuscles found
of
the
found
in the
eyeball and
Sympathetic System
the tongue.
are
mostly
APPAfiATUS.
13,
and
comprises about
the
whole
brain, and
Bkull.
the
or
is the
Cer'ebmin
The
The
six-sevenths
length
conforms
in
cerebrum
and
lobefl ; the
part
of
anterior
its entire
of
the
is divided
each
of
breadth
jUmire
great longitadinai
lower
lai^estdivision
in
into
two
its upper
hemisphere,
is
mass.
upper
the
brain,
It
tends
ex-
part of the
cavity of
the
hemiapheres,
by
part
Beparated
the
the
of
The
into
baae,
three
position of the
116
ANATOMY,
orbita;the
middle
briiiu ; aud
tlic
14.
The
The
Bubstauce;
form
the
course
of
its
portion of
tbe
tlie
cerebellum,
of
; but
gray
a
of all its
is
layer
of
uniform
eonvolutiona,and
a
which
tht'ir
where
every-
separated from
are
These
comjwsed
substance, which
surface; and
hemispheres is
convolutions
course
variea
are
in
the
in different iudividuala.
and
Cer'ebram
a
tbe
fissures.
in diameter
hemwphercs,
of
sonvolutione
by winding
other
15.
surface
into
up
nearlyuniform
two
middle
postuiiortube, restingftbuve
external
raised
each
lobe,occupying the
HYGIENE.
the back
at
AND
FHYSIOLOQY,
of
two
kinds
oceupies its
of
nerve
exterior
is
ovcf
the whole
portion,
16.
At
ihe bottom
of the
deep longitudinalfissure,which
Fig.43
SENSORY
cerebrum
separates the
of
body
white
It is about
median
line.
17.
Beneath
the corpus
horns; and
named
by
other
the
is
these
substance
white, sphericalbodies
erv!ra
diverging
of
the
ventricles,is
the
for'nix;
the
third
backward,
layer of
the
beneath
and
third
the
form-
ventricle, and
op'tic
the
are
rise
giving
mis-
com
the
to
optic
two, small,
are
; and
the
of the
pellu'dd
the
thin
each
which
cerebrum,
front
in
separated from
mam'
; the
into
extends
matter, called
nerve
infundil/ulum,^
the
nerves;
cavities
are
sures,
the
cavities,called
two
are
cavities
Below
before
inch
an
It is transversely
^rain.
of
hemispheres, by prolongations,
lateral
narrow
ventricle of the
the
of
named
n^tter^
nerve
fornix,
Each
of
jpartition
Beneath
sep'tum.
white
thin
convex
cor'pus callo'sum.
three-fourths
callosum
the two
longitudinalfibres along
some
three
the
the
hemispheres together.
has
lateral ventricles.
the
called
long, and
inches
striated,but
hemispheres, is
two
matter,
the two
unites
wide, and
into
nerve
three
117
APPARATUS.
entering
and
pons,
bodies
large
two
are
cerebral
the
hemispheres.
18.
Pour
the cerebral
separated from
are
the
from
third
the
It is remarkable
19.
about
It is divided
the
valley.
gray
those
to
one-eighth of
the
substance, and
of the
entire
cerebrum,
while
into
sand-like
in
of
mass
deep
of
nature.
size,and
the brain.
groove,
is
called
composed
convolutions, similar
the interior is
of
pine'algland.
the
a
body
eminences
anterior
of the cerebellum
is raised
small
of
leading
passage
the cerebrum
hemispheres by
exterior
the
is called
is next
into two
The
and
two
containing grains
Cerebellum
The
comprises
for
the
ventricle, and
third
ventricle.
on
quadrigeminal bodies,
the
by
crura
fourth
is situated
substance
gray
to
the
behind
situated
gem'inalbodies, are
of white
eminences
composed
of
to
of the
118
when
from
is
Oblonga'tais
bellum,
cere-
bridge,
portion of
the
diverge
cerebellum, and
form bodies,
and
into
the
from
extend
of the
one
brain.
is situated
ing
pass-
the
long, and
It is
composed
lateral
bellum,
cere-
anterior
the
by
of the
and
portions,which
pyramidal, olivary^and
medulla
its upper
inch
in front
Fibres
posterior pyramids.
the
from
emerge
about
divided
further
of
behind
oblongata
which, therefore,connect
cerebrum,
like
lower
It is divided
the pons.
posterior median
and
The
of the
crura
nerve-substance, and
matter
the
nerve-fibres,which
of the divisions
beneath
are
the
substance, situated
extending,
of transverse
Medulla
is the smallest
of white
to
and
hemispheres.
its
The
21.
gray
appearance
the other.
to
into
the
of white
body
cerebellum, and
composed
each
the
small
hemisphere
one
pons
is
of the
front
at
arborescent
HYGIENE.
vertically.
cut
Pons
The
20.
of
arrangement
substance, gives an
white
in
The
substance.
white
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
redir
nerve-
the pons,
of the
crura
spinal cord
with
the
brain.
22.
The
nerve
the
to the skin
power
trunk, and
oblongata, at
the
inches
long, and
from
before
the
cervical
these
and
about
half
cylindricalin form,
backward.
It presents two
the
with
correspond
and
large
distributed
portions,to
be
The
cord
to
eighteen
The
ounces.
but
is flattened
enlargements, called
lumbar
the
medulla
to the lower
fifteen to
is somewhat
enlargement,
the
it extends
and
one
nishes
fi-
of the neck,
with
It is from
vertebra.
weighs
muscles
It connects
occipitalforamen,
spinal cord*
to the
and
the extremities.
part of
which
Spinal Cord
nerves,
the
enlargement,
emanating
upper
and
from
the lower
limbs.
23.
opinal
posteriormedian
these
the
are
each
lateral, and
is divided
fissures into
subdivided
the
two
into
by
the
anterior
and
symmetrical halves;
three
the
and
anterior
and
posteriorlateral
the
each
from
rise from
which
fissures.
of the cord,
side
brain
and
membranes;
the
dura
Du'ra
The
mater.
and
is
of th6
mater
thus
cavity usually
26.
contains
consist
28.
of twelve
beneath
the
They
or
are
distributed
to
mater
This
fluid,
serous
It is
cord.
vesting
closelyin-
composed
before
from
of
pair of
the brain.
of
the
brain,
backward.
are
nerves,
and
cerebrum,
the
of
fibrous
of
originatingin
membrane
the
situated
tributed
dis-
are
part of the
upper
of smell,
nerves
optic commissure,
membrane,
nerves
first
lobes
mucous
closely
pia
interlacingbundles
pairs,named
Op'tic,or
The
dura
the
space.
of
ounces
spinal
nerves,
anterior
the
the
to
Olfac'tory,or
to
tough,
membrane,
serous
delicate
the
it extends
The
brane,
mem-
membrane.
is
and
Cra'nial
The
27.
with
one
the subarachnoid
several
Ma'ter
brain
tissue ; and
inner
looselyattached
blood-vessels,with
numerous
29.
delicate
cavity called
Pi'a
The
the
nose.
is
the arachnoid
by
It is very
pia
corresponding with
one
the
the
is its exterior
tissue.
the outer
bones, and
the
and
arachnoid,
of fibrous
mater, and
forming
secreted
the
spinal cord.
dura
liningthe
posterior roots,
enveloped by three
are
of the brain
layers;
Arach'noid
The
25.
originate
nerves
and
anterior
by
mater,
composed
periosteum of
the
spinal
spinal cord
the
Ma'ter
consists of two
and
The
the
The
24.
119
APPARATUS.
SENSORY
second
and
pass
the retina
pair of
into
of the
diverge
nerves,
orbits
the
where
eyeball. They
are
from
they
nerves
the
are
of
vision,
30.
Oc'tdo-mo'tor, or
The
between
the
pons,
and
distributed
They
31.
behind
motor
are
The
the
pair
of
of the cerebrum,
from
are
third
crura
to
the
muscles
nerves,
and
originate
in front
moving
the
of the
eyeball.
nerves,
Pathetic,
or
fourth
pair of
quadrigeminal bodies,
of the eye.
and
nerves,
are
They
originatefrom
distributed
are
mc^
to
nerveti
the
120
ANATOMY,
32.
Trifia'cial,
or
The
unequal
three
from
roots
in
terminates
nerves
branch
skin
the skin
unites
33.
the
Tnotor
of taste
Fa'cial, or
medulla
the
neck, and
to
the
lips,and
These
chin.
emotional
The
The
ear,
from
roots
in the
tongue, the
is sen-
is motor.
arise
between
tributed
dis-
are
of the orbits.
and
The
the
at
the
ear,
arise
nerves,
They
the
and
also
nerves,
to
and
they produce
are
the
root
fifteen
the face.
originate
nerves,
distributed
are
of hearing,
nerves
of the
oblongata,
of the
lining membrane
membrane
mucous
They
tongue.
arise
nerves,
each
muscles, and
nerves
oblongata, descend
are
part of the
expressionsof
They
are
internal
of the
sensitive
of taste,
Pneumogas'tric,
to
between
sides,and
upper
oblongata, and
ear.
from
distributed
ten
move
root
ninth pair of
or
Glos'so-pharyn'geal,
six
or
pharynx,
37.
is divided
large root
nerves,
3d,
trifacial
that
the
The
eighth pair of
or
the
the tonsils,the
nerves,
the
the small
pair of
motryr
are
Au'ditory,
36.
are
and
the
of
changes
labyrinth of
and
of
ear,
lip.
oblongata
five
pharynx
the
by
and
nose
the muscles
to
pair of
seventh
the muscles
to
the
root
straightmuscles
to
from
Snpe'rior
2d, The
and
the
forehead, the
medulla
distributed
35.
to
checks, the
external
.sixth
or
distributed
small
the lower
iierve
emanate
Max'illary nerve/which
the
to
the external
and
pons
all the
nose
going
one
which
nerves,
The
34.
the
other
the
and
to
'
the
Abdu'eent,
The
pons
are
branches,
also the
dtive, and
the
large root
of the
the
to
with
lower
of the
the Infe'rior
forms
and
jaw,
muscles
two
The
from
nerve
by
arise
the pons.
upper
into two
the
and
HYGIENE.
of nerves,
ganglion
distributed
which
and
nerve,
of
OphthaI'mic
1st, The
nerve
lip,the
pair
side
semilunar
the
iris,the eyelids,and
upper
fiilh
each
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
roots
or
tenth
from
through
the
pair of
nerves,
each
side
of
the
neck
and
thorax,
arise
by
medulla
and
are
122
ANATOMY,
unite
by
trunk, which
The
41.
spinal
otheVy with
indeed
plexuses;and
Nerves
study.
fibres pass
other
to
The
42.
much
and
with
front
parts,
wUh
the
of the
each
nerves
The
43.
number
the whole
of
The
systems
44.
Many
of the
these
Solar, in
I)elvis. These
networks
; but
the
the aorta
each
side
the
spinalnerves
of
the
of
number
united
are
; thus
the
together.
the
the
and
off many
on
of nerve-fibres
far
plexuses:
the
The
spinalcolumn,
by
abdomen;
give
around
originin
organs.
the
the
nearly with
very
from
nerves
three
form
ganglia.
and
containing many
nerves,
ganglia
closelyconnected
of the
usually
are
side.
ganglia and
blood-vessels
to
with
length of
cords, composed
are
of their
some
cerebro-spinalsystem,
consists of two
each
on
narrow
or
System.
of tho
when
S3rinpathetlc System
those
extend
spinal nerves.
more
intricate system
most
numerously provided
more
being
nerve
anastomose
said to anastomose
than
ganglia. They
their
muck
nerves
Sympathetic
sympathetic system
the
fibres from
nerves.
nerves
smaller
much
two
very
nerves,
all
almost
are
The
one
each
less with
are
and
of the
of
cranial
of
composed
anastomose
nerves
common
anterior
an
supplies the
the back
of the
some
is
branch
anterior
posteriorbranch
the
and
The
roots.
form
fibres,and
of which
each
HYGIENE.
separated into
is afterwards
posteriorbranch,
both
their
intermixing of
an
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
the
greater number
Car'diac, in the
the
smaller
course
tribute
con-
thorax
Hypogas'tric, in
plexuses,which
the
form
their
termination
in the diflTerent
123
APPARATUS.
SENSORY
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. Define
the two
the two
2. Name
and
the brain
4. The
6. Of
of
spinal
cord
the white
the
which
How
nerve-matter.
is divided.
system
nervous
they arranged
are
in
nerve-substance.
nerve-substance.
gray
is said
5. What
into
kinds
in the
3. Describe
systems
I.
what
of the
the
are
cerebro-spinal nerves
composed
nerves
?
of each
is said
What
nerve-
fibre?
is said of
7. What
8. Describe
pacinian corpuscles.
the
The
of their
What
nerves
tactile
tion?
termina-
corpuscles.
The
sphericalcorpuscles.
9. Describe
the
of
nerves
10.
Describe
the ganglia.
11.
Of
does
12.
Describe
the brain.
13.
Describe
the
14.
What
what
the
the
sympathetic system.
What
its divisions
are
cerebrum.
is said of
the
the
external
and
the
surface
of
white
Describe
16.
Describe
the corpus
17.
Describe
gray
the
substance
15.
the
consist
cerebro-spinal
system
cerebrum
in the
cerebrum.
callosum.
other
parts
at
the
base of
brain.
18.
Describe
the
quadrigeminal
19.
Describe
the
cerebellum.
20.
Describe
the pons.
21.
Describe
the medulla
22.
Describe
the
23.
How
bodies.
pineal gland.
oblongata.
spinal cord.
From
is the
The
what
do
the
spinalnerves
originate ?
membranes
24.
Name
the
25.
Describe
26.
Describe
27.
Of
do the cranial
28.
Describe
what
arachnoid
the
of the
brain.
Describe
membrane.
nerves
29.
The
optic nerves.
30.
The
oculo-motor
31.
The
pathetic
32.
The
trifacial
33.
The
abducent
34.
The
facial
35.
The
auditory
36.
The
nerves.
glosso-pharynoreal
nerves.
nerves.
nerves.
nerves.
nerves.
nerves.
consist ?
the
dura
mater.
124
ANATOMY,
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
37.
Describe
the pneumogastric
38.
The
accessory
39.
The
hypoglossal nerves.
spinal
HYGIENE.
nerves.
nerves.
40.
The
41.
What
42.
Describe
43.
What
is remarked
44.
What
is said
nerves.
is said
of
the
the
sympathetic
of
of
of
anastomoses
the
nerves?
nerves.
the
plexuses
of
and
ganglia
nerves
5l*^00-
Section
Physiology
The
1.
of
nor
chemical
the
2. The
in their nature.
It docs
other
of those
The
to their
highest in
however, is
than
with
development
it is in
present the
The
entire
and
4.
Every
symmetrical
collection
them
of
brain, the
They
all nerve-centres.
by
certain
halves
gray
nerves,
and
composed
are
the
connect
to
; and
of motion
tem,
sys-
development corresponds
in this respect.
The
scale
of the lower
some
highest type
serve
also the
in
digestiveorgans
nervous
in the
sympathetic
of the
commissures.
fibres,and
Its
man.
vegetative
power
The
the scale.
of the
in size in
portion
pro-
increases
highly developed
more
animals
the
ascend
we
sensation, and
intelligence,
the
being
As
body.
loeomo-
the
the
S3rinpathetlcsystem presidesover
of the
is to
functions
intellectual
and
its purpose
Cer'ebro-spi'nal
system presidesover
of
3.
; but
like
itself,
for
act
physical
organs.
nutritive functions
not
not
organs
or
man
neither
System are
sensitive,and
tory, respiratory,
body.
System.
Nervous
the
the Nervous
functionsof
II.
of white
of the brain
is caUed
spinal cord,
they
nerve-
and
the
nerve-
ganglia,
impressions brought
send
spinal cord.
nerve-mMter
receive
does
centres, nerves,
hemispheres
of the
man
out
to
expressions by
Other
nerves.
; but
centres
the
to
the
Nerve-power
thus
transmission
of
the
How
nerves.
is
nerve-centres,
be
excited
in
this
neither
unless
the
nerve-
sively
belongs exclu-
power
entirelyunknown
nerve,
originates in
this nerve-power
evident, because
is
125
APPARATUS.
SENSORY
is
yet, that it is
motion
duced
pro-
so
sensation
nor
with
it communicates
in
produced
can
nerve-
centre.
5. AH
be
communication
through a
nerve-centre
substance
foreign
which
centre,
sends
muscles
reflexaction
"om
reflected
carried
and
inward
that
to
a
must
nerve-
that
power
its
sion.
expul-
system
nervous
the nerve-centre,
to
its
to
centre
in
needed
of the
body
produced by
sensations
reacts
is first sent
the
in
organs
glottisare
various
the
information
is then
and
the
immediately
is called
This
two
thus, the
in
the
activity
calls into
because
between
appropriate
destination.
The
6.
excited
at
origin,in
a
distributed
nerves
the
of sensation
knoMrn,
as
7. All
visible
either
excitabilityor
f
surfaces
of
are
the
body
this
change
takes
their
at
to
sensitive
body
place
shows
to
carry
nerves^
to
one
the
in
itself
the
one
of
are
extend
the
from
from
impressions
and
nerve-fibres.
Hence, there
extend
is not
to
or
two
as
sets
sensitive
sions
impres-
the nerve^^ntres
outward.
second
carry
tinct
dis-
two
of sensation,
power
nerve-centres,
to
their
at
conveyed
in the
and
extremity,in
sensation
is
power
or
sensihilityy
the other
and
muscles,
called
entire
the
extremity ;
their
at
corresponding
of motion.
power
the
inward,
to
nerve-fibres
or
nerves
as
excited
are
in the
nerve-power
forms
this is
excited
are
fibres at their
How
brain.
the
no
when
oppositeextremity. Thus,
the muscles
of the muscular
nerves
origin
of
to
system.
the
contraction
when
and
throughout
extends
the
of
organs
peculiar ftmction,
extremity,it
one
and
the
connecting
communication
tissues
with
length,producing
when
the
endowed
are
of
organs
with
nerve-centres
They
are
nerves
are
The
first
callArl Mol^r
126
ANATOMY,
Both
nerves.
in the
but
motor
sensitive
it
endoumieiit
destroys or
and
organ
gland
when
How
The
10.
light falls
pupil
the eye
of
glottis,it
of the
means
When
11.
but
be
months,
are
12.
as
organs
tvith
afwio-
into
action
secretion,
tion
contrac-
causes
to
tributed
dis-
nerve
excite
these
causes
various
to
called
which
sympathy
Thus, when
organ.
contraction
foreignsubstance
be
may
the
by
another
for
when
muscles,
so
as
is
produce
ent
the differ-
existence, is established
our
in
lodged
to
between
of the
by
system.
nerve-fhreis
cut
or
and
re-uniting,
of
in this way
man,
several
to
complete
this
in
In
recovered.
required
usually accomplished
inferior
operate
sympathetic connection
the power
it has
may
; and
nervous
a
excited, it
of the
retina, it
necessary
so
organs,
thus, when
nerves
way,
has
body
excites
This
coughing.
the
indirect
the
upon
is called
is
place,
elapsed.
this function
of many
an
of the
organ
takes
explained.
function
activityin
into
the
be
cannot
reaction
that
so
nerves,
endowed
will be
of the fibres.
functions
the
have
It may
injury, often
of the body is
muscle
special
power
severe
hours
nerves
as
is distributed.
nerve
pain, until
the
in the
is manifested
irritability
of
irritability
tissue
to
nerve
irrUabUity
;
the nerve,
irritation,but the
the
of
irritability
to
one
the
until several
bo
not
in
shock, from
The
of
of this
continued
rest.
the function
inherent
and
peculiar to itself,
the
and
which
suspends
may
9. Each
by
to
HYGIENE.
movement.
patientexperiences no
which
tion
power
by
regained by
the
the
organ
exhausted
be
it
nerves,
produces
but
in the
have
nerves
is
irritahUity
Nervous
only
of
sets
nerves,
8.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
few
days,
weeks,
its function
and
even
but
process;
in
ceases;
the young
it is
of
the
animals.
The
spinal cord
ihe
trunk, and
and
the muscles
the
sends
out
nerves
extremities, and
of about
nine-tenths
to
these
supply
embrace
of the whole
the
neck,
the
skin
body.
All
these
parts
The
13.
in
have
in
rest
This
and
in
varies
lips,the tip of
this
When
14.
injure the
shin
For
enough
of
is
The
pain
from
external
of
15.
The
through
the
excite
pain
the
their
into
to
the
the
the
while
nerve,
sions
impres-
place in
most
of
temperature
lose
the
the
pain
while
the
and
it is hot
when
only
to
as
sensitive
be blunted
may
impressions ;
nerves,
tissues
activity.
gland, is
on
; the
prodv^d.
is
of pain
feel
and
sense
duced.
pro-
still
we
lessen
may
still
nerve
etJier
mains
re-
make
may
destroying his
impressionsmade
proper
into
nerves,
nature
cold ; but
or
pain without
sensitive
the
functions
nerves
of
to
it.
to
conscious
things.
various
to
nerves
taken
such
injurethe skin, we
to
sensitive
insensible
person
ness
hot
neuralgia in
subject to
at
fingersbeing
remain
the
regard
the
of the
judge
can
enough
sensation
of
take
to
seems
of its temperature,
judging
is
the sensation
moderately
cold
or
small,
sensitive
of
the ends
is
it is
their distribution
to
is different from
instance, we
that
body
in
the
upon
may
other
pain
they
whether
learn
we
things
according
other
foreign substance
of
sensation
This
effect
soft,large or
or
depends
its nerves,
or
bodies,
sensitive
foreign substance
many
acuteness
mation
infor-
some
thus, when
smooth, hard
or
obtain
we
the
our
of sensation
power
more
motion, and
in
or
which
impre"-
receive
to
us
and
qualities,
with
contact
cold, rough
or
their
to
systems
our
upon
t)rought
hot
regard
enables
things,by
external
from
sians
sensation
of
power
the
spinal cord.
in the
the nerve-centres
sensation,and
of
the power
of which
of motion, both
power
on
with
endowed
are
127
APPARATUS.
SENSORY
to
The
mouth,
brain, and
the
organs,
efiect
increase
tlie motor
salivaryglands, which
so
the
is carried
nerves
when
as
by
are
the
set
their
ment
excite-
nervous
motor
excite
to
as
of this
its secretion
fact
nerve-centres,
conveyed by
are
and
the
upon
at
food
is
sensitive
wofk
respond by imeammg
to
4i^
128
ANATOMY,
their
And
excited
are
the effect
16. The
and
in
Sometimes
when
the muscles
The
roots
the
trunks
of
sensitive
is
the
of the
roots
nerves
and
carried
the
which
The
pass
from
by
of
the
A
may
cord
and
by
the
ttoo
teriory
pos-
In
the
nerve-fibres,the
but
in the
Spinal
tive
sensi-
both
having
to
sensitive
the
to the
brain
anterior
of the
the
right.
one
pass
The
side
to
columns
in the
brain
will
the
cause
anterior
on
the
columns
spinal
by
nerves
tissues
or
is
organs.
decussate,
gata;
oblon-
the left,and
of the
those
is,
When
to
roots
brain
of the
the
by communicating
the
anterior
the
posteriorcolumns
impression from
motor
right side
like
impressionmade
of the anterior
nerve-fibres
injury to
in the
spinal cord,
posteriorcolumns, like
nerves
to
the
the
its destination
to
of the
pass
body.
there
separated.
are
nerves,
of
-sets
fibres
and
thence
off
motor
those
any
these
passes
19.
and
mingled together;
are
sensitive
by
it is carried
left side
both
sensitive,
are
cord.
along
cord, and
motion
Tnotor
are
is carried
in
sensation,as
spinal
exclusivelymotor
columns
spinal cord,
fibres
the
from
nerves
motor,
anterior
posterior roots,
of the
of
not
apoplexy.
fibres.
roots,
the skin
of
the
motor
anterior
that
is
spinal nerves,
The
18.
and
suspended
or
attack
an
therefore,called mixed
are,
conneetedy
closely
are
of motion.
arise
which
spinal
and
relax,so
or
paralyzed ;
are
not
which
motion
motion,
face
nerves
anterior
supply it
to
as
so
increase
needed, the
it to contract
fainting,or
of the
spinal
motion,
and
loss of
is
generally impaired
17.
or
is
there
is to
lungs
impressionsgiven.
are
fit of
HYGIENE.
oxygen
causes
the
functions
together,as
more
of sensation
nerves
their
be
muscle
on
the
on
increased
to
correspond with
to
effect
thus, when
movement;
lungs
as
The
of saliva.
amount
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
thus,
paralysisof
columns
the
of the
injuryto
right side
the
of
spinal cord
130
The
24.
inward
irritcfhilUy
of the
hours
several
sensibility
The
25.
brain
is the seat
of sensation
brain
and
The
oblongata, and
These
and
like
it
of the brain
26. The
the
and
28.
and
and
The
the
over
as
supposed
The
actions
of
and
the
The
reasoning.
and
the
drink
and
not
from
hungry,
alone.
cell,the
intellectual
the
injured
parts
sensibility.
of
powers
manifest.
in
any
body.
of
way,
It
muscular
the
ciated
asso-
preserves
movements,
life.
presiding
nerve-centre
destroyed,respirationceases,
and
The
without
desire
for
bird
silk-worm
classed
be
when
builds
such
are
reference
to
drink.
perience
ex-
creates
The
food
to satisfythe desires,
instinctively
drink
actions
any
any
support
thirst,a
taken
are
instinctive
may
judgment.
to
all other
cerebrospinal system
performed blindly,and
are
spinal cord,
be the seat
to
is the
it is
cerebrum.
correspondingly affected.
of various
oblongata
the
which
of the
movements
the
results.
or
is
is
medulla
themselves
is
gata,
oblon-
the
reasoning or
make
the individual
respiration. When
instinctive
as
of
it
cerebrum.
and
irritability
imperfect,or
harmony
medulla
death
29.
is
the
of
crura
absolutelyindispensableto
are
of
through
judgment
and
seiisatvyns
which
medulla
parts of
of the
is the instrument
oerebellum
unity
of both
is the seat
of
intelligence
the
of the
destitute
the cerebrum
The
porUom
are
reason,
27.
sensitive
but
subject to irritability;
faculties.It
When
The
continuation
nervous
; and
are
cerebrum
memory,
anterior
the
cranium
crura
part of the
but
are
place.
the
of motion.
the
are
lose their
may
part of
cavity of
part of the
the lower
portions
that
rmihotd
from
ceases
takes
posteriorparts
upper
portions
motor
nerves
death
all
the
and
the
are
the
before
within
HYGIENE.
comprises
83rstem contained
of the
sensitive
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
they
are
spins its
coccoon,
that
eat
they
when
thirsty,from
honey-bee
and
the
are
sary
neces-
they
are
instinct
constructs
its
SENSORY
without
experience or
improvement, although
these
first set
The
30.
of
first be
in
by
regard
the cerebrum.
in
adapt
the
three
The
which
by
him
the
to
the
upon
mind
facultyof
of God's
the
how
act
sation
sen-
reasoning in
human
profitfrom
to
the
upon
It is this
given offby
nerves
of
classes; nerves
motor
brain, but
must
understood, before
depend
not
operation
co-
gard
re-
is enabled
which
reason
creation,in
this
experience of
those
divided
into
nerves,
and
passed away.
have
31.
does
crowning glory
since God
sensation
experience,decide
or
ends.
to
means
man
who
the
of
nature
its effects be
action
that sensation,
to
makes
and
The
it.
to
rolled away
The
judgment
our
produced
to
result
comprehended,
can,
we
which
have
work.
to
creatures
adiona
131
APPARATUS.
the brain
special sense,
be
may
sensitive
nerves.
1. The
and
motor,
of
nerves
hearing. They
or
are
The
Olfactory,or
The
Optic, or
The
Auditory,
2. The
nerves
their
only
convey
pair
of
The
Pathetic,
The
Small
The
Abducent,
The
Facial,
The
Accessory, or
The
Hypoglossal, or
or
third
or
fourth
of
root
or
ing,
smelling,see-
nerves.
sixth
pair of
pair of
of sensation, called
of the fifth
The
Glosso-pharyngeal,or
The
Pneumogastric,
or
nerves.
nerves.
nerves.
nerves.
tenth
nerves.
Sensitive
pair of
ninth
nerves.
pair of
twelfth
are
nerves.
pair of
eleventh
Large
nerves,
pair of
pair of
The
nerves.
pair of
the fifth
seventh
root
nor
nerves.
If otor
of motion, called
Oculo-motor,
nerves
pair of
eighth pair of
or
sensitive
of
special sense
first
second
or
neither
are
The
3. The
Sense
Special
nerves,
are
nerves.
pair of
pair of
nerves.
nerves.
32.
The
motor
nerves,
originatingfrom
the
brain,
are
the
"
132
ANATOMY,
same
in
They
are
fanctioriy
as
purely
after
they leave
from
the sensitive
both
The
33.
then
and
the
of
from
nerves
The
tongue,
as
branch
less
the
great sympathetic
touch,
On
35.
is
of
account
to cold
for
even
days
production
considerable
36.
Three
it
its
sensitive
special
; and
with
acts
sense.
to the
the
sends
Pneu-
presides,move
ternal
hence, the in-
slowly and
very
to pain, or
sensibility
their
of
or
remains
dampness
when
they
time
kinds
inflammations,
aft"r the
to
in
are
are
the
reflex
one
exciting cause
; and
is not
manifested
not
stomach
organ
the sym-
some
hours
the effect of
of the
slowness
they usually
in
remain
or
the
a
is removed.
cause
of reflexaction
ganglia,from
in
movement
the
often
Because
afterwards.
these
in
in that
produced
to
of
application of
sympatheticsystem: 1st,The
through
the
nerves
the deglurespiration,
tition,
inflammations
after the
irritation is
exposure
of taste
this slowness
internal
other
state.
time
some
from
branch
one
scarcelyperceptible,except
patJietic
system,
for
spinal cord,
Glosso-pharyngeal also
nerve
extent, and
limited
very
which
origin,the
cranial
of
cerebro-spinalnerves
the
tive
sensi-
the stomach.
The
over
of the
pair,sends
digestionin
rapiditythan
the
fibres
ofi* nerves
nerve
the
inflamed
an
and
organs,
to
; the
as
mogastric presidesover
34.
give
the fifth
of taste
its
from
motor
trunk.
Each
identical; but
are
also
the tongue,
to
less
having
sation,
capable of sen-
are
spinal cord.
roots
less,
or
same
ganglion, near
nerves
from
nerve
the
or
the brain
large root,
from
spinal
brain, but
nerves,
in the
the brain
from
more
In these
nerves.
spinal cmi.
the
mixed
mingled
the sensitive
by
receives
origin from
become
fibres
through
is done
and
and
those
the
nerves
as
HYGIENE.
from
nerves
their
at
nerves,
passes
as
motor
sensitive
same
nerve
motor
sensitive
the
same
the
the cranium
and
motor
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
organ
take
phce
through
action
which
takes
to
another
the
.place
thus, food
and
lymphatic
organs
The
of
activity
of
sympathy
the
the
means
in
uneasure
internal
the nutritive
health
of
that
Through
they
and
known
to
others.
of all the
so
the
to
of
of
Deity, and
divine
!
12
sense
bound
together
harmony
of
with
one
action, throughout
to
the
do
we
of
preservation
pervading
them
The
our
connecting
can
be made
it
to
can
be
feel and
link
take
we
; for
between
is made
are
can
the
impressed with
that
the
template
con-
human
the animal
cognizance of
relations with
know
in
the world
brain
in the
fect
per-
than
part of the
every
existence
own
things divine
ends,
faculties,
by which
It
more
acquainted with
nerve-centres
the
find
certain
produce
become
we
spiritualworld.
and
of time
unity
nerves
intellectual
in
frame
to
through
be
this
By
name.
other, are
necessary
things earthly,and
seems
their fiinctional
hence, its
act
that
means
them
us,
is
of the individual.
system
around
and
even
There
other.
which
by
each
from
in the human
Nowhere
intricate
mind
from
action
organs,
producing
adaptation
seat
news
this
apparatus,
body.
them
sympathetic system
thus
another;
the
sorrowful
each
upon
feelingamong
so
physiologically,
38.
the circulation
disturb
and
of circulation,digestion,
the organs
entirelyseparated
are
duce
pro-
may
convulsions,or
cause
may
ternal
in-
gestible
surfaces; thus, indi-
sensitive
the
activityis regulated,and
by
odors
reflex
The
to the
surfaces
or
joyfiil
as
same
stomach
in the
ahsorption,depends
over
absorption.
blindness.
temporary
increased
impressions may
to
organs
food
excites
sensitive
the
appetite. 3d,
the
away
internal
37.
mental
and
takes
to
the
intestine
thus, disagreeablesights or
the
digestion,
and
the
from
action
;
nausea,
capillaryvessels
the
reflex
2d, The
small
the
in
in its
movement
peristaltic
causes
food
coat, and
muscular
often
canal
intestinal
the
in
133
APPAKATU8.
8EN80BT
the life
the
things
the
truths
they are
truihfi
134
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
QUESTIONS.
II.
SECTION
1. What
is said of the
2. Over
what
What
5.
How
called
6. What
7.
In
is
two
does
both
of
by exciting
function
of
10.
How
is the
function
excited
11.
What
occurs
12.
What
parts of
13.
What
this
does
power
body
the
power
depend
is said of the
What
14.
be
does
an
the
made?
be
organs
What
itself?
into
by sympathy
tion
func-
sensation
of
pain
spinal
cord
?
the
enable
sensation
action
is broken
supplied by
are
of
nerves
show
excited
organ
nerve-fibre
two
?
irritability
nervous
is the
the
nerves
9. How
when
pathetic
sym-
all nerve-power
sets of
is remarked
in animalfl
produced
are
forms
possessed by
8. What
action
The
preside?
between
communications
reflex
effects
what
the nerve-centres
of
all
must
composed
system
nervous
system
nervous
their development
is said of
is remarked
is this
Why
is the
what
4.
What
system
3. Of
the
cerebro-spinal system
the
does
of
functions
to
us
How
do ?
Upon
this
may
what
sensation
blunted?
16.
motor
17.
spinal
18.
the brain
19.
the
kind
of
of
20.
21.
May
the
do
of
Where
in function
between
the
sensitive
the fibres
in the
and
roots
of the
trunks
the
fibres
the
are
to
spinal
the
brain
composed
columns
impressions
Motor
How
from
columns
decussate
decussate
anterior
fibres of the
What
is
this ?
do
the
nerve
be
irritated
of
the
along
its
course
is the
Where
sion
impres-
What
is said
23.
Describe
24.
How
25.
In
motion
connection
result
22.
the
impressions carried
Where
made
sensitive
what
sensitive
are
of
is remarked
nerves
Of
the
nerves
What
through
made
impressions
by examples.
is said
What
the
with
Illustrate
nerves
and
is done
What
15.
does
what
associated
the
action
of
each
of
the
brain
cerebrum
the
are
what
is the
Of
27.
The
cerebellum?
28.
The
medulla
associated
sensations, and
of sensitive
irritability
parts
26.
nerve-fibre
oblongata
seat ?
the
nerves
?
movements.
cease
functions
of
sensation
and
SENSOKY
29.
Define
30.
The
31.
How
the instinctive
the
special sense.
32.
What
is said
33.
What
of
cranial
What
34.
35.
Explain
What
of
is
sensitive
the
Name
nerves.
nerves
What
classified ?
be
The
motor
nerves
of
the
functions
the
of
nerves?
action
of the
slowness
sympathetic
of
movement
of
reflex
kinds
three
nerve?
operates
the
on
system.
produced through
action
the
system
What
the
brain
nerves.
class of
spinal
this
the
are
sympathetic
37.
the
how
cerebro-spinal system.
the
the
motor
sensitive
and
is said
36.
The
of the
the
nerves,
of
from
nerves
of
nerves
actions
actions.
reasoning
may
135
APPARATUS.
said
of
the
of
sympathy
feeling
internal
the
among
organs?
What
38.
is remarked
of
the
of
adaptation
to ends
means
"i-0"?00
III.
Section
Anatomy
The
1.
of
fece
and
to
and
its
tip
upper
sur^Eu^e of the
called
the
2.
The
tongue
taste.
papillsB of
taste
the
form
of
from
way
its
All
the
covered
of three
The
and
with
papillae. The
dozen, and
face,
sur-
are
circumCircnni-
arranged
two-thirds
of
in
the
which
Capitate papillae,
more
of the tongue
sur-
eminences,
; the
kinds
eminences, and
still smaller
under
part of the
small
tongue, about
its root
of the surface
two-thirds
3.
are
anterior
numerous
conical
about
small, red
which
are
the
across
tip to
numerous,
are
are
are
the
papillaenumber
vallate
part of its
the
Upon
its root
by
while
mouth,
composed
is situated
It is attached
jaw.
the middle
papillseof
and
membrane,
free.
are
of taste, is
organ
mucous
by
Sense.
Special
of
is the
of the lower
hyoid bone,
the
to
by
covered
the arch
within
which
Tongue,
muscles
Organs
the
of
the
the spaces
cover
numerous,
next
the
Conical
its
tip.
betw""'
'
pillae,
pathe
136
that
surround
conical
the
rises in hair-like
of
4. The
branch
of the
nerves
coated
"
hair-like
in health ;
in sickness.
of taste
and
the
of these
the
to
These
furred
or
nerves,
each
also
papillae,and
the
admirably adapted
tasted.
special sense
from
Filaments
nerve.
epithelium
squamous
are
be
HYGIENE.
velvety appearance
"
pair of
fifth
of the
which
liquids to
the tongue
projectionsgive
but
the
papillae,
appendages,
imbibition
the
to
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
the
are
lingual
glosso-pharyngeal
nerves
into
pass
membrane
mucous
all
of
the
tongue.
5. The
yet it performs
of
composed
skin.
At
cartilage,which
separated from
cartilage. The
the
pharynx
which
other
or
and
its
They
eyelids
orbicular
muscle, which
of
mucous
bone,
the
sight, and
the
in
one
other
of
skin
the
to
which
plates of fibro-cartilage,
number
hairy
eyelid and
edges
with
in
and
winking
then
the
; next
the
the
front
externally; then
in
the
lashes.
eyethe
the
lining or
conjunctiva.
Fal'pebral cartilages,one
next
the
are
upper
their free
is concerned
placed
includes
curtains, situated
two
are
called
Fal'pebral glands
into
groups;
and
eyebrows
internal
are
bone
through
ethmoid
in two
wall
glands;
eyelids,and
the
inner
smell, pass
are
between
composed
membrane,
of
The
fringed at
are
orifices,
of the throat.
They
the
appendages.
eyeball,and
and
nostrils.
arches, situated
The
that
plate of
forehead.
of the
of the
muscles
throughout by
nerves
cavities.
wall
by
It is
externallyin front,and
with
or
to
the voice.
nostrils,or
two
lined
of the cribriform
of the nasal
of smell
partitionconsistingof
are
olfao'torynerves,
the outer
brows,
by
is continuous
is distributed
eyeball
the
nostrils open
of which
7. The
is covered
are
behind, and
the foramina
the roof
part
each
and
6. The
special sense
its lower
membrane,
of the
is the organ
Nose
in each
the
preserve
to
about
their
eyelid,are
free
twenty
to
shape
of the
margin.
each
thin
The
eyelid.
138
ANATOMY,
inch
long,
continuoua
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
and
lined
with
with
the
mucous
with
that
of
the
lu"hrymal gland
enter
and
below
between
they
the
the
through
12.
The
in
front
in
shape,
three
with
humors,
the
are
vitreous
13.
The
muscles
are
with
the
in
front
iris
the
the
then
pass
angle,
where
conveyed
orbit, with
behind
in
it
in
cornea
and
the
spherical
eyeball
three
ia
which
eoate,
the
front;
the
eyelids
coats,
or
The
eye.
is
The
envelopes
the
the
It
diameter.
humor,
aqueous
the
are
choroid
retina.
three
The
crystalline lens,
and
humor,
of
the
eyeball
The
oblique muscles.
superior,
They
muscle.
"t
inch
of
eyelidg,
from
thence
are
the
in
of
humors
mTudes
and
situated
an
inner
nose.
concentric
coat,
the
the
angle,
the
and
the
toon
outer
to
canals,
cushion
three
sclerotic
coat,
is
its
at
which
of
The
nose.
eyelids
into
nearly
is
of
the
tbe
duct
it, aud
and
composed
the
nasal
membraae
eye
lachrymal
Eyeball
of
enclose
and
eyeball
the
eater
the
membrane,
mucoua
above
HYGIEKB.
arise
the
at
are
divided
straight
muscles
optic foramen,
into
of the
the
and
and
straight
ball
eye-
internal
inserted
are
Fig. 47.
into
draws
the
the
sclerotic
the
external
coat
the
near
eyeball upward,
draws
it
cornea.
the
outward,
inferior
and
The
superior
draws
the
it
internal
muscle
downward,
draws
it
The
inward.
united
eyeballback
the
14.
There
the
and
optic foramen,
orbit
and
It ends
then
in
its
tendon, which
the external
outward
and
and
backward,
15.
At
nerve
its back
the
sclerotic
into which
The
the
of the
wall
lined
within
lamina, lined
and
very
and
the choroid
blood-vessels
17.
The
with
the
of
It
fibres, forming
regulating
of the eyeball.
the
circular
red
aperture
its
membrane
situated
membrane
It consists
with
about
thin,vascular
coat.
optk
watch-crystalin
transparent, fibrous
flat
choroid
dilates
is
part is
occupies
presents
by
wall
is continuous
nerve
The
light received
is
strong white
very
of
vascular
smooth
is very
is
matter
color from
the
absent,
numerous
it.
I'ris is
ciliarymuscle.
^npil, which
In
coat
in
pigmentary layer,which
black.
the
inserted,like
sclerotic
by
of
conjunctiva.
coat
the
the eyeball,
protrude
exterior
the
its front
is
the
Cho'roid
16. The
of the
orifice,
through which
of
eyeball,is
by
The
angle
is inserted
composed
an
cor'nea, which
in front
next
At
cornea
frame.
the internal
and
forms
sheath
coat.
the
is
part is
The
passes.
tween
be-
opposite directions.
which
membrane,
pulley,
is inserted
and
oblique muscles
Solerot'ic coat
The
fibrous
it in
rotate
side of the
through
outward,
from
passes
origin above
the inner
passes
the
superior straightmuscle.
the
and
inferiorobliquemuscle
orbit
and
backward
turns
its
has
along
course
superior and
; the
oblique muscles
two
draws
orbit.
Tlie
inferior.
straight muscles
of the
action
into the
are
139
APPAKATUS.
8EN80KY
or
its size.
by
coat
iris has
retina.
tints
or
so
whitish
as
In
shades
structure
circular
circumference
central
contracts,
the
fibrous
a
disk, whose
with
layer
aperture,
to
nected
con-
called
the
named
regulate the
different
of
zone,
is
blue,
amount
individuals
gray,
unstriated
around
the
the
the
brown,
or
muscular
pupil,
and
140
ANATOMY,
18.
Eef
The
expands
Figi48i
Section
4, crystalline
choroid
a
and
thk
of
spreads
Eteball.
is formed
the
over
1, Sclerotic
"
5, hyaloid memhrane
0, cornea
by
2, choroid
7, iris
8, optic
soft,
opticnerve,
of the
surface
inner
coat;
;
the
8, retina;
coat;
nerve
9, aqueous
humor.
10, vitreous
humor;
in
lens
and
It is
of the eye.
coat
and
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
coat, ^
far front
waving margin.
all
it receives
the
as
it ends
ciliarymuscle, where
It is the
of the
sensitive coat
impressionsmade
by external
the eye
upon
eyeball,
things.
19. The
the
filling
space
The
occupied by
two
space
between
the
clear,colorless,
watery liquid,
and
cornea
the
is divided
this humor
anterior
of the
is
A'qneouBhumor
and
lens.
crystalline
by the iris into
posteriorchambers
the
eye.
20. The
in
lor
le
Crys'tallinelens
an
the vitreous
front, and
between
It is
onion.
Ntanoe, enclosed
7if
reons
the
in
humor
space
the aqueous
behind.
humor
lens,composed of concentric
oonvex
"f
is situated
layers,like
perfectlytransparent
capsule,and
the
and
surrounded
within
It is
retina
and
the
color-
by
the
and
colorless,
the
ciliary
SENSORY
muscle.
It
IB
called
structure,
22.
The
divided
viscid
Ear
into
liquid,and
the
ia the
the
141
APPARATUS,
is contained
specialorgan
the
cate
deli-
ineinbritne.
hyaloid
external,
within
hearing.
of
and
middle,
It may
be
tlie internal
ear,
labyrinth.
or
Fig.49.
23.
The
t"?rual
Eztemal
auditory
consists
Ear
canul.
The
cartilage,cloaclycovered
the
in
ear
is about
from
portion
bone
of
outer
also
with
the
is
;
the
24.
inch
one
tym'panum
parts
which
oavity,
and
It is
continuous
Tinth
in
the
the
the
Eustach'ian
that
the
lined
by
Ear,
of the
inner
abort
tube,
fibro-
pharynx,
portion
of
hairs, and
which
mucous
or
outer
enr-wax.
of
delicate
tends
ex-
skin
consists
both
canal
and
The
Tlie
or
ex-
part called
brain.
numerous
Middle
of
middle,
skin.
with
tlie
auditory
the cennnen,
secrete
everywhere
with
lined
is the
external
towards
are
called
the
skin, and
The
and
composed
and
fibro-cartilage,
is furnished
glands,
auricle
ia
narrowe-st
inward
of
both
part
The
air.
auricle
composed
and
the
by
long, is
the
auricle
language.
common
of
throat.
of
the
tain
con-
brane,
mem-
142
ANATOMY,
Tym'pannm,
The
25.
called
membrane,
bones, called
the
to
the
order
connection
inches
The
Eusta'chian
and
is
longer part
brane, formed
The
27.
into
end;
with
the
from
curved
are
Ear,
Two
circle.
and
of
that
there
the canals
this
the
of
the
Canals
canal
into
the vestibule
at
is of the
each
auditory
nerve
called
parts
and
; named
the
tween
be-
situated
They
than
more
into
the
serous
as
to
canals
end
liquid;
the
and
at
;
go
in
membranous
the vestibule
this
Both
canals.
liquid.
serous
half
the vestibule,
other
three
called
shape
is distributed
its
canals.
at
the
mem-
from
of the other
one
bag,
fibrous
extremity
contain
same
its lower
cavity,communicatiiv^
rather
from
or
tympanum
three in number.
are
half
the cochlea.
window,
forms
openings
pouch
and
; but
bony
three
the vestibule
and
canals, and
oval
the
five
labyrinth,which
into
small, oval
open
are
tube.
canals, and
are
liquid floats
the
continued
one
cartilageand
conjoinswith
opens
is
the semicircular
each
the third
end, and
one
is
and
them
with
tympanum
about
Lab'yrinth, so
or
divided
by
that
so
the
chain, while
trumpet-shaped
Semicir'cular
The
29.
canal
of
tympanum
form
is attached
of the
of
composed
Ves'tibule
the cochlea
is
tube
vestibule,the semicircular
The
and
ear.
complex character, is
28.
stirrnp,are
thus, forming
portion
Internal
the
small
communicating
Its upper
Three
mallet
end
one
vibrations
extends
pharynx.
The
and
ear,
thin, translucent
tympanum,
window,
the
the internal
long, and
the
to
which
by
at
other
to
carried
26.
the
at
ear
internal
anvil, and
named.
oval
stirrupjoins the
the
irregular
an
membrane.
part of the
in the
is
ear,
canal, by
mallet, the
tympanic membrane,
internal
and
tympanic
upper
of bones
chain
the
the
the
in
situated
the external
the external
from
separated
of the
drum
or
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
and
branch
membranous
^"byrinth.
80. The
Cochlea, named
from
its resemblance
to
snail-
form
to
as
80
into two
membrane
only
other
of
the cone,
The
31.
the
is the natural
Skin
of
organ
It
touch.
thickest
and
muscles, the
bones, the
beneath
The
is
The
32.
is
skin
epidermis ;
the
more
glands ;
so
electricity,
Its outer
flesh."
which
vary
longest
Each
nerve,
as
on
in
number
the
palms
papilla
and
of which
forms
nerves,
a
it
; but
; while
persons
in the
aged.
the
glands,
sweat
it is furnished
influence
the
with
of
with
size,being
of
terminal
dense
cold, fear, or
of
"goosepapillaB,
and
numerous
the soles of
filament
of
The
blood-vessels, and
close network
muscular
tactile
most
It is
skin.
phenomenon
looped capillaryblood-vessel.
with
the
placed
few unstriated
hands,
nails.
is fiimished
and
contains
richly supplied
each
surface
in
eyelids
nerves
mainly composed
the
produce
to
the
of
and
the
is
is
protectionto
under
contract
the
individuals
kinds
two
is the
and
tissue,although it contains
which
fibres
as
serves
of two
fibrous
auditory
thickness
on
less wrinkled
or
composed
Der'mis
The
33.
thinnest
in different
it contains
appendages,
two
tympanum,
body,
in
flexible in young
the sebaceous
glands, and
it
varies
and
harder
the
somewhat
blood-vessels,and
it becomes
of
skin
each
the
lips,and
it.
covering of
varies
and
on
extremity
of the
branch
body, being
the
parts of
different
with
the
into
axis,
separated by
the lower
opens
cochlea.
the
to
is
of
hollow
communicate
At
is distributed
nerve
around
cone.
of the passages
one
the other
and
of the
It consists
canal
which
passages,
the apex
at
This
spiralcone.
times
three
nearly
wound
canal
bony
of the vestibule.
in front
shell,is situated
143
APPARATUS.
SENSORY
of vessels
the feet.
sensitive
dermis
is
lymphatics,
near
its
terior
ex-
surface.
34.
The
is without
Epider'mis
nerves
and
is the
external
blood-vessels
is not
It
sensi-
144
ANATOMY,
tive
the
to
consists
and
touch,
of
AND
PHYBIOLOGT,
it will
; the
bleed
not
soft
two
layers
Soft
Epider'tnic layer
HYGIEHI.
injury.
upon
epidermic
and
layer,
It
the
cuticle.
35.
The
It ia
composed
dermis
; and
of
cuticle.
the
black
The
pigmentary
complexion
in
individuals
of
coloring
36.
epidermic
of the
eame
race.
ia almost
Cn'tiole
ia
Fie. M.
'
layer
which
skin
the
if
different
In
the
external
^* ^^
composed
epidermic
and
pressing
In
ita
found
in
the
cuticle
are
is the
skin
is subjected
friction, the
to
and
ed,
harden-
inflammation
by
beneath
"
of
part
called
their
Sweat
number,
thus,
corn,"
the
body,
glands,
They
are
in
is estimated
man,
blisters
the
every
skin.
called
scales,
is called
nearly
soft
ii
sur"ce
the
or
the
or
dermis
what
epidermiB.
to
so
an
be
are
ous
numer-
ordinary"
about
two
tat
"losiHED.
1,
"
of
ths
millions.
Epidormia;
iiermia,
glaud
con-
JC!^gI^r?L"tdTci'"*"
less
"qMninganiiiegnrfuearth"
i**^
Boh
it
excites
glands,
that
"Drtkce
and
skin,
the
on
different
from
thickened
small
^'^^d
scales
pressure,
producing
the
When
then
of
akin, thia
When
removed.
37.
of
flakes
becomes
in
white
from
the
to
\m
or
absent,
dandruff.
or
cuticle
Bn"^iam^
of
fonn
shades
and
very
the
to
various
layer
small
to
Of
theae
applied
part
more
layer;
of
scurf,
contains
entirely
not
form
scales
races,
denm
from
dry
the
gives
shedding
TioN
into
changed
are
matter,
the
matter
The
cells
soft
the
delicate
these
above
next
diameter,
and
consists
''^"' ^"*^
the
tubes
^'^
of
are
an
diameter
average
of
Spirally to
These
in
Their
tube,
*^"
the
which
ascends
suriaco
inch
in
is coUed
more
of
the
about
is
the
,^5
length.
or
skin,
of
an
The
146
ANATOMY,
bedded
in
At
bottom
the
the
both
dermis,
of the
cells,which,
these
new
cells
push
the
hair
42.
from
of
from
thus
is extracted, it is
which
tains
con-
the hair
soft,polyhedral,
the
bottom
out, and
The
Nails,
papilla.
of the
it grows
reproduced by
fingersand
the
on
They
epidermis, and
the
the nail
edges
of
while
the
resting on
matrix,
are
imbedded
ends
remaining part
grow
in
length by
grow
in
thickness
the
or
addition
root,
As
they
in
length.
the
papilla
homy
are
hoo"
bed.
in
in
ages,
append-
of other
mals.
ani-
plates,continuous
depressed
The
in
grooves
free
border.
the
with
surface
root
of cells at
addition
the
by
toes,
and
flexible,translucent
are
dermis, called
claws
the
corresponding with
the
papilla,which
composed
the
at
it.
follicle.
hair
and
further
hair
is
formed
are
tissue beneath
produced
are
HYGIENE.
connective
follicle is
of the hair
root
AND
blood-vessels, and
nucleated
When
the
or
hair
and
nerves
The
grows.
PHYSIOLOGY,
root
of ceils to
of
the
and
lateral
the
matrix,
The
nails
; and
they
their
under
surface.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
the
1. Describe
and
strnctare
2.
Describe
the papillseof
3.
Describe
the
4.
Which
5.
Describe
the
nose.
6. Describe
the
nerves
are
III.
taste.
simple papillse.
the
of
nerves
of
taste?
smell.
7.
Describe
the
eye.
8.
Describe
the
Describe
the conjunctiva.
9.
10.
Of
what
does
the
lachrymal
glands.
apparatus
The
consist?
eyelashes.
Descril^
the
lachrymal glands.
11.
course
Describe
of the
the
tears.
lachrymal
canals.
The
nasal
ducts.
Descsribethe
12.
coats
Describe
and
its humors
shape
Describe
14.
The
oblique muscles
15.
The
sclerotic coat
16.
The
choroid
17.
Describe
18.
The
retina.
19.
The
aqueous
20.
The
crystalline lens.
21.
The
vitreous
22.
Name
23.
Describe
the external
does
of the
of the
the
cornea.
iris.
humor.
humor.
of the
ear.
ear.
24.
Describe
26.
The
eustachian
27.
The
labyrinth.
28.
The
vestibule.
29.
The
semicircular
30.
The
cochlea.
31.
Describe
the skin.
32.
Of
is the
33.
Describe
the
dermis.
34.
Describe
the
epidermis.
35.
Describe
36.
The
37.
Describe
the
sweat
38.
Describe
the
sebaceous
39.
With
40.
Describe
the
41.
Describe
the root
42.
Describe
the
the
the middle
consist?
ear
chain
The
tympanum.
of bones.
tube.
canals.
skin
composed?
layer.
cuticle.
what
are
glands.
glands.
shaft
of the
of the
"
body
Physiology
hair.
IV.
Organs
the
of Taste
less covered
nails.
of
sense
or
more
hair.
Section
other
is said of its
coat.
25.
also
What
eye.
The
eye.
Of
1. The
eyeball.
of the eye.
the divisions
what
of the
13.
what
147
APPARATUS.
SENSORY
with
of
is confined
the
pharynx
to
Special
tongue, the
the
; but
Sense.
these
similar
general sensihility,
Before
substance
can
organs
to
be
that
soft
are
of
tasted.
148
it must
in
be
the
with
excited
not
in many
as
and
tongue,
limited
the
of
part
stomach,
producing
parts
the
face, the
The
3.
of
sense
taste
generallywholesome.
habitual
the
The
stimulatingdrinks, and
a
liking for
is the
almost
with
case
the Cannibal
The
4.
excited
the
who
of Smell
sense
without
the
impress those
and
articles do
yet undergo
and
those
in
no
an
also supply
as
guide in
palatable are
perverted
tobacco,
as
and
generally;
acquired by habit, as
drinks
to the
whale-oil, and
from
the
this
odor,
form
contact
od(yr is
even
for months
Volatile
usually emit
more
the
with
substance
we
be
It may
nose.
in
appreciablechange.
gaseous
a^
are
coming
odor
What
emit
these
as
fiesh.
is confined
the
nerves.
be
who
substance
but
olfactorynerves;
because
human
eats
or
involuntarilydistorted.
substances
Esquimau
the
on
margin
which
nerves,
articles,such
article may
any
the
pungent
this
as
tastes ; and
articles that
of certain
use
posteriorpart
but
naturallyto
appears
because
of food ;
the selection
pair of
the
glosso-pharyngeal
the
is often
countenance
The
sour
This
of
sympathetically
and
the fifth
supplied by
are
posterior third
-vomiting;
acutelysweet
tip perceivesmore
sugar;
impressions; and
act
and
nausea
as
salt.
common
tip.
to bitter
impressions often
these
nerve,
the
supplied by
is
tongue
comprise
and
margin
of taste
sense
saline,as
to
more
by
the
; and
its
to
the
tartaric
as
sour,
be
to
seems
sense
18
the
excite
which
bitter,as quinine
the
heavily coated,
of sickness.
substances
classes:
four
is
sand ;
glass or
is
tact
con-
of taste
sense
as
the tongue
in
come
can
therefore,the
perceived when
cases
The
2.
it
substances, such
insoluble
will it be
neither
of taste
nerves
by
that
of solution^so
state
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
must
tell;
cannot
and
years,
substances
odor
than
solids.
5. SmeU
to
aids much
rejectsuch
which
articles
generallyare
in the proper
as
have
unfit
to
choice
rancid
be taken
or
of food^warning
a
putrid odor,
us
and
It
SENSORY
oho
which
The
6.
animals
the
such
dog
fields and
and
the deer
as
of their natural
I
7. The
It
is
of the
in
contributes
it
By
of
acquainted
all these
have
dreams, which
diseases
nervous
8.
does
and
needs
the intervention
visible.
of
9. All
kind.
Its
them
the
from
The
away
"
the
different
those
to
these
in
powerfully
also
are
we
as
sources,
to
as
But
produced
with
a'
substance,neither
; but
that substance
it
receive
the
impressions
even
from
the
fixed
from
the earth.
made
to
upon
impressionsof
lightis
colors of
colors, so
so
the retina
other
every
but
objects,
as
stars,
to
only
ing
also the shad-
readilydistinguish
another.
retina,which
eyelidsand
18
nature
eye may
is insensible
blending of
one
10.
The
of miles
to
sensibility
appreciatesthe
and
of
internal
other
and
objects.
the
by which
agent, called light,
great distance,
millions
are
form,
movements,
from
of another
objectsbecome
which
color,the
the
require contact
emanation
require any
light from
happiness.
our
of the brain.
alone.
comfort
external
of such
approach
and
to
Impressions similar
impress us.
by
often
the
specialsenses,
impressionsfrom
are
animals,
eye.
may
herbivorous
of the
with
physical propertiesbelonging
for miles
to the
important
our
and
tance;
great dis-
animals
of smell
sense
with
lion
Vision, is confined
or
great degree to
become
we
the
by
Sight,
most
from
other
the
several,
The
the
enemies
sense
one
but little;
compared
man
of
tomed
accus-
where
rooms
animals.
thickets; and
the most
become
may
their prey
scent
track
can
gases,
notice them
to
as
inferior
of the
some
other carnivorous
through
we
congregated.
sense
of smell is very feeblein
it is in
what
; but
ventilated
poorly
in
case
are
breathed
of these odors, so
many
is the
persons
be
unfit to
are
to
as
odors from
againstoffensive
us
warns
149
APPARATUS.
the iris.
is
so
When
sensitive to
the
is protected
by
light,
lightis greatlyin
excess,
150
ANATOMY,
the
eyelidsmay
part
is
PHYSIOLOGY,
partiallyor
all of
or
pupil to
contract
occasion
as
rays
entirelyclosed, thus
moderate, the
more
the
be
iris
when
The
is not
The
size of the
mixed
they
particlesof blue
together,give
with
examined
and
white, give
or
black
the
minute
together;
when
mixed
substances
when
If these
color.
gray
close
yellow powder,
and
more
intensityof
placed
microscope, the
light
fore,
pupil is,there-
the
to
are
of
color;
green
under
fewer
capable of distinguishing
very
objectsindividually,when
thus, fine
of
amount
or
requires.
retina
the
ing
exclud-
HYQlENE.
AND
color
mixtures
of
the
be
different
grains is easilydistinguished.
12.
for
Impressions made
short
stick,lit
the
time after
at
spokes
13.
lens
focus
reach
they
and
causing dimness
the
glassesmore
rays
of
14.
from
eye
We
the
change
If the
wheel
be
ance
appearwith
solid.
the
upon
crystalline
it will
convex,
being
convex
to
be
too
bring the
flat,the
collected
into
of vision.
by
or
concave
focus
the
use
to
This
of
rays
and
rays
will
focus, also
condition
of
spectacleswith
suit the
exactly at
case.
the
The
retina,or
be clear.
see
two
time; therefore,whenever
objectto another,
which
to
depends
lens
confusion
come
not
cannot
same
one
by
less
light must
sightwill
the
at
or
it the
circle,
is remedied
lens
crystalline
in
when
appears
lightto
reach
before
retina
thus, when
give
to
fire ; and
vision
rays of
of vision.
the
of
before
conftision
of
objectremain
any
removed
long enough
distinctness
by
rapidly around
rapidly,it
converging the
object is
ring
around
moves
of the retina.
to
remains
unbroken
an
The
the
end, is moved
one
impression
of
the retina
upon
it is
is efiected
adapted
has
to
given
change
view
rise
must
that
to
sight
take
is directed
place
object; but
much
us
how
discussion.
in the
this
The
usual
change the
thus
edges, and
less
inches
six
from
The
15.
be
may
without
seen
small, near
is
the
from
removed
but
eye,
be closed and
thus
keep
they
front of the
while
and
eye
irritatingsubstances
; and
them
cause
depends
the
upon
with
The
it may
the
sense
of
the
is
These
external
of hearing,like
be
liquid,or
not
is needed
produce
before
any
a
is
sorrow,
then
the
in the
strike
carried
brought
are
sense
It
ear.
phere,
atmosor
against
along
in
the
contact
of sound
is produced.
vention
ofsight,
requiresthe interusuallythe atmosphere ; but
noise ;
hence,
be
or
that
body.
can
joy
vibrations,
and
ear
the
solid
sound
the
the flow of
to
excited
sound.
where
of
confined
they are
labyrinth,and
are
the cheeks.
waves
or
of a
a
tiva,
conjunc-
tears, which
The
eyelidsincrease
roll down
Hearing
auditory nerves,
the
18.
to
dust,
eyelids,which
awake.
tympanic membrane;
of bones
as
the
and
waves
the
to
may
the
the vibrations
the
the
emotions, whether
of sound, enter
chain
does
of
sense
called
waves
it is
parent,
conjunctivamoist and translightfreelypass through it. Any
of
mental
by
are
the
under
to overflow
The
17.
we
keep
so
of these adhere
removed
constantlysecreted by
It
such
all foreignparticles,
any
quickly
are
winking
coiftinually
tears
the eyes.
sight
out
When
sand.
ashes, and
the
objects
16. The
are
increases
of
the organ
which
positionof
the
changing
tance.
dis-
the
itself to
circle within
is the
fieldof vision
in the
as
away,
is
but
imperfectly seen;
perfectlyadapt
can
eye
object
an
of miles
millions
to
even
it is
eye,
objects,
near
When
far away.
the
of
for
convex
of
distances
varying
ever
more
for those
inches
six
within
is made
lens
convex
the
it to
adapt
The
objects.
and
explanation is,that
muscle
151
APPARATUS.
SENSORY
A
a
bell rung
medium
produced.
of
in
vacuum
some
kind
152
ANATOMY,
The
19.
human
which
sound
varietyof
great ; for it
is very
ear
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
be
can
distinguishedby the
detect
can
HYGIENE.
various
and
the
The
sound.
sounds
not
as
so
ticking of
the
however,
ear,
notice
to
; this is often
them
of
accustomed
direction
become
may
degreesin
the
to
with
case
and
the
capable of educatum;
the
wagon,
rattlingof machmery.
The
20.
senses
jivespecial
imich may
of
raised
may
be
and
of
be
trained
so
other
so
sounds
their
judging
does
rather
the
; and
depend
not
fingers;
acquire
can
by
their
upon
the
of teas
judge
to
means
the
musical
observed
not
by
ear
notes
taught
are
perceptiveand
the
upon
nose
articles
many
be
may
learns
soon
their
distinguishvarious
to
as
read
can
feel with
shape, which
; the- tongue
taste
the blind
they
; the eye
color,size,and
vision
that
which
letters,
educated
all
are
the
by ordinary
and
habit
odor.
This
organs
of
wines
of
by
correctly
ever,
education, how-
special sense,
but
discriminatingfaculties
tred
cen-
in the brain.
21.
the
The
surface
than
of Touch
sense
of the
elsewhere.
touch, which
They
have
twenty thousand
the
been
When
two
when
with
provided
are
estimated
on
the
number
to
inch
in the
acute
more
hands
papillaeof
less than
not
palmar
the
surface
The
of
inches
on
needle
may
23.
The
of
impressionsare
an
needles
brings
us
by
one
inch,
the
back
inch
of
into the
which
two
apart,
we
on
an
touch
most
learn
be
must
the
part of
produce
sense
fingers,
ends
of the
nearer
perceived.
as
it is
to the square
one-twentieth
but
; but
all parts of
fingers.
22.
are
body
possessedby nearly
is
as
twice
far
on
as
the
forehead, and
the
body,
in
one
felt,
impression is
far apart
on
timet
lips,
twenty
not
less than
order
the
two
each
that
impression.
is the
intimate
whether
simplestof the
relations
they
are
with
hot
senses;
yet it
external
or
jects,
ob-
cold, hard
154
ANATOMY,
28.
The
from
shin exhales
having, in
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
both
this respect,
and
from
oxygen
function
acid
carbonic
absorbs
HYGIENE.
animal
the
atmosphere,
similar
very
matter
that
to
of the
lungs.
"OOJO^OO-
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
is said of the
1. What
be in
state
2. To
solution
of
what
sensitive
kind
IV.
of taste
sense
Why
tasted
the substance
must
impressions
of
the
are
of
parts
the
most
tongue
does
3. How
the
act
taste
selectingfood
in
guide
as
How
it
may
be perverted ?
4.
What
5.
How
is necessary
does
6. How
is the
9. Where
12.
Do
13.
be
the lens
of
What
16.
How
17.
of
tears
Upon
accustomed
22.
How
different
other
From
objects made
animals
what
other
source
retina
the
eyelids
close
and
together
there
remain
of
vision
the iris ?
affect
tiie retina?
depend
field of
the
How
the
can
distances
is
How
objects ?
vision ?
from
dust
sand
and
What
is said
of
hearing depend
How
do
the
waves
nerves
in the
agent is needed
of hearing ?
sense
To
what
may
the
ear
come
be-
this education
is said
depend
of the
the
the
of
is remarked
parts
of
sense
auditory
the
is said
What
of
distance
the
does
what
What
21.
with
to gases
of sight?
sense
eyeball protected
19.
does
the
distinctness
of
of
third
what
the
the
to the
What
What
sight?
regard
18.
20.
In
reach
sound
of
sense
food
compared
man
protected by
upon
does
is said
is the
in
objects placed
remedied
adapted
15.
the
minute
of
excite
is remarked
What
the
come
retina
what
smell
of smell
sense
choice
impressions
impressions
Upon
dimness
14.
do
in the
of
to
all
are
is the
How
Uow
of
is needed
8. What
11.
sense
impressions
these
10.
aid
is remarked
7. What
may
smell
the
excite
to
body
sense
the
special senses
Upon
of touch
objects
?
of
education
be
to
?
make
distinct
impressions
upon
SENSORY
23.
Of
24.
What
are
25.
What
is remarked
what
is the
use
the
does
of toach
sense
fimctioiis of the
26.
How
27.
What
elevation
28.
What
substances
the
165
APPARATUS.
of
the
skin
perspiration?
the
perspiration regulate
of
temperature
exhaled
are
can
from
borne
the
by
absorbed
or
of
temperature
be
by
body
the
human
the
body
skin
-oo^^Xoo-
Development
startingpoint from
The
is the
changed
modified
or
the
in
of
whole
more
is
composed
of
This
of
one
or
are
This
be
may
less
different
the
liquids
of the
solids
formed
from
organ
every
oped,
develor
the
up
Some
others
more
in the
tissues,which, in turn,
more
cells.
organic
form
make
system.
together; but
being is
cell is
to
as
tissues
singletissue,while
tissues united
or
human
the
shape, so
These
body.
composed
which
Tissues.
of
tissues
and
of
two
body
are
understood
are
posed
com-
by
the
following.
'
of
Tissue
in
cells,floatingf Blood,
liquid.
( Lymph.
Epidermis.
Cuticle
Tissue
in
of
cells,arranged
layers.
of hair.
Nails.
Epithelium.
Pigment.
Enamel.
The
Primitive
Organic
Cell
of
Tissue
in
is
Adipose
cells,collected
Every
gan
or-
in
the
tissue.
masses.
Gray
formed
tissue.
nerve
from
developed
into
tissues.
Nerve
Tissue
form
cells, in
of
fibres.
Muscular
the
fibres.
Capillaries.
of tubes.
Lymphatics.
Dentme.
Tissue
form
Tissue
bedded
of
cells, in
the
of filaments.
of
in
cells^ ima
solid.
f Fibrous
( Elastic
f
tissue,
tissue.
Cartilage,
( Bone.
is
body
Marrow.
or
one
more
these
tissues.
of
166
ANATOMY,
Grouping
The
following exhibits
which
organs
or
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
}"Osseous
Muscles.
j-Muscular
the
Organs.
natural
the human
compose
Bones.
of
System,
grouping
MuZf"
e m
e m
of
the parts
body.
Motor
Serous
HYGIENE.
Apparatus.
System.
System,
Membranoua
branes.
Salivary glands/
Gastric glands.
Pancreas.
Glandular
System.
Liver.
Spleen.
2P
Ki
idneys.
Mouth.
Palate.
Tonsils.
Tongue.
Digestive System.
Teeth.
Nutritive
Pharynx.
Apparatus.
(Esophagus.
Stomach.
Intestines.
MAN.
Heart.
Arteries.
Circulatory System.
Capillaries.
Veins.
Lymphatic
ves-l
Lymphatic
glands.
Lymphatic
System,
Larynx.
Trachea.
"
Respiratory System.
Lungs.
Cerebro-spinal
nerves.
Nervous
Sympathetic
System.
nerves.
Sensory ApparatoA.
Tongue.
Nose.
Eye.
Ear.
Skin.
Organs
sense.
of
Special
SENSORY
QUESTIONS.
GENERAL
1. What
2.
From
3.
Into
4.
Which
liquid
5.
is the
what
all tissues
classes
two
substances
formation
in the
startingpoint
are
what
157
APPARATUS.
formed
the
are
in the
divided
tissues
body
of
composed
are
cells
cells in
7. Which
of
cells in the
form
of
tubes
Which
of
cells in the
form
of
filaments
of
cells in
Which
floatingin
is the
blood
11.
What
is the
lymph
12.
What
is the
epidermis ?
13.
What
15.
is
epithelium
16.
What
is
pigment?
17.
What
is enamel
18.
What
is
19.
What
What
is cartilage?
the
does
Where
tissue?
adipose
What
are
nerve-fibres
are
muscular
22.
What
are
the
23.
What
are
the lymphatics ?
24.
What
is fibrous
25.
What
is elastic
26.
From
what
27.
What
are
What
Where
uses?
tissue ?
Of
what
use
use
they ?
are
is it ?
use
what
is it ?
use
formed?
Where
of
is their
what
Of
organ
bones
the
use
What
Of
tissue ?
the bones?
are
use
capillaries?
lower
body?
fibres ?
is every
the
is its
is its
in the
occur
use
What
What
the
it
is its
What
20.
Of
use
21.
Name
is its
cuticle ?
is the
What
limbs.
nails placed ?
Where
What
are
is its function
What
is its function
What
14.
the
are
head.
situated
they
Of
What
trunk.
the
Of
their
are
the
upper
limbs.
muscles?
Where
flexor
the
are
situated?
they
are
muscles
situated?
What
The
are
extensor
muscles?
29.
are
What
they
30.
Where
solid substance
What
their
cells
masses
10.
28.
of
arranged in layers ?
of
uses?
composed
are
6. Which
9.
livingbeing?
Which
8.
of
the
are
found
What
are
membranes
serous
are
they
the
found
membranes?
mucous
salivary glands
Where
are
the
gastric glands
Where
is the
32.
33.
34.
Where
is the
35.
Where
is the
14
function
What
is
their
Where
function?
are
Where
is their
the
31.
What
What
pancreas?
What
liver ?
spleen
What
What
What
is their
is their
is its function
is its function
is its function
function
?
?
?
function
?
?
158
ANATOMY,
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
36.
Where
is the
mouth
What
is its function
37.
Where
is the
palate
What
is its function
38.
Where
are
39.
Where
is the
40.
Where
are
41.
Where
is the
pharynx
42.
Where
is the
oesophagus
43.
Where
is the
stomach
What
44.
Where
are
the
45.
Where
are
the
46.
Where
is the
47.
Where
are
the
arteries
48.
Where
are
the
veins
49.
Where
is the
larynx
50.
Where
is the
trachea?
the
tonsils
What
tongue
What
are
teeth
What
is their
the
small
cerebro-spinal
53.
Where
are
the
sympathetic
55.
is the
66.
Where
is the
ear
57.
Where
is the
skin
58.
Of
eye
is the
membranous
The
The
system?
circulatory
The
a^re
are
What
is their
its functions
function?
function
functions?
its
its functions
The
gUndular
The
system?
system?
nervous
is their
What
composed?
The
its functions?
system
osseous
function?
nerves?
are
What
muscular
?
system
lymphatic
Which
system?
The
digestive
The
system?
are
the
organs
spiratory
re-
of
sense?
special
Of
?
60.
system
system?
59.
function
is their
are
What
function
its functions
nerves
What
is their
is its function
What
What
nose?
function?
are
are
is the
is their
62.
Where
What
is their
the
function?
What
are
is their
What
Where
Where
function
What
Where
function?
is its function
51.
54.
What
f
?
is its function
What
lungs?
function
is its
What
?
function
is its
intestines
its functions
What
intestines
large
heart
What
the
what
is their
HYGIENE.
Of
what
The
what
is the
sensory
is Man
motor
apparatus
apparatus
composed?
composed
The
nutritiYe
ratus
appa-
Hygiene.
v."
CHAPTER
I.
Section
Remarks.
General
produced by
doubt
In very
Hygiene.
or
sickness which
ofthe
1. Mv4ih
hence,
understood;
and
in the
and
are
2.
which
upon
3
in
the
The
human
becomes
and
in
is
daily occurrence,
of
of which
is to
might
be avoided
which
laws
inquire into
both
moral
for
and
present the
to
aid
in the
the
influence
physical,have
best
preserving its
composed
function.
deranged, the
digestionis
and
more
more
or
of various
When
the
for
means
functions
in
or
less upon
Moral
differing
organs
function
effect is not
of
confined
corresponding degree.
act
or
body
and
thus, when
system
clothing,in exercise,
in
natural
imperfectly
are
existence.
own
our
laws
of health,
laws
of health.
organ
organ
the
surrounding agents,
the human
body, and
structure
one
diet,
dwellings,are
of
objectof Hygiene
ITie
developing
state
in
errors
by carefullyobserving
preservationof
these
cases
many
by diseases,many
followed
out
family is with-
human
ventilation
the
afflicts
organs
and
the whole
receives
of the
to that
system
less
body
any
ishment,
nour-
suffer
in
fore,
physical agents, therebeing, either directly
indirectly.
169
160
the
in
Physiology
and
the
previous chapters,so
that
of each
organ
and
of the structure
the function
of
dependence
one
organ
understood.
When
have
acquainted
become
and
The
5.
human
body,
and
have
the
the
up
be
the
study
faHj
different
of
their
Hygime^
ence.
exist-
own
influence
most
body,
chapters, and
of
functions
the
in
these
preservationof
upon
the
mental
clothing,food, sleep,and
air, water,
are
the
take
to
the
to
which
agents
with
ready
its laws
apply
to
studied
and
knowledge
another, may
upon
pupils have
will be
they
organs,
HYGIENE.
subject of Anatomy
whole
presented the
have
We
4.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
physical exercise.
"o"04cx"
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
is said
1. What
2.
What
3.
What
4.
Why
is said
has
What
dependence
whole
subject
pupils
may
agents
have
the
human
in the
of the
the
When
sickneHs
object of Hygiene
is the
?
5.
of the
I.
of
of
one
organ
the
intiuence
study
the
on
another
upon
and
Anatomy
commence
most
family?
Physiology
of
been
sented
pre-
Hygiene?
human
body
-OO^^KOO-
II.
Section
Air.
The
1.
air ia
carbonic
acid
preserve
the
the
amount
We
have
of fresh
feet
gas,
health
already seen
air
; and
will suffer.
gases
supply
a
of
want
nitrogen^and
; oxygen,
of oxygen
is
or
oxygen,
an
necessary
increase
to
in
minute, and
every
hour
due
; but
of carbonic
every
health
composed of tJiree
person
needs
four hundred
this amount
must
eight cubic
and
be
feet
eighty cubic
supplied,or
the
162
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
first tested
will
by
and
When
life.
support
is fit for
lighted candle
; and
unhealthy
it
contain
to
bums
it bums
when
HYGIENE.
found
and
the candle
when
breathing ;
AND
brightly,the
dimly,
the
air is
burn, the
to
ceases
air tbat
air
impure
support life.
add
Carbonic
8.
expirationfrom
every
Pure
air must
done
by
lungs
be
it is
given
rendered
in all the
the
body;
off
to
and
this
When
badly
ventilated
phere,
atmos-
breathing.
only
can
be
buildingsoccupied by
rooms
hurried
more
headache,
causes
and
and
the weak
10.
still
When
of the
the
in
to
teachers
juries in
poorly
the
to
they
exhalations
Much
typhoid, and
12.
thus
is in
who
the
gas
attention
13.
as
to
for
increased
are
of
of
ache,
the head-
restlessness,
in
long
both
air.
odor.
small-pox.
in
by sickness^
fever, such
demanded,
gases
to
This
is
typhus,
as
Fresh
for the
will prevent
have
air in
sick, and
its
An
them.
example
its deleterious
to
us
to
make
effects.
vitiaied
of this
It is very
disagreeable
enables
and
exposure
odor, and
offensive
an
illuminating cities.
fatal; but
its presence,
Continued
extent, it
of pure
unpleasant
very
is directed
used
oft;en
body
fever, and
an
remain
the want
to
forms
of the poisonous
attention
our
low
of
in attendance.
are
Many
and
means
scarlet
is imperatively
cases
for thoee
in
case
the
and
all who
by
due
from
emit
sometimes
especiallythe
these
places,is
sensation
the
and
great
so
languor.
pupils in
court-room,
ventilated
The
11.
and
noticed
faint*
giddiness,dulness, sleepiness,
yawning,
by
vitiated
be
for
circulation,the
and
intellect,
oft-times
air is not
air may
increased
occupied
are
in the
acid
breathing,the
dulness
the
fulness,which
and
at
beings.
9.
felt
and
the
unfit for
constantlysupplied ;
free ventilation
human
the
is,therefore,soon
which
in
eonsUmtlyformed
odor
use
rious,
inju-
attracts
of such
"
163
HYGIENE.
disturb and
bring
depress the
disease
some
on
The
grave.
all become
their
14.
Uie
conbinued
consumption.
This
of
means
supply
well
Animals
air and
this way,
behold
we
the
in
the death
while
oxygen
death
of
16.
is
no
and
good, all
the
until
other
means
but
of the
where
everyoxygen.
in the air is
How
the
kept
clearly
animal
and
Carbonic
amd
of the
other!
be
to
of the climate.
giving off
life of
animals, but
Persons
the
ftmctions
air.
human
plants;
the
causes
that
is
more
or
be
attention
may
warm,
vitiated,have
and
the
be
human
given
beings.
rooms,
respiratoryand
depressed,and, therefore,feel
Habit
is pure
impressed
imventilated
their
vitiated
restoring the
feet cannot
places occupied by
to
preserving
This
productiveof
family,than
exchanged
for
accustomed
atmosphere
more
physical,
or
little.
of all
for fresh
food, and
plants are
gases
sustains
best
unlimited
an
another.
to
The
the oxygen
it ; but
each
the
this is
the ventilation
other
ill ventilated
have
dependence
agent, moral
all,so
where
in
is to
these
life of
but also
disease.
acid, and
animals, but
stronglyupon
17.
tem,
sys-
man,
latter
nutritious
to
upon
sufferingto
to
this the
sustains
and
atmosphere;
and
of
cles,
mus-
plants.
There
sickness
acid
generation
vegetable kingdom
causes
the
depressesthe
the vicissitudes
the carbonic
one
of
want
properly to
cease
confined
when
plenty of
eat
proportion of
from
unchanged
may
the
from
only with
not
die of the
off carbonic
giving
digestion,
nerves,
air
everywhere consuming
are
consuming
too
is the case,
often
air,to
the
be the result.
must
preventing consumption
of pure
untimely
an
protectedby clothingfrom
16.
In
disease
animals, which
places,very
body,
hreaihingofimpure
many
the inferior
brain, the
the
functions, and
to
with
to
suffers
system
part of the
every
giving rise
and
the
them
through
indeed
perform
when
deranged
and
ite victim
hurry
later
or
sooner
the circulation,and
respiration,
air ; and
pure
to
will
and
vital powers,
the
depressinginfluence
less need
of the foul
164
ANATOMY,
by
or
of
sense
in the
they
overtaken
do
recognize,either by
not
are
practiceof breathing
by
effect of the
serious
some
the
apt
are
vitiated
to
air until
disease.
There
!7^d/eepin^aj9arfm"nfodA(mZ(26et(;e/?t;en"t^a^.
is but
little
to
In
air.
and
they
HYGIENE.
increasing infirmity,the
they
continue
18.
that
so
senses,
impurities which
are
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
having
his
room,
well
vigor and
the
restored
of
danger
the
by
cold
taking
when
is
person
tomed
accus-
strength of
the whole
The
night'srest.
dry
refreshing,
more
is
system
mouth
fresh
fiilly
more
and
throat, the
often be
prevented by sleepingwith
window.
19.
The
bed
When
heaters
should
always
be pure,
opposite
to
and
other
the
is introduced
the
where
be
air
warm
the
near
an
the
open
enters
one
by
room
side of
the
on
air, which
warm
into the
flues
two
or
byproperlyc(mstnicted
are
used, and
are
should
pipe, there
door
open
for ventilation
means
flues.
of
an
the
remove
the
for heating a
room,
there
as
room
the
near
to
ceiling,so
means
floor,
impure
air.
When
20.
be
some
fresh
The
of the
21.
in
; thus
As
to
the
found
impure
air of
flues.
draughts of
be
circulation
placed.
opposite
in the air
there
is
boarded
as
health
for
kept
it does
Too
open,
in
not
and
the
ing-room
sleepcreate
often, however,
of appearance
could
next
removing
particularlyvaluable
fire ; because
no
up
be
means
to
always
When
It is
firepUuiecomes
open
always
excellent
room.
air
fireplaceis
It should
most
where
22.
air should
constant
of ventilation,the
means
be
the
insuring a
impure
is
stove
apartment.
value
will
of the
escape
the
where
room
should
the
near
part of the
is used
provided
means
the
to
stove
be
; but
comprehended,
be left open.
romn
has
neither
flues nor
recourse
fireplace,
165
HYGIENE.
be had
mvst
be
opened
to the doors
that
so
The
inmates.
admission
by
room
introduction
The
23.
become
"om
then
and
lungs
the
of the
24.
The
air
ads
bums,
is slower;
more
above
these
range
be mmnfmned
between
the
air of the
the
men
The
of the
burning
phere
atmos-
of
of
from
summer.
in
all be
moist.
the
influenceupon
the
and
the
body
and
This
them.
cityof Quito,
air
ration
respicustomed
ac-
experience but
to
as
the
become
may
ration
respi-
the
mountains,
density,so
ration.
respi-
comes
earth, the air be-
oxygen,
human
from
Wounds,
is the
which
is
case
9,540 feet
sea.
within
frequentlypass
country, varies
much
less oxygen,
of
the
from
one
air,
100** to
which
is
human
in
120"
yet, both
place to
many
between
lifecan
wide
equatorialclimes
and
ratus,
appa-
ascend
of temperature
of
It is
more
contains
changes
is very
temperature
winter
heating
poisons,should
an
we
inconvenience
any,
The
when
hurried.
more
26.
should,
kept covered.
mines
contains
and
the inhabitants
with
and
but
rare,
to
if
little,
into
dense, and
is
feverish
the heated
to
descend
we
more
becomes
be
the air.
keeping
densityof
As
and
dry
moisture
inflamedmxrjaeesby evaporating
do
dressings,
other
thus
The
all
upon
exclude
to
as
air,and
25.
off moisture
give
it is apt to
the
other
or
occupied
un-
the direct
containingwater
stove,
or
ture
supply of mois-
of
much
and
scalds, erysipelas,
ointments, and
the
vessel
covered, so
the
hall
artificial means,
too
the
upon
room.
their moisture
sores,
due
never
window.
skin, producing
contain
by
blow
through
through
absorbs
of the system.
so
air
it is heated
air will
air
should
these
breathe should
and
dry,
condition
of
means
we
when
the
of fresh
of the external
air
but
of cold
draught
but
vdndows;
or
difference
and
are
the cold
inhabited,
the other.
parts of
our
the extremes
Even
own
of
166
ANATOMY,
The
27.
In
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
HYGIENE.
climates
warm
membrane
tendencyis
the stomach
of
to
and
of disease.
inflammations of
the
intestines,giving rise
acts
languor
the
upon
and
listlessness,
and
physical and
In
28.
tory
mental
such
the
air
it is
times
always
of the
avoid
respmh
Sometimes
the
of
in
most
oped
fully develdecline
; and
disease.
by
the
dry
so
quickly
to
but
at
evaporation
perspiration.
is
amount
as
body;
moisture, that
but
the
on
it is
it acts
is not
moisture, but
contains
is bathed
always depressing;
are
and
is enfeebled
system
with
the skin
and
ceases,
vigor
powers
exhalations
loaded
so
whose
old, whose
all the
to diseases
depressing agent,
young,
continuallychanging.
evaporate
brain, producing
general dispositionto
tendencyis
invalid, whose
The
29.
is
the
the
; upon
Heat
as
injuriouslyupon
upon
the
Cold
consumption.
the
to
labor.
cool dimaies
organs,
of
centres
nerve
cous
mu-
Moist
other
almost
air is
pure,
the system.
80.
Sudden
be endured
and
the
changes
the robust
by
dryness
much
so
of the
changes, before
Regulating
and
31.
than
for
means
from
with
benumbed
cold room,
and
while
heat to cold
by
suitable
sudden
of fire,
means
clothing,are
depressed,the
with
temperature
endured
any
not
will almost
rubbed
be
can
When
cold, it should
the
by
the
itself to them.
houses
our
bodies
cold to heat.
fire,or inflammation
system is much
of
or
protection.
Changes from
those
it is the
accommodate
can
our
the young
disease, as
temperature
of
the
or
causes
the system
the temperature
best
our
air, that
but
injury ;
the
the heat
the
much
without
It is not
the condition
in
be
part of the
towels
should
so
of the
better
as
room
to
be
the
If the whole
taken
excite
is
is
body
exposed directlyto
surelyfollow.
person
much
into
lation,
the circu-
gradually
in-
167
HYGIENE.
creased
; but
in cold
water,
if
is restored.
A
32.
only
and
part is benumbed,
should
This
be
is the
at
two
or
the
will
seaside, on
produce
appetite, and
of
the
upon
33.
and
seems
parents
should
the
during
exercise
Ufe, and,
be
held
for
expirations
lungs
more
and
without
air, as
open
breathing is
than
half
be
that
aif of
fresh
of
the
city ;
country,
they
may
enjoy
tend
the
and
at
least
such
free
health
their
improve
to
acts
results.
the
the
for
necessary
breathing.
into
of
the
be
taken,
from
This
to
water
are
if five
so
to
as
or
cannot
six.
one
to
save
able
two
others
then
minutes
may
useful
when
becomes
or
poisonous
from
gases,
drowning.
by long practice to
three
or
four
deep
the
empty
smoke,
respiration for
breath
the
fact
filled with
support of human
the
; but
minute
taken,
pearl-divers of Ceylon
time.
which
into
possible of
as
The
will
inspirations
in
process
The
ordinary circumstances,
and
the
where
ety,
soci-
strength.
children
of
generally healthier
are
than
house,
farm-
augmented
change
good
large cities.
season,
inspiration
elapse
their
completely
as
full
send
their
under
country
week
quiet
surroundings,
invigorating
summer
Constant
in
the
at
or
the
bene-
Even
feelings,an
producing
the
sensibility
often proves
It is the
other
in
those
more
develop
the
reared
in the
34.
of
than
stronger
mountains,
of the
placed
preweuting frost-bite,
weather.
warm
be
until
country
weight.
system,
nervous
country
and
and
Children
the
increased
an
scenery,
the
to
buoyancy
for
means
town
rubbed
gently
best
it should
minutes
pend
sus-
at
168
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
HYGIENE.
AND
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
what
1. Of
by
2. What
places
6. What
effect do
the
can
8. What
becomes
9. What
are
is said
air
of the
12. What
of the
odor
diseases
14. What
unchanged
16. What
human
17.
Why
18.
What
19. What
of
keeps
agent
probably produces
family
do
is said
of
heaters
used
are
best
should
What
air ?
are
and
oxygen
carbonic
acid
in the air
air act
25. How
does
the
sickness
most
for the
and
air while
sufferingto
How
breathing
it?
flues when
fire-placeas
windows
can
stove
ventilator
ventilators
as
moisture?
inflamed
on
of the
be
room
ven*
is used ?
How
moisture
may
be supplied
range
rarity of
of
temperature
within
respiration?
which
human
life
27.
What
diseases
are
28.
What
diseases
by
29.
What
is said
of
human
is the
does
the
density and
is said
maintained
are
the
room
does
34. What
atmosphere?
air contain
the
air in
24. How
Why
vitiated
ventilation
arrangement
doors
the
for
means
and
33.
by
ventilating sleeping-rooms
best
the
are
of
32. How
not
we
22. What
31. What
in sickness
body
of
30. How
is remarked
be
lungs?
proportion of
is the
26. What
in the
the
gases
affected
consumption
21. What
to the
the air ?
tested ?
be
formed
from
poisonous
20. What
Why
more
upon
places
acid
the
tilated when
23.
they
are
are
of
preventives
What
have
room
other
exhalations
vital powers
the
matter
does
are
Why
effects from
the
and
carbonic
the
of
11. What
13. How
hastened?
matter
residence
as
lights in
the
air in wells
10. What
the
air is needed
vegetable
all refuse
with
done
be
should
Id.
fresh
5. What
7. How
acid
and
unhealthy
are
night
at
carbonic
of
sources
decay of animal
is the
4. What
can
the
are
3. How
the best
much
How
person
unhealthy
composed
air
is the
gases
II.
should
best
produced by
cold
dry
and
is remarked
of moist
treatment
air?
of
spend
sudden
for persons
of air from
children
climates?
beings affected by
change
climates
warm
'town
the
suspending
summer
the
changes
benumbed
to
in the weather?
with
country
prove
in the
country
process
of
cold?
beneficial?
?
breathing?
170
ANATOMY,
many
substances
these
water, and
is
7. Ihire water
and
purposes,
good water,
and
be
the
in
lottingthe
water
with
gravel,or
more
during
of ice renders
The
of
use
water,
This
from
water
in
dug
the lakes
shotild
and
readily be
done
by
sand
or
may
charcoal.
Rain
should
purposes,
or
be
The
weather.
warm
palatable,and
cooking,is
doubt
any
the
poison
should
is not
snow
filtered
addition
injurious,
essential to
as
exists
be
body
blood
is
becomes
lower
the
the
of
influence
of
the
instead
pure
Im-
standard
increased
sometimes
poisonous
heaMi
into
matter
subject to
the
the character
to
as
good
carefullyfiltered.
and
more
impuritiesare
wells
vicinity.
These
as
obtain
usually
organic matter,
it
have
to
waJter
is called
quantities.
Whenever
system, may
disease.
taken
the
less
the
drinking-water,it
of the
in their
more
in moderate
air.
pure
water
to
are
drinking
of drinking and
purposes
as
the
Owing
water
springs and
coarselypowdered
way,
9.
the
through
pass
in
used
the
used.
for
when
country
or
kept
same
in
lakes
water, when
the
be
months
fUteredbeforebeing
lime.
should
cities
summer
rivers contains
of
common
times, from
or
most
sulphate of
essential
people
The
substances, the
means
all
HYGIENE.
less unwholesome.
or
the rivers
During
8.
more
every
at
from
water
mineral
is very
; but
earth
the
the
possible. People
as
pure
it dissolves.
and
of these
the presence
hard
which
the carbonate
are
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
of
in amount,
healthful
drink.
10.
It is
Waier
is very
that
the
should
of grease
and
important
through
freelyescape
skin
clean
and
ablutions
the
skin
useful as
in
skin
the open
soap
healthy
many
and
state
be
that
dirt, so
soft,shuts
with
means
pores
kept
the
; for
free from
perspirationmay
"
who
he
keeps
; and
are
when
mulations
accu-
necessary
these
are
to
the
quent
Fre-
preserve
neglected,
171
HYGIENE.
painfiildiseases
of the
apt
are
follow.
to
The
11.
ofbathing; and
course
of
means
When
body, it should
12.
be taken
of- the
serious
kinds.
sometimes
13.
sideration
for
but
reaction
the
body
should
The
in
the
greater
should
be rubbed
Unless
the
best
evening, before
beneficial
the
yet any
time
meal, while
immediately
after
digestiveorgans,
15.
The
determined
kind
half
by
hour
agreeable
hour
; but
bath
this is not
until
the
case,
glow"
"
by reaction,the
to
and
our
hours
before
A
retiringto sleep.
when
taken
answer
dinner;
bath
will
in
the
fore part of
except
the
hours
tl;iree
for remaining
circumstances.
which
will
when
will
three
fast;
rrwrningbeforebreak-
taken
digestionis taking place. When
is apt to derange the
eating,the shock
length of
of reaction
an
The
entering a
towels
in the
to
one
be most
the amount
the system.
is followed
timsfor bathing is
probably
after
it
carefulcon-
our
upon
coarse
shock
most
demands
When
with
the
of the
hours.
less shock
follow.
soon
often
to
its accumulation
injuriouswhen
prove
or
forenoon, from
day
few
is in
body
prevents the
and
body,
requirements of
in the
in
the
the
while
be beneficial.
cannot
14.
death
to
will be sufficient.
inflammations,
bathing will
suited
produced.
bath
from
heat
invalid.
it is simply
of the water
contact
receives
body
entered
be
the
when
week
important
strengthening the
; but
So
is not
of heat
baths
never
internal
produces
The
of
judicious
an
of
powers
day
every
two
or
animal
rise to
gives
or
once
of perspiration. The
escape
feeble
baih shcmld
The
state
is
is used
cleanse
to
promoted by
it,consequently,becomes
strengthening the
the bath
be
may
not
Much
follows.
be
too
When
long
it may
feelings,
the reaction
is
will
even
in
bath
depend
this
is
time, and
be
feeble,ten
the
upon
vigorous, a
when
prolonged
or
be
must
very
for
an
fifteen minutes
172
five
ten
minutes
The
or
16.
strong, than
a
cold
The
place.
depend
the
upon
the
be used
when
the
system
promptly
soon
alter
will prove
The
tepidbath
reaction
and
shock
from
who
its
bath
must,
therefore,
bath
bath
It is the bath
It calms
hence, when
overwork,
at
or
from
excitement, and
the young,
the
it is
body
the
its
other
an
tinued
con-
to
for
regularlycontinued,
be used
unless
The
the
it will
by
bath,
warm
calm
to
It may
be used
advanced
help
hot bath is
advised
of the
journey, from
suited
those
lations
accumu-
disposesto sleep;
refreshingsleep.
invigoratethe system.
depressed.
are
constitution,the
by
90"
languid
the surface
from
90", is well
middle-aged, and
those
invigorate
to
with
and
excited
enfeebled
by
day by day,
removing
from
in
less
temperature from
of life
excitement,
and
used
tend
persons
powers
long
receives
system
in
range
used
to
It is less
preferred.
nervous
substances
of about
induce
is too
regularly employed
the
when
never
the
grateful
and
should
that
depressing,that is,when
in
is tired, and
temperature
is
nervous
one
is felt
is to be
commonly
most
of dirt and
body.
is too
should
in whom
circulation, and
in
warm
This
96".
assured
rest
may
range
if
to
we
Unless
of warmth
glow
should
fatigue.
should, therefore, be
and
The
and
tepid bath
followed
18.
system, and
sufferingfrom
is
of warmth
and
by
in the
vigor
bath
; and
delicate
are
already in
is
system
effect of
of the
reacts,
; it
use
the
direct
will fail
and
effects,
its
depressing in
The
and
robust
reaction
body
cold
the
returning, then
the
to
to
that
should
glow
50"
injurious.
use
the
cold,
depressed so
When
90".
weak.
when
of
amount
is
water
temperature from
adapted
and
coldness
not
17.
be
state, it may
take
better
is
depress,and
is to
in
range
the delicate
to
bath
feeble
to
It
the
long enough.
will be
Fahrenheit,
75"
When
of time.
should
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
to
the
by
in life ;
strengthen
stimulating,and
physician.
173
HYGIENE.
19.
Sea-bathingseems
in
fresh water
to
the cheerful
; but
this
is
in
due
probably
of
the
system, and
sea-side resorts.
a
in salt water
from
than
salt bath
is less liable
person
great
any
our
invigoratingthan bathing
more
the
company,
scenes
bath
to be
into
the
the
is less
rating
exhilaat
ocean
depressing to
take
to
measure
cold
from
in fresh water.
one
^x""i"
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
is said
1. What
2. How
long
should
lived
persons
Why
4.
What
is said
5.
What
is remarked
of
6.
What
is the
of hard
is pure
8. What
summer
What
cause
and
body?
water
in nature
soft water
rain, or
water
obtained
water
sick
of water
purity
food
without
in the
in the
the
country
and
in cities ?
and
the
rain
be
done
with
be
done
with
all
impure
regard
to
keeping
river
in
water
the
How
water?
does
it affect
What
is remarked
11. What
taken
of the
should
system
10.
of water
use
be given to the
water
should
season
9.
be
have
and
amount
3.
7. How
the
of the
III.
good
in
results
bathing?
from
come
the
skin
How
clean
often
?
should
baths
bath
in
when
12.
Why
13.
What
14.
What
of
15.
What
of the
16.
What
is remarked
17.
What
of the
use
of the
tepid
18.
What
of the
use
of the
warm
19.
What
is said
16
not
enter
of the
is remarked
"
the best
time
length
of
state
temperature
bathing
for
of time
of the
for
sea-bathing?
of the water
remaining
bath
bath
perspiration?
used
cold
of the
use
of
?
?
in the
bath
bath?
for
bathing ?
174
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
HYGIENE.
IV.
Section
Clothing.
1. All
that
heat, 80
toUhaut
bodies
they
kept
are
and
give
within
heat
The
2.
the air
The
in which
vxjter
off from
to
heat
but
this
of their
is
man
bodies
is
compelled
heat
from
resort
natural
animal
the
escapingtoo rapidly;
clothing of
to
of
water.
or
with
provided
that
continually
air
surrounding
are
prevented
to
is
of feathers, by which
is
power
is usuallyhigher than
animals
among
effects of the
strongly marked.
more
the
also
of generating
means
plants, this
bodies
their
orders
lower
In
air.
animals, it is
in
the
as
animals
and
resistingthe
temperature of animals
or
given
they have
external
gaining
temperature
same
themselves, thus
feeble ; but
very
; but
off heat
of the
temperature
the
at
Living plants
surrounding atmosphere.
receive
constantlylosing or
lifeare
kind
some
for
purpose.
3.
The
while
from
the
of the
that
120".
blood
to
the cold
During
by clothingso
When
of the
temperature
body
perishes from
the
reduced
to any
point between
more
less
or
below
kept
at
body
is reduced
depressing
to
and
be
must
100*';
varies
range
of
well
tected
pro-
temperature.
effects of the
98"
tx"
country
uniform
98"
making
zero,
the
from
in this
climate
weather
to be
as
of the
the heat
20"
is
body
cold ; and
when
injury,corresponding with
the
reduction
of the
temperature.
4.
elevated
water,
body
often
is
and
the hat.
cause,
any
to
or
frequently to
to
wear
perishes.
In
becomes
110"
the
individual
110", the
to
the
raised
from
When,
wet
its
overheated, and
The
112".
bathe
the
sponge
best
head
or
cases
of
temperature
preventive of
ai^d face
towel
in
the
is
stroke
sun-
is
stroke
sun-
with
cold
crown
of
175
HYGIENE.
less in
effects
of cold,is
than
the middle
it is in
necessityfor
of
means
the
sick, whose
should
standard,
of
the winter
the
at
the
consequently,more
covering
when
system
awake.
The
sunrise
effects of
the
by
body
cold.
severe
necessitywhich
We
they
as
wear
is the chief
the
to two
one
circulation
in
reduced
activity;
during sleep,than
depressedduring
midnight
and
in resisting
the
difficulty
all made
for
find
we
well
of the
for it is between
are
the
feeble, and
to be most
night ;
the
as
body from
is necessary
the
time
seems
below
of life.
those
same
old, by
cold, and
the
enemy
of
the
feeble and
Cold
young,
functions,even
are
respiration,
fire
season.
great
greater
The
the
the
near
the
depressed
bear
the temperature
the
and
young
are
well
the
it is to them
Sleep lowers
degrees; and all
life
cannot
themselves
6.
and
of
mortality among
and
aged ;
the
of artificial warmth.
clothingduring
cause
powers
shelter
warm
the ing
ofresisting
depressin the aged,
children and
young
protectionof
the
clothingand
healthful
and
of generating heed
5. The power
of this fact
aware
covering towards
more
morning.
7. Exercise
body, but
much
and
is
exercised,than
heat
which
evaporates, and
it ; thus
when
skin
radiation
of
it is in
to be
perspiration on
state
covered
heat
its
the vicissitudes
no
other
colds, as
the
by
of
way
a
climate
so
can
the
body
rather
prevention,
amount
than
of repose.
with
of the
the
This
perspiration,
body
off with
temperature.
proper
degrees.
heat is generated,when
which, therefore,requiresconstant
clothing,
In
in the
be raised many
feet,may
8. The
the
the
causes
the
of animal
largeramount
extra
of
feelingof warmth
it
face,the hands,
body
the
only increases
its temperature.
The
raises
actually
deeper parts
two
or
body become
only one
degrees warmer
; but
of the
the
not
varied
the
to
changeful as
suit
this.
guarded against
clothing; the object being
be
of
and
attention
cure
so
well
of disease.
176
ANATOMY,
9. The
heed
jyrincipdlobjectof clothingis
and
cold; therefore,
wearing
During
apparel
of the
body
best
be
permit
of
the exhalations
to
Furs
and
the
in that
suited
way
to
the heat
surface
12.
goods
Woollen
chills.
body,
are
poor
the best
of
linen,
and
of both
in
flannel,
be
next
worn
weather
warmest
only
be
of cotton.
is,that
moisture
for
the
it
moisture;
particles,
they
heat
of the
being warm
as
of the
escape
cold
and,
the
to
cold ; and
as
are
body.
; but
their
heat
from
body.
they
They
fiimish
climate.
13.
Woollen
absorbs
clothing,because
the
bodies
protectingour
for
means
skin,
changes.
and
heat
the
to
covering
for
of
the
pheric
atmos-
is,therefore,a poor
their
of the
the entrance
conductors
next
absorb
of
It is well
few
but
warmer
to
spoken
preventing
our
made
much
retain
frequent in
should
or
Cotton
air among
often
are
consists in
the
the
cotton.
or
of cotton
worn
suited
slow
are
considerable
goods
warmth
be
not
It is better
conductors, and
should
to
skin.
kind
are
protectionagainst sudden
more
Woollen
so
the
rapidly.
very
there
is, therefore,
linen.
they contain
poor
time
same
quickly, and
too
the
away
yet it should
the
body'than
from
climate, where
warm
it cools
affords
kind
warmest
the
fabrics,made
moisture
conveys
changes
less
the
at
that
cold, moist
of such
freelyfrom
furnish
while
imbibes
Linen
11.
off
in
materials
body
and
purpose.
light,so
; but
heavier, and
body,
pass
be
for
cooler.
much
as
made
woollen
clothing for
are
the
Clothing is
10.
the
heat
retain
to
as
this
accomplish
readily escape
may
fabrics
such
clothing should
the
weather,
warm
the heat
will
as
to
select
must
we
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
the
the
to
of
summer
exchanged
The
it prevents
shape
skin,
of waistcoat
at
; and
during
even
for similar
surfiice
drawers,
advantage derived
the
and
of
articles
from
of the
clothing,
nel
wearing flan-
body
from
being
178
ANATOMY,
When
garters
are
of blood
flow
The
used.
and
of
weight
should
comfort
flannel
made
of the
skin
not
and
giving
be
as
important
as
light as
too
prevent
rise to
be
often
the materials
as
is consistent
Two
wearer.
and
with
three
or
than
warmer
singlegarment,
elastic,and
heart, often
of the
will
into
be
HYGIENE.
of the veins.
garments
the warmth
the
of dressingis
manner
All
should
the veins
toward
painful enlargement
19.
they
worn,
will compress
tight,or they
the
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
nesses
thick-
double
that
should, therefore,be
preferred.
20.
TighUfiUinggarments
not
are
warm
so
those
as
thus
check
the
apt
are
21.
of heat
blood
head, and
from
the
are
few
It
the
cramps
The
of
action
the
multitude
as
allow
to
neither
23.
most
the
lungs
too
All
full
the
respirationnor
When
the chest is
serious
character.
lungs is necessary
is
cavity
of diseases.
for
the
for the
the
of the
small
is
of
venous
neck-ties,now
the
in
old-fashioned
productive of much
and
chest, and
be
the circulation
compressed,it
generates
of
thiB
will be
free
and
the
of air
amount
system,
diseases
; and
so
that
that
so
impeded.
expansion
health
looselyworn
so
induces
the
vessels,
large blood-
full
chief.
mis-
muscles, prevents
clothingshould
maintaining
wants
and
clothing presses
return
the heart
body,
of the blood,and
over
the chest is
the
since.
years
restrict
produces congestion of
great improvement
very
in vogue
22.
When
sometimes
apoplexy.
even
the
they
of life.
the
because
the circulation
diseases.
of serious
cause
tightly against
stocks
; and
of
They
ways.
They
exercise
remain
to
Tight clothingobstructs
oftenthe
use,
healthy
the
amount
blood.
of the
movement
that
and
motions
many
moderately loose;
injuriousin
are
of
of
when
the
the
this
inspiredis
the
venous
179
HYGIENE.
blood
is
then
imperfectlychanged
brings
little oxygen
too
little carbonic
too
into
acid;
arterial
the blood
to
The
Shape
of
a.
Waist
not
Fig.53.
The
Shape
of
Waist
deformed
air, the
ill ventilated
24.
In
by
chest
be
cannot
out
can
be
developed;
in
of the
any
chest
the
the
and
attain
those
other
by tight-lacing.
in
confined
when
an
all the
subject to
atmosphere.
bones
the
all these
the
lungs,
way
and
yielding,
evils,but it forces
organs
soft
are
shape, and
enjoyed by
lacing,or
vitiated
of its natural
blood-vessels, never
away
by tight-lacing.
it becomes
only produces
not
When
growth.
deformed
it does
as
and
tjhildren, while
tight lacing
the
same
dwelling;
evils induced
carries
air
Fig.S3.
Fig. 52.
of fresh
and
The
Fig.52.
want
blood.
the
the chest
heart, and
Good
health
the
never
constricting the
free
ments
move-
180
in
the
When
25.
it
walking,
large enough
spreads out
shoes
or
they
the
compress
bunions, and
should
be
be
should
When
the
of
they
when
too
are
; because
in this
be
always
and
support
corns,
overshoes
the
lations
exha-
and
shoes
they prevent
to
the
narrow,
Qum
nails.
should,
ening
length-
joints,producing
the
heavy enough
fashion
feet ; and
walk
painful to
so
be
always
wet
in the house
while
removed
it
becomes
It is the
movements.
ingrowing
in
worn
should
and
toes
the
the
shoe
it does
body, as
short
too
are
the
weight of
or
makes
HYGIENE.
little at
these
permit
to
boot
the
foot receives
longer. The
somewliaJt
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
protect the
and
comfort.
clothes become
When
26.
the
body,
dry
woollen
other
from
or
thus
evaporation,and
its natural
below
causes,
The
garments.
from
the
perspirationof
theyshould
be
exchanged for
wet, either
woollen
clothes
the
prevent
temperature,
so
result.
But
remain
rheumatism,
apt
are
to
be
the
body, so
are
wet.
27.
The
cording
to
the weather;
refuse
of
act
clothing
more
of life.
an
For
extra
folly;
28.
of
the
then
more
are
day, than
more
neither
when
than
being
colds,
continue
be
simply
to
the
the
who
a/y
feeble, and
the
in
full
are
in
be
to
unprovided
lay
clothes
all causes, be
seeming
to
the
exercise
to
advanced
are
nor
must, in
who
cooled
dry clothingcannot
near
those
rapid
the
the
to
years
old, is
with
an
ficient
sufof
foundation
fatal diseases.
and
Persons
that
the
chilled while
for fear of
often
from
young,
clothing,is
permanent
the
persons
garment
and
become
but
body
should
of clothinguxyrn
amount
aged, need
vigor
it will not
that
check
cool
exhausted.
more
the
in
and
The
morning
damp,
custom
and
during
because
the energy
of
the
the
atmosphere
of the
putting on
afterpart
system
lightand
is
is
thin
181
HYGIENE.
clothing,for
of serious
foundation
extra
an
both
29.
wind
of
should
put
from
body
part of
on
will seldom
cold
When
30.
it
to have
dry,and
well aired.
clothingto
The
to their
all
from
needs
and
head
The
better
the open
the
is
so
The
disease
16
protect the
to
as
this is
should
we
done,
has
be
not
was
all articles of
expose
before
careful
contracted
clothingthat
needed.
they are
and
air, both
common
neck
for
of
the lower
case
entirelywrmig
by
exposure.
or
death.
limbs
the winter
and
it
easily
be light.
are
with
ftirs,
or
with
sore
throats, coughs,
when
is removed,
thus
and
the
entering a house,
results.
season
when
the child
the lower
limbs
neve^
passes
should
into
be
garments.
to
suppose
Attempts
A
when
should
upon
sickness
covering ; and
throat
overheated
covering
usually the
woollen
and
them
cause
the
the upper
covered
are
of children
rapidly that
without
It is
hardened
get cool, we
to
person
to
parts become
protectedwith
33.
so
of
throat
when
as
upper
exposed
order
the hands
and
clothing. During
proper
clean
on
covering
and
; and
up
chilled
are
32.
the
neck
left bare,
they
heated, instead
on,
few minutes
ears
These
croups.
neck
draught
of the most
one
When
put
Many
contains
fabrics,is
wrapped
in
the
and
Muffling the
well
to be
only a lightcovering.
woollen
sit in
ing
different
parts of the body should be clothed accordrequirements. The face is usually left exposed at
overheated,
be
rapidly.
be
The
is cold.
thus
garment,
putting
It would
; but
seasons
likelyto
result.
clothingis
entirelydry.
31.
too
clean
cold
severe
the
clothing,
more
nor
this is
as
clothingin
our
cooled
being
be
stand
When
additional
an
of thinner
would
never
wkidowy
or
of colds.
off
throwing
laid
ofl^n
comfort.
should
the door
sources
Instead
evening
and
heated^we
jrom
fruitfiil
health
When
evening, has
diseases.
towards
garment
promote
and
afternoon
an
that
children
of this kind
strong child
may
too
bear
can
often
up
b6
end
against
182
ANATOMY,
but
them;
the
weak
and
supplied in
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
and
Fashion
things which
and
will
fresh
amount,
and
follyin
dress
health
produce
will
air, are
of children
growth
sufficient
delicate
the
and
HYGIENE.
needed
; and
should
and
to
these
according
die.
surely
give
be
must
sound
to
mote
pro-
ment.
judgthose
to
way
happiness.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. How
bodies
does
How
the
protected
is remarked
much
may
4.
How
much
5.
How
of the
may
cold
the
sick
How
correspond
with
Hying
are
7. How
does
exercise
the
can
heat
is the
Of
11.
What
is said
12.
What
of woollen
13.
What
14.
Why
15.
What
other
16.
Upon
what
17.
What
clothing
What
is remarked
19.
What
of the
20.
How
21.
What
is the
22.
What
of
Why
24.
How
of
is
wearing flannel
the
wear
of
day
effect of
does
body
does
it affect
body
should
light
What
clothing?
and
when
of cotton
of
of
clothing depend
the
underclothes
?
of
use
stockings
dressing ?
injurious ?
tight clothing
expansion
flannel
wear
changing
of the
manner
free
How
flannel ?
about
the
chest?
of the
lungs
sunstroke
made?
garments
tight-fitting
are
climate?
warmth
the
When
article of
an
should
classes
18.
of the
as
children
during
and
of
of the
regulated
be
clothing
goods
of the
temperature
clothing
of
used
is remarked
worn
23.
body
of linen
does
is said
temperature
of the
is
is remarked
should
the
the
be
materials
what
10.
body
in temperature
the aged ?
and
young
of the
of the
What
affect
object
heavy clothing
cold
the
that
sleep affect
9. What
from
temperature
affect the
does
8. How
animals
it be elevated
6. How
should
\)j heat?
body be depressed
human
the
does
of
temperature
animals
are
3. What
How
life affected
without
affected ?
2. How
ur
bodies
are
IV.
the
the
necessary
young?
The
neck?
adult?
What
of
the
183
HYGIENE.
25.
How
the
26.
What
should
27.
What
is said
28.
What
is remarked
are
feet affected
be
of the
29.
When
30.
What
care
31.
What
is remarked
neck
done
with
how
is needed
of
we
regard
after
?
?
prevent
taking
to clean
clothing
the
clothing
shoes
gum
needed
clothing
in the
can
in
By
garments
of
of dress
pressure
wet
amount
overheated,
and
by
different
throat?
32.
The
33.
What
and
upper
is said
lower
of
limbs
hardening
children
by
Section
exposure
V.
Food.
The
1.
food
of them
OTOus
feed
of
entirelyupon
feed
some
and
others
and
animals, and
2.
live
Man
may
the
so
the
system
in the
is
upon
he
or
only
in
both
animal
from
another
with
eaten
be
rejected,because
human
The
body,
at
and
animal
man
that
human
obtained.
feeds
regularly
one
for each
Even
of the
while
whether
is necessary
life.
season
food
contains
that
is
year, is unfit to be
part of
part of the
same
plant
plant
may
must
injurious.
substances
must,
by
food,
of food
another
is
is done
food alone, as
climates
; and
food
little relished
scarcely be
one
it is
is frequently
animal
vegetables can
to
impunity,
albuminoid
where
vegetablekingdom;
season
be
4.
the
wholesome
consistingof vegetables
it is but
where
vegetable
destructive
eminently
at
and
the selection
or
camivoroits;
omnivorous,
live upon
may
and
the animal
food
tropical climates
where
in
called
are
herbiv-
vegetables exclusively, as
temperate
care
substances
eaten
frigidzones
3. Mv^
he
in
easilyprocured,
not
It
live upon
case
and
called
are
called
are
mixed
Some
considerably.
vegetables,and
animals,
upon
upon
varies
livingcreatures
constitute
large part
therefore, be furnished
by
of the
large
184
ANATOMY,
PHYSIOLOGY,
flour,and
in
The
5.
They
the
contain
by
fish,eggs,
milk,
tables.
vege-
tend
to
they
account
cold
resist the
to
and
carbon, and
this
livingin
them
animals
of
On
body.
persons
enable
by
large amount
of the
heat
extent
great
in meats,
^mished
oils,are
or
largelyconsumed
a
found
are
HYGIENE.
vegetablesgenerally.
faU,
increase
They
AND
are
climates, and
to
of
depressinge"^ts
the cold.
6. ITie sugars
makes
taste
The
of fruits
taste
The
sugar-maple
are
annually
tend
to
generated
8. Meats
well
as
and
and
9.
corn-fed
not
animals
the
the
upon
hogs, the
fleshof young
The
flesh of
but
upon
as
fattened
Cattle
articles
diflcrent
large
nutritious
quality,in
old
so
ones;
that
of older
than
beef.
which
ments
experifined
con-
are
long
remain
in
long deprived
food, disease
is apt
contains
to
sugar,
proportion, is
and
of
grass
bast
food.
of
or
of
be
"t.
the
of the
food
softer,and
depends
animal
furnish
it
in
the
upon
when
which
on
grain
much
vary
are
killed,
fed.
was
pork.
animals
The
They
much
; and
condition
kind
of nofurishmentyand
amount
eofnUdns
consequently,it
nutritious.
paler
is
substances, in due
contain
most
AU
not
the system
diet
of sugar
tons
animals
food, they do
of
from
the best.
healthiest,and
the
of
consequently, a
obtained
man.
omnivorous
classes
three
albuminoid
the
and
when
tain.
con-
"a.mily.
best suited to
When
condition.
of the
one
the human
one
that
prove
single article
healthy
any
by
they
mostly obtained
million
one
sweet
all nations.
grape-sugar
country is
than
their
with
large quantitiesare
More
diet is the
to
the
in this
trees.
consumed
mixed
is from
; but
the sugar-cane
7. A
articles of food
consumed
sugar
the
favorite
them
sweet
from
mostlyof vegetableorigin,and
are
meat
is
animals; except
is
more
more
of young
more
that
water
tender
than
and
aninuds
the
juicy,
is generally
readily digested,than
veal
is less
digestible
186
Bread
16.
heavy
before
less
should
in
ma^
Indian
In
preparing it
and
digestible,
is
Potatoes
18.
the
spring,when
food.
They
should
then
19.
be
those
whose
powers
They
be
cooked
substitutes
Some
20.
in
for their
Salt is needed
by
many
into sugar
gentle stimulant
excellent
21.
relish
is
persons,
and,
in
food.
One
should
be taken.
and
tea
induce
in
half
sleep.
small
in
relish
tea when
way,
pint of
Most
this
cap
for
afibrd
to
should
and
are
assist in
the
beverage
at
of
of
of coffee
latter
Mustard
seems
to
is
to
digestionof
meal
having
the
is
an
benefwialy
particularly
stimulants
people prefercoffee
food.
in moderate
stimulant
are
sun
ripening.
taken
sparingly.
gentle
tain
con-
horse-radish.
be
powerful
lent
excel-
the
kinds
other
food.
fruits
of
process
moderatelyused
They
this
suited
Unripe
mustard,
than
taste
quantities. Horseradish
winter
and
spring.
evening, the
the
for
unfit
are
indigestible;but
be used
should
adults.
to
of food.
system, and
during the
Coffeeand
In
time.
boiling,and
then
and
during the
give
the
and
diet,
entirelyripe,they
well
ways,
them
quantities. Pepper
digestiveorgans,
long
delicious
When
are
salt, pepper,
are
three
the
"
excellent
by roasting or
kinds
substances
these
Among
sprout,"they
"
more
renders
the starch
meat
for other
starch, which
converts
with
but
contain
They
subsist for
may
nourishing properties.
may
to
of convalescence.
moderately digestible,and
are
is very
mealy.
prized
are
Rice
an
cooked
and
dry
sour.
article of diet.
for food.
potatoes
best
are
Fruits
for their
the
and
of the other
any
potatoes, forming
beings
masticated
becomes
sooner
fat than
cases
used
and
human
which
and
usually associateil
are
articles,bread, meat,
upon
in
much
well
it forms
for
as
because
is less nutritious
particularlyadapted
are
is not
more
excellent
weak,
digestionare
and
bread,
contains
an
warm,
bread
Rye
HYGIENE.
when
stomach,
wheat
corn
it becomes
then
of
the
than
digestible
grains.
be eaten
not
swallowed.
being
17.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
most
other
is as much
in the
a
as
morning,
tendency
to
strengthenthe mind.
187
HYGIENE.
and
esteemed
by
and
Cocoa
most
either coffee
digestedthan
drinks
Alcoholic
22.
nutritious
are
or
tea.
should
never
to in
be resorted
in
and
it
this way
; but
system
both
The
23.
to
develop
to
be
The
food
before
such
exceptions,
The
24.
broiling
;
as
and
the
other
the
and
of
worst
way
eaten
of
Ham,
pork
is
meat
may
In
not
ical
the med-
stimulate,
of the
the destruction
to
are
custom
cmnmon
digestible
;
few
are
of
some
vegetables.
by roasting and
by boilingand frying.
the
are
juicesare
preserved,
digestiblethan
a
by
portionof
is wasted.
and
as
all kinds
there
a
so
any
the
Frying
trient
nu-
is the
the heated
and
and
hard,
called
making
it very
indigestible.
other
and
trichina
spiralis;which, when
painful and
be eaten
often
this
with
fatal disease.
worm
is
be
a
taken
thoroughly cooked,
then
should
by
more
but
boilingmeat
cooking. The
very
it
beef, and
more
of
state
its temperature
eaten
are
rendered
sausages,
worm,
easily
prescribed
conditions
some
render
broilingmeats
cooking,as
vjithovi
slender
directed
is at first to
of cooking meats
cooking.
rendering it dry
25.
they
palate. Nearly
poorest modes
are
juicespass
to
oysters,raw
raw
in
meats
way
the
they
best modes
roastingand
In
; and
increase
to
agreeable to
cooked
are
object is
more
in
when
natio^is.
among
unless
invariablyleads
use
less
are
mind.
and
body
they
unless
relief to
gives
its habitual
of
harm
much
action of alcohol
The
attendant.
literarypursuits.
needed
of sickness
cases
; but
be used
seldom
hence, it is highly
in
engaged
persons
chocolate
labor ;
gives
When
the
destroyed,and
the
impunity.
26. The
person
physicallabor requiresmore
of
it,than
one
who
nutritious
leads
sedentary life.
The
young,
188
ANATOMY,
who
mostly active,can
are
feeble.
The
the weak
need
than
those
such
eat
he small
in
moderate
forced
but
much,
is found
loses
When
lowered
childhood, the
system, but
tim
serious
to
to
29.
also
The
food
repairing the
This
Milk, and
to
its
prevents
food
the vital
The
mind
its
; and
wasting
the vitality
peculiarly
diseases.
In
diseases which
taken
by
not
seldom
fat and
children
the
of
body
fail to
hurry
the double
serves
the vic^
purpose
easilydigested diet.
and
always
should
compose
and
Pastry,unripe fruit,salted provisions,
eat
generallybe
from
these
to
The
last one,
at
be observed.
from
health.
adults
much
eating too
day, and
Children
avoided.
frequentlythan
more
of
and
nutritious
lean meat,
be restrained
conducive
to eat
stomach
its richness
other
to
duly
un-
be avoided.
the
energy,
the blood
loaded.
over-
us
amount,
sufficient
their
in
article of food
any
functionsdepressed.
of proper
waste
drinks, should
30.
often induces
requiresa
of the diet.
should
be
not
when
indigestible,
When
in
taken
early grave.
an
raent.
may
this shmM
be
stomach, it should
of fever, or
want
stomach
Habit
muscles
of the system is
leads
the
and
digestion,
should
becomes
obtained
and
vigor, the
of
powers
the
the
warm.
offeebledigestive
powers,
of food
little.
too
is not
food
are
its
seldom
disagreewith
to
powers
kinds
the stomach.
upon
it is
and
of digestion,
is easy
food
digestible
of cold climates
reside where
those
that
so
quantities,
Even
28.
All
amount.
the inhabitants
who
food onlyas
to
and
Dyspeptiepersons,
should
too
able
are
HYGIENE.
food than
digestmore
food
more
27.
robust
and
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
or
may
acid
be permitted
do ; yet
one
part
they
time.
Three
apart, will be
meals
most
fore
and
should be taken three or four hours belightest,
be avoided
retiringto sleep. A hearty supper should
be the
because
dreams.
it disturbs
the
sleepand
189
HYGIENE.
Eating
31.
productivenf mucK
but
act
once
eating rapidly is
A
32.
'mind
or
and
should
mental
tends
blood
its functional
lessen
thus
the
draw
after
and
eating;
elapsebefore
proceeding
The
33.
state
of the
mind
of digestion. Sudden
stomach
pleasant things,and
appetite and
work,
therefore
be
of
body
the stomach,
labor,
severe
to
two
so
that
should
the stomach
the
the
air increases
mind
so
of
is
apt
to
conversation
of
state
powers
while
the process
joyful or sad,
Light
cheerful
encouraged
Pure
34.
from
influenceon
whether
noticed.
promote
exercise
After
one
has much
news,
not
are
of
of
be allowed
habit
its work.
properly perform
may
hard
to
teeth, the
dyspepsia.
immediatelybeforeor
powers.
meal, from
longed;
pro-
gastricjuicecan
causes
away
should
from
the
in
much
confirmed
Severe
physicallabor.
or
to
be taken
not
by
the
fruitful
of the most
one
heartymeal
aftersevere
finelytriturated
on
digestionis
its
rapidly; because
more
on
is swallowed
the food
required for
it is
when
digestiongoes
at
injury. When
the time
large lumps,
fullymast'watingthe food, is
wUhout
rf/pidlyy
too
about
digestion,and
should
eating.
the whole
appetiteby invigorating
tion
system. It purifiesthe blood and thus stimulates the funcof every
Children, after being confined all day
organ.
poorly ventilated
in
in
rooms
well
not
school-room, and
ventilated, have
persons
little or
no
after
sleeping
appetite.
i"oi":c"
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. How
2.
3.
What
Why
4. What
poids ?
animals
may
is remarked
is
care
are
so
the
V.
be classified
of the
necessary
three
food
in
classes
by
of
their food?
?
man
selecting food
of food
What
190
ANATOMY,
5. What
of the
fats?
6. What
of the
sugars
7. What
is said
8.
what
Upon
9. What
of
fresh
flesh
of the
afiected
How
11.
What
is said
offish
12.
What
is said
of
13.
What
is said
of milk
14.
What
is said
of
15.
What
is remarked
meats
as
article
an
for food
vegetables
17.
is said
18.
What
of potatoes
19.
What
is remarked
20.
What
of substances
21.
What
is said
22.
What
of alcoholic
23.
What
is said
of
24.
What
is said
of the
25.
What
of the
trichina
2G.
What
is said
of the
quantity
27.
What
is said
of the
food
28.
induce
us
How
of Indian
as
drink?
?
is said
AVTiat
bread?
of rye
of rice ?
What
corn
food
of fruits ?
used
of the
drinks
food ?
to other
cofiee,tea, and
of
use
relishes
as
cocoa?
by cooking?
food
preparing
different
of
modes
cooking
meats
?
B})iralis
for
of food
required by
person
What
dyspeptic persons?
does
habit
to do ?
is the
How
of eggs
What
unwholesome?
Why
often
fish ?
bread
What
season
of wheat
of food?
and
salting meat
bread
the
depend?
animals
of young
by
16.
warm
in meats
nourishment
the
10.
is
diet ?
mixed
does
HYGIENE.
is remarked
are
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
afiected
system
the
does
29.
is said
of food
30.
What
is said
of
31.
What
of
32.
Why
not
33.
How
does
34.
How
does
eating
take
the
for children
receive
not
children
enough
ishment
nour-
regularity in eating ?
too
rapidly?
hearty
mind
pure
afiect
of food
want
What
it does
when
meal
influence
air afiect
the
just before
or
after
severe
labor?
digestion ?
appetite ?
ai^OO-
VL
Section
Sleep.
1.
The
which
brain
is the centre
constantlyin
not
engaged
from
state
in
of
of activityduring
mental
surrounding
labor,
the
nervous
the
day.
it is still
objects; hence,
system, is
Even
when
subject to impressions
it is
never
quiet
191
HYGIENE.
while
the individual
and
needs
time
day, the
the
during
is awake.
its functional
and
of
in the
on
vital
the
system,
body.
force
produced, so
that
both
the
day
; but
close of
vessels
"
the
during
work
become
mind
refreshed
and
it is
towards
weary
of
season
supplying
of the
rapidly than
more
are
processes
exercise
active
in
are
sleep,the
life force, so
ent
nutri-
that
fully restored
the
its
to
vigor.
The
3.
functions of the
muscles
in
are
and
the
part of
the
is somewhat
another
strength,and
day,
must,
life and
temperature,
that
vigorous,so
in a^tate
every
of rest.
is not
the
the
time
surely ebb
vigor, be shorn
of
night
its
the
upon
of
so
how
body,
much
the
once
strength, and
the
life and
again.
comes
understand
to
and
away,
be
of course,
that
it is easy
enters
standard
proper
matter
pensated
fully com-
the
upon
individual
the
below
as
system be continued,
of life will
is less
it made
the drain
depressed by
more
in
lowered
circulation
this buildingup
of sleepis insufficient;
entirelyreplenished; thus
of
voluntary
respirationand
completed; yesterday'slabor
for,and
work
the
The
awake.
are
or
wholly
partially,
tJie amount
is not
process
we
during sleep,
continue
organs
when
digestion
is
system
When
4.
of
process
vital
of repose,
state
are
and
body
at
the
During
prepared
the muscles
important vital
is consumed
morning
usual
continue
the
which
day.
inactive,and
during sleep,yet
rest
still going
is
exhausted
it is
and
renewed,
are
ment
excite-
by sleep ; during
pleasures of another
the mind
Although
state
it obtains
powers
the
this continued
system becomes
nervous
This
repose.
From
the
If this
powers
full of
so
reduced
to
hopeless wreck.
6.
loss
of sleep. Debility of
disturbed
the
system,
breathing,palpitationof
long train of evils,are
with
its
body
; while
the
few
insanity,particularlyin
excitability,
nervous
heart, and
of the
those
dyspepsia,
diseases
who
are
of the
perform-
192
ANATOMY,
exoessive
ing
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
meutal
labor, is
hoik
pkyaiealand
not
HYGIENE.
result to the
uncommon
an
mind.
6. DiaeoMt^
indulgence
in
is
memory
and
the
torpid,when
impaired,
the
of all
the
eighthours
wasted
health, and
require more
sleep than
sleep than
more
8.
Children
systems
scarcely ever
at
to
9.
is the proper
Night
the habit
the
convert
to
o'clock,
ten
be
should
rest
hour's
prominent
10.
the
fullsupper
wholesome,
such
11.
The
in age,
life.
and
while
Their
nervous
awake,
become
they
they
are
fatigued
more
in which
repose,
energies.
it is too
society.
This
those who
regular hour
should
is worth
the
retiring
later than
adage, that
It is
after."
two
hours
of
often
indulge
for
be
not
old
the
in
irregularityin
just beforeretiringto
feeble, a
than
shellbarks, and
but
Women
advanced
longer period of
is truth
produce
to
somewhat
are
the
upon
"
one
able,
prob-
rest, is the
of mischief.
cause
sleepfand
that
midnight
that
however,
depend
persons
in middle
adopted.
there
as
before
rest
of
less
or
however, required
sleepthan adults.
so
exhausted
their
renew
more
of the person.
; and
men
need
depressed,
excess.
the habits
those
rest,
become
of time,
excitable,
more
becomes
is
energy
grtai
sluggishly,
acts
energies,must
requiremore
are
physical
amount
activity,the
mind
organs
too
system
nervous
sleep to
from
out
The
restoring the
need
in
indulge
we
assignedfor deep.
for
whole
blunted, the
are
functions
7. About
The
deep.
mentaly re8uU
When
dreams.
light meal
will
to fillthe stomach
walnuts,
course
cannot
are
often
the
to disturb
apt
digestivepowers
always
more
prove
with
solid food.
Apples,
eaten
just before
retiring;
be recommended.
sleeping-room should
the
rest is
atmosphere
latedfso
that
vitiated
In
large^airy,and
be
in
it will
the
not
morning,
weUventir
become
the doors
much
and
194
ANATOMY,
PHYSIOLOGY,
AND
HYGIENE.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1.
is
Why
sleep required
2. How
does
3. How
does
4.
What
renew
sleep
affect
effect does
5. What
diseases
6.
What
7.
How
much
8.
Why
do
is the
9. What
children
10.
Why
What
is said
12.
What
kind
Why
14.
What
15.
Why
16.
What
for
beds
"
beds
the
upon
body?
sleep?
need
than
adults
ventilation
or
How
of
sleeping-room?
dreams
are
usually unhealthy
of the
on
organs?
sleep ?
is best?
is remarked
vital
sleep ?
sleep
more
body?
bed
spare
of
body
are
are
the
need
"
13.
want
much
does
of the
sleep have
of too
full supper
of
of the
energies
Unctions
the
is best suited
11.
vital
the
want
follow
sleep
time
is
the
result
?
the
sleep
VI.
often
produced?
near
floor
unhealthy
the well
sleeping in
the
same
bed?
VII.
Section
Exercise.
1. A
the
mind
best
;
of the exercise
function
the
most
that
day
to
keep
will then
individual
beneficial
system
thus
which, when
call forth
should
be
this
in
them
healthy
are
into
few, if
any,
of
to
such
exercise
as
health
will
of
be
part of the
vocations
a
the
Every
exercise
the
and
continuance
the
activityevery
general activity,hence,
be devoted
body
condition.
Such
unimpaired.
produce
to
it calls
when
yet there
of the
be
will
is needed
of life
portion of each
is best
adapted
to
the individual.
2. The
objectand
aim
of
all exercise
should
be to
bring irUo
196
HYGIENE.
exercised
sufficiently
not
based
exercise
therefore, the
according
wisdom
is
there
no
3. Exercise
of the
of
body,
exhausted
the
by
be of much
causes
Thus,
the process
muscles, and
corresponds with
heart
too
6. Active
increases
an
of the
exercise
the
This
to
and
for
in
long
weak
and
the
heart,and
to
body.
strength of
the
renew
the
material, and
the waste
In
diseases,where
affections
some
be
may
this
injuriousby
the
case
it
and
when
digestiveorgans,
digested,and
nourishment, which
gives tone
is the
of
obstructed, as in
of food
of
firmness
in size and
them
of exercise.
appetiteand
increase
is sent
is
the
to
be continued
brain, exercise
blood
much
body
system.
of the
the
and
adds
away
blood
larger amount
when
carry
bodies, as
boat.
the movements
the amount
of the
passage
Bending
to
Active
slowly.
very
supply
the
adds
strength to
the exercise
to
system
the
so
ceives
re-
weight
moderate;
but
perform their
cise
passiveexer-
restoringstrength to
increases
increased
; but
of other
increases
an
of the
on
goes
exercise
of
and
voluntary muscles
movements
it must
be directed
of exercise
passive.
or
walking
amount,
use,
vary
developing
that
the
action
proper
must
properly used,
in
be active
and
ficial;
bene-
should
case
of
injurious.
more
carriage,or sailingin
muscles,
Active
5.
each
mind, than
may
running
exercise,in
Active
; because
time
that
body
occasioned
strength. To
the
and
and
the
the
exercise
importance
more
body
in
as
riding in
4.
; and
by callinginto
is made
is that
when
in
and, when
for
intelligence. When
of
both
strengthening
exercise
used
are
plan
appropriate and
will be
means
and
means
body, which
the
of
or
view
the individual
to
by
the
in
this
upon
the mind
of
functions.
196
7. Exercise
this takes
will be
of oxygen
acid
will be
of repose
be
allotted
will
respond, by
should
the
the
the
When
in
employed
hours
working
portionof
followed by
recommended
the
portion of
devoted
are
hours
improving
to
work,
for
work
for
those
the
creation
re-
; but
mind
mental
to
should
recreation
period for
season
labor,
be used
to
develop
physicalstrength.
9. Exercise
time
some
vrill prove
because
time,
health
be such
must
of
as
and
The
gradual growth.
very
of exercise
amount
strengthof
at
beneficial
The
that it accelerates
are,
the
to
oxygen
the
powers
the system.
richer
These
the whole
strength. A
the
from
the food
body, than
such
destroy the
labor
is
results.
air,
open
vigorates
in-
the
to
by
in
every
the presence
function, and
and
of
organ
of the
are
creased
in-
strength of
promoted.
labor
limited
body by
the
vigor,so
being are
11. Excessive
active
more
be
should
circulation; it
conveys
stimulated
being
blood, become
in size and
the blood
the
digestive
furnishinga large amount
function,thus
nourishment, which
one
any
furnishingmore
it stimulates
system;
nervous
in
thus
respiration,
the
increased
to
exercise
from
results
the individual
for
the result of
strength are
suit the
to
continued
it must
of
system
increased
an
sleep,eight hours
to
labor, at least
be
be
must
recreation.
to
spent in manual
the
; thus
amount
carbonic
the
physiologistshave
therefore, some
eight hours
when
kind
of every
exercise
eight hours
are
blood, and
the
to
(he bredh-
larger
air, a
pure
removed
effectually
more
8. Active
and
hastens
of action.
energy
that
in
place
supplied
invigorated,and
be
HYGIENE.
onlyquickens(he pulse,but
not
When
ing.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
ovi
wears
amount
and
the
drink
body
the system
of power
; and
receives
by overtaxingUs
only is supplied to
when
labor
in the way
takes
more
ment,
of nourish-
197
HYGIENE.
When
12.
vital
quicklyexhausted.
energiesare
receive
from
and
food
their
work, and
organs
of the
body
and
remain
growth,
labor
required to
are
persons
young
The
nourisliment
none
dwarfed
in
in
and
develop
consequently,they
hard, their
performing
strengthen the
in their
stunted
are
they
intellectual
and
physical
strength.
13. No
child
should
be
ever
to its fullcapacity,whether
; but
the food
by
and
the
14.
youth
foundation
seated, continue
strengthof
for
to
the
air is vitiated,the
air
may
be
Children
16.
This
of oxygen,
should
be
should
in
is
the
of health
capable.
The
same.
; thus
paring
preonce
the health
more
the open
is of but
it does
when
impart
have
and
little value.
not
contain
More
a
good
freedom of exercise
harmless
in such
so
individual,whether
an
and
more
exercise
it will
it is
diseases,which, when
be taken
; but
inhaled
system,
life remains.
while
the
supply
still
exercise should
15. AU
in the
of which
standard
numerous
sap
body
the
lectual
intel-
force,daily supplied
reserved
energies of
to labor
physical or
adult, are
or
be
highestdegree
the vital
Whenever
life
vital,or
the
be
labor
that
drink, should
develop it to
to
as
part of
compelledor permitted
in the open
air.
yet exhilaratingsports
as
trundlinghoops, which
body
requiringmuch
without
17.
is
Walking
brings
into
action
of the
upper
and
continued,
adapted
17*
to
as
in
the
every
the reach
muscles
lower
of
may
means
beneficial
nearly all
persons.
It
of the
It is
limbs.
part of the
of the mind.
exertion
Jumping,
to
of the cheapest,
yet most
the
the
one
is within
of exercise,and
control
give motion
entirelyunder
be made
either
the
gentle or
case.
as
an
exercise,is
"jumping
period
of
the
too
violent,and
when
long
youth
when
the
cartilagesare
198
elastic,and
In
In
19.
exercise
When
out-door
found
in the
20.
be
may
in
when
dbeased,
both
that
schools
our
in
so
the
improve
their
mind
the
voted
the health
of
not
vigor
kind
the
to
of the
and
the
to
body
erect
the
body
position; for
either
only
introduced
that
they
students, but
tend
the
they
erect
It
they
to
are
to
svfficient
the
muscles,
for
few
in the
productive of
of the
favors
the
"ee
or
are
less
movement
or
kept
ony
monot-
moments,
position of
much
good.
sitting,
other
fatigue.
state
An
of the
to
upright
backward,
in
give
exertion
it in any
forward,
muscles
more
muscular
are
or
the
deserve
pre-
exercises
relieve
change
tution,
insti-
of time
of such
mind
retain
it is bent
also
rapid
more
amount
not
to
requires less
than
only
not
beneficial
prove
kind, is
rather
by
into
educational
the
cities,
strengthen
muscles
tension, causing
not
exercises,so
when
side, many
been
into every
to relax
in this way
standing,or walking.
keep
to
possible
of any
They
certain
; and
The
23.
frame.
school-room,
rest
the
of health;
state
activity
adopted
are
these
have
substitute
Every
undoubtedly
to drills
that
they
gymnasium.
result would
exercise,or
to
as
cure.
colleges,the testimony is
the
In
22.
it in
receive
may
enjoyed^a
accompany
in their studies.
advancement
that
be to call into
the
promote
should
mental
hroughi
violent
so
he
continue
to
physical activityof
increase
is
body
discipline of the
physical exercises
and
it is
cannot
the
as
to
and
body
Wherever
21.
but
used
produces "tigue.
soon
very
exercise should
of amusement
means
the
of
most
excess.
exercise
body,
legs are
these
object of
or,
it to
schools, and
many
The
therefore, it
indulge in
to
apt
muscle
nearly every
of the
the muscles
HYGIENE.
system is,therefore,not
the
to
enjoyed by children;
It is most
are
jar
or
jumping,
running
active
into
shock
the
great
so
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
or
of
erect
to
tinued
con-
tion
posi-
muscles, but
199
HYGIENE.
in
shape
; but
of
is apt to remain
trainingto
should
this
during
made
to
life,no
should
be
daily may
in the
hours;
three
Sve
devoted
ninth
four
year,
mental
developing
to
needs
much
care
things
should
be
the
first six
years
of
in the
seventh
; in
the
hours
two
year,
eighth year,
in the
hours;
seven
or
partly to
given
books
to
by
other
During
required ;
used
the
deformity.
body
and
; and
hours
be
be
The
growth,
its purpose.
serve
study
hours
of
period
the
be
be devoted
through life,
so
should
should
attention
most
its
positiveinjury,of
to the
correct
from
is distorted
body
possible means
period of youth
culture; but
and
opportunity to
if possible^while
overcomCf
the
youth, it
every
regular system
The
he
disadvantage,if not
to the
individual
should
When
is young.
natural
25.
habit
stooping
the person
much
fullest
their fiinctions.
perform
24.
the
organs
tenth
year,
daily may
be
spent in study.
Seais
26.
should
roomy
the
weight
and
have
health
the
adults, should
27.
Hiding
have
passive kinds
body
brought into
rider
and
during
the
trotting.
the best
the
not
be
gentle and
28.
The
character
can
weak
and
be
the
feeble, it is
attempted by
exercise
of
admitting of
keeping
of the
muscles
it is
person,
the
of
one
agreeable change
an
mind
not
of
any
pacing, galloping,
pied.
pleasantlyoccuso
unless
them
than
equilibrium of
of
moderately strong
and
scenery,
For
should
For
the
the
preserve
movements
of exercise,
means
of air and
different
comfort
for children
exertion
All
exercise.
to
use
the
to
requiresmxyre
of
be low
will support
seats, whether
as
school-
should
This
much
add
All
backs
horseback
on
the other
are
will
of the child.
for
or
in the
or
the floor.
upon
legs,and
of the
home
at
reSting-place
for the feet,or
feet to rest
for the
enough
whether
for chUdreUy
well
the
suited, and
horse
is very
easilymanaged.
from riding in
the vehicle
used.
vehicle
depends
rough, jarring
upon
wagon
the
will
200
ANATOMY,
exercise
give
those
to
Sailing or riding in
29.
the
during
summer
always
of
Active
tends
the
muscles, which
nutrition
the
water,
delightful
most
doors
the
; and
creation
re-
are
and
women
digestive organs
is,in
sluggishly,the
is laid
food
relieved
vantage.
disad-
exercise,all parts
firmness
and
the
easily excited,
of
powers
digestion and
foundation
the
as
the
the
without
lose their
thus, the
it
as
to
measure,
take proper
becomes
feeble, and
when
performed
be
system
act
muscles
The
disorders
nervous
well
continued
on
neglectsto
nervous
become
the
then
may
languish.
functions
convalescent,
the
within
much
the stomach
person
strength, the
vital
of
advisable
brought
burden, labor
When
easy
pleasant, as
very
excursions
strength from
are
the system
of
afford
is not
partlydigested,and
31.
an
large cities.
our
exercise
draw
to
of its
is
account
confined
are
the
to
invigorating,particularly
very
the children
30.
boat
season,
all who
to
while
to
suited
only
aged.
experienced. Frequent
change
is
the
of exercise, on
useful means
it is
comparatively strong;
are
its
HYGIENE.
; but
muscles
of the
most
feeble,the delicate,and
the
as
to
who
carriage, by
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
result
for
of
longed
pro-
sedentary
habits.
32.
Literaryoccupationsare
they he pursued
unless
always
are
essential
to
to
injurious to health,
especially
not
preservation of
the
dyspepsia ;
33.
and
Few
persons
it is very
suffer
the
increase
to
seem
much
so
During
an
we
but
tendency
perish from
from
that
to
the
as
cause,
met
with
but
we
kinds,
have
health, be
to
apt
are
labor
does
exhaustion
pupils
of
not
limited
seen
years
imagined.
in the
number
very
alone
schools
our
is sometimes
the
disease.
mental
pure
whether
this
of all
which
means,
of mental
the addition
doubtful
the other
and
excess,
many
room,
schoolof
cases
whose
202
ANATOMY,
PHYSIOLOGY,
14.
What
15.
Why
IG.
What
17.
What
is remarked
18.
What
of
19.
What
of
20.
What
always results
should
from
of the
be
they
be
22.
walking,
is there
Why
What
25.
To
the
for
open
of exercise?
means
of exercises
of
should
the
is remarked
27.
What
is said
28.
What
of
riding
in
29.
What
of
riding
in boats
30.
What
is said
31.
How
32.
What
does
is remarked
schools
for the
youth
of
beneficial?
should
Why
of cities
body
be
devoted?
What
is said of
used
children
by
as
of exercise
means
vehicle?
?
of exercise
neglect
be
habit?
horseback
on
should
of seats
riding
What
learning?
public
best
the
period
What
of
stooping
schools
in
in the
position
erect
exercise
all institutions
26.
after
full meal
affect the
of exercise
of
?
?
system
literary occupations
What
of
sedentary
of all kinds?
33.
What
is remarked
84.
What
is
of
always
in schools
overstudy
needed
health,
for
whether
the
mind
is
employed
not
85.
as
for out-door
exercises
is remarked
what
time
into
is said
occupations
or
physical
is the
24.
energies?
air ?
running?
introduced
23.
vital
jumping?
are
What
HYGIENE.
sports of children?
of
substitute
How
in the
taken
the
overtaxing
all exercise
is said
AND
What
applicationto study
"XKoo-
VIIL
Section
Teeth
The
1.
The
all
particlesof
food
be
the
This
may
made
of wood
of food
render
teeth.
are
be cleansed
teeth should
not
done
by
the
or
common
removed,
the breath
Organs.
other
and
aftereach meal,
from
the
mouth
and
tooth-brush, aided
soon
offensive,as well
putrefy,and
as
hasten
as
the
to
move
re-
teeth.
by tooth-picks,
goose-quill.When
they
so
the
the
particles
in that
state
decay
of the
203
HYGIENE.
2.
The
tooth.
enamel
When
tooth
thus
is
portion of
any
exposed
cold
substances
well
as
all substances
When
much
break
that
or
their
improve
soon
of
When
commenced
The
4.
When
long used, it
of
obscured.
used
is
in
sewing
engaged
softer
the
and
colors, such
this
years.
retina
of
rest
is
hausted
ex-
vision
the
white
eye
in
engaged
quickly
more
eye
many
when
black
has
body, needs
are
we
The
the
the
case
enamel.
gold-foil.In
clearness-
the
from
the tooth
wearied, the
when
night.
at
exhaust
upon
of
particularly the
by lamp-light,as
printed page,
is
becomes
the
preserved for
(yrgans
and
sensibility,
This
and
a
its
be
may
too
This
them
injury to
be filled with
other
like all
eye,
too
much
partlydecayed
tooth-picks.
prevent
injured,and
as
gritty
as
he removed.
will
cause
is
decay, it should
to
tooth
way
to
enamel
part of the
any
metal
should
and
pressing so closelytogether as
avoided,
irregularfrom being
are
them
appearance,
be
it,such
nuts, and
teeth
more
should
scratch
or
shells of hard
one
enamel, and
the permanent
crowdedy
will
the
it is
the air
to
crack
tooth-powder,the
3.
natural
is
ing,
read-
colors
than
is
when
of
it
yellow, blue, or
as
green.
6. Sudden
The
of
a
changes in
iris contracts
dilates,so
or
to
very
the retina
the loss of
The
6.
are
from
the
or
the water
of
eye-washes,
has
in
of the
roots
be
may
any
the iris
this is
when
tepid or
the secretions
by
eyes
and
; and
from
change
can
tract,
con-
continued,
follows.
he hathed
eyes should
also
water,
no
overpowered
sight sometimes
the dust
remove
and
is
the
when
before
he avoided.
to
as
lightfallingupon
dim
of lightshould
the amount
their
eyelashes.
frequentlybathed
be
because
frequentlyfollowed
Wlien
in
their
ever
be
permanent
use.
so
inner
as
to
angles,
the eyes
tepid or
constantlyapplied to
kind, should
physician;
from
cold under,
; but
them
used, unless
injury
cold
to
scribed
prethe
204
physician should
hearing is impaired,a skilful
the
When
7.
he consulted,and
his advice
of deafness
cure
is
dry, and
the
relief may
who
persons
obtained
be
8. The
middle
an
of oil
the
insect
may
then
be
dropped
from
be removed
the
wearing
should
while
hat
invites
undue
an
baldness.
; but
flow in successive
jets.
of pressure,
until
but
the artery is
case
can
up
and
bound
artery, it will
an
it may
be
checked, by
be obtained.
should
When
be
the pressure
used
in the middle
also be made
is to be continued,
following manner
of the
handkerchief;
artery.
Next, place
that
so
a
short
the
knot
stick
or
so
that
the
in the
the
limb,
or
muslin
the wound;
firmly on
larger,pressure
the artery,
on
press
as
soon
from
comes
surgeon
around
12.
from
as
folded
may
then
be checked
be
end.
knot
diseases.
should
fingerswill
one
many
ness
brain, causing weak-
should
In either
of
of hair
growth
its main
on
other
it
by
the
when
it
custom
When
11.
will kill
to the
comes
when
The
luxuriant
wounds
the blood
regular stream
linen
This
ear.
warm.
In
of blood
Hemorrhage from
means
and
to the brain.
house, is believed
headache, and
possible. When
a
the
the
kept too
in the
amount
of the eyes,
10.
and
ear.
thin; because
short and
kept
the
be
not
physiciansto produce
be
external
into
ear.
The
9.
into the
of rabbit's
auditory canal,
thingsfrom passing
insect crawls
fat should
or
other
the
the external
external
the
entirelycloses
ear
doors,
drops
glycerine,in
ear
frequently
within
two
or
between
membrane
tympanic
is
much
by putting one
sweet-oil,or
fat, goose-grease,
the external
hard, which
confined
are
for the
nostrums
When
ignored.
in it becomes
wax
All
followed.
be
should
the
with
case
HYGIENE.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
then
will
under
bleeding is stopped.
hemorrhage is from the smaU
chief
handker-
First,make
tie it
press
the
at
loosely
upon
the
handkerchief;
When
the
vessels,an
im-
205
HYGIENE.
is the
treatment
check
formation
the further
the wound,
which
This
may
thicknesses
the
on
of muslin
wound
water,
with
or
alum
human
vegetable life.
for
needed
It is
frame.
as
excluded
Our
from
stunted
When
it becomes
room,
blanched,
dark
14. Persons
a
it would
than
of
to seclude
they
should
each
weather
15. The
sun
an
human
of
of
must
18
of
sit in the
sun's
under
rooms,
the
sit in
a
on
rays
plea
hour
when
comfortable
vrtndow
rays
winter,
an
and
sun;
the
of
sit for
own
Him,
I
we
more
return
soon
to
All-wise
an
the
our
gratefulheart
sun's
or
the
room
them.
complicatedpieceof mechanism,
it; and
know
they lose
of summer,
weather
to
porticoin
is
body
becomes
the
pleasant weather
the
open
desire to offer up
homage
where
warm
they should
shine through
can
required
to
rightly come
we
the
severe,
duties
will
day
in darkened
admirably adapted by
most
; and
plenty of clothingand
is very
that the
appearance
put
on
are
deformed.
skin
During
day
ing
manufactur-
otherwise
cool.
on
serves
children
light, the
for invalids
themselves
and
are
health,will be invigorated
clear
During
be far better
keeping
two
them.
to
as
activity.
delicate
or
so
and
sickly-looking,
are
white
part of each
shine upon
or
of
vigor and
in feeble
by spending
can
present
less of their
or
more
to
as
growth,
of
as
and
When
it.
the
bright rays
damp,
mines
as
animal
be built
and
occupy
pale and
deprived
are
so
cold
very
Powdered
vigor of
the sun's
places,such
in their
adults
several
healthydevelopment of
for when
establishments,they are
often
with
water.
dwelling-housesshould
in dark
confined
are
80
the
to
and
essential to the
plenty of sunlight;
admit
by binding
it lint wet
to
of blood.
applied.
Sunlight is
13.
flow
clot in
quantity of lint,tightly
of alum
solution
also be
may
linen,or
or
by applying
or
to
serves
of
Creator
who
dust
the
investigateand
existence, and
to
to
of
again,the
is Ruler
over
these
more
all,the
206
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
HYGIENE.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
VIII.
1.
Wliat
is remarked
of
cleansing
2.
What
is remarked
of
the
3.
of
Wha{
teeth
the
the
of
enamel
when
much
too
teeth
the
teeth
crowded?
What
of
fillii% the
teeth?
4.
the
5.
6.
use
7.
do
sudden
What
9.
Why
children
sight
Why
the
eye?
does
the
the
be
eye
of
light
in
water
affect
beneficial
remedied
be
ear
What
hat
their
hair
bo
kept
of
is remarked
is
hearing
in
external
the
while
removed
thin
and
short
in
house
wounds
How
may
hemorrhage
from
large
vessels
be
checked?
12.
How
may
hemorrhage
from
small
vessels
be
checked
13.
What
14.
How
What
from
is derived
advantage
feeble
persons
are
How
may
be
made
about
plenty
of
sun-light
invigorated?
Where
human
body
the
Why
should
?
?
should
winter?
remarks
from
hemorrhage
the
11.
In
the
of
ear?
What
may
is said
impaired
10.
15.
haust
ex-
?
insects
of
the
should
the
when
done
is remarked
have
summer?
reading
should
in
8.
changes
bathing
eye-washes
What
dryness
in
is
Why
the
affect
nse
eye
How
of
continued
does
How
they
sit
CHAPTER
Growth
The
1.
from
six
to
The
inches.
but
pounds,
it afterwards
three
of
body
adult
the
feet
seven
The
the
of
the
the
;
it
to
little,and
umple
3.
it has
sounds
The
but
the
of
skeldon
a
is
limited
five
wards
after-
are
is
The
about
feet
five
inches.
two
until
about
of
weight
average
men
entirelyhelpless ;
it
spends
six
end
of
or
an
amount
it
of
two
first
to
the
age
year
it takes
of
and
more
learns
soon
months
the
most
it
notice
no
the
time
more
child
can
imitate
in
notice
communicate
can
and
pounds.
twenty-three
older, it takes
At
of
and
and
it,
one
the
time
the
attained.
continues
weight,
first
one-half
States,
atiout
the
years
ia
first,
at
grows
others.
hj
in
twenty
United
rapid
to
stature
women,
things, and
surrounding
wants
infant
but
as
of
hundred
one
about
the
eighteen
During
reaches
or
full
in
and
things
child
the
ia
height,
is
birth
at
about
gradual.
eighteen
which
hundred
first the
the
body,
at
year,
about
women
sleep
of
and
one
2. At
of
inches,
thirtieth
is about
of
men
growth
of
infant
height
in
more
; but
of
height
average
body,
the
before
required
the
and
becomes
the
years
height
of
growth
human
ike
weight of
seveu
Death.
Development.
and
average
and
Development
VI."
ita
lisp a
a
few
syllables.
infant
of
is
eoft and
strength.
yielding; hence,
Many
of the
bones
208
ANATOMY,
in the form
are
of
into
bone, and
When
three
months
enough
to
when
nine
months
year
old, it
other
support
years
of age,
At
four
old, it
stand
can
; and
able
birth, the
their
bones
edges
bones
The
has
by taking
hold
skull
to
and
and
thin
to
fibrous
two
alone.
run
very
as
chair, or
a
one
even
are
togetherby
; when
of
yet united, so
not
upright;
room
periods,between
the
child.
strength
sit
can
the
of
held
are
old, it
walk, and
the
fallingforward
about
to
are
of
infant
it from
keep
or
ossify,
to
strength
healthy
various
at
the
to
crawl
can
HYGIENE.
they continue
months
alone
it becomes
flexible,and
form
the
membranes,
the
by
add
and
thus
old, the
upon
sutures.
but
cartilage;
change
4.
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
is not
yielding,and
solid, bony
like
case,
that
of
the
adult.
In
5.
covered
spaces,
is the anterior
skull, where
at
the
bones
the
the
angles
These
four
from
three
of the
top
of the
parietal bones
is situated
of the
parietal
of
years
not
are
age,
points
of
fication,
ossi-
vertebra, and
one
entirelyof cartilage;
to
these
of these
fontanels
is about
body
At
arch.
weak
too
the
at
and
the
developed
almost
is then
column
frontal
the
tissues,and
important
is situated
is in the
of the
composed
are
is
soft
most*
occipitalbone.
of which
side
each
The
head, where
vertebra
one
other
membranous
posteriorfontanel, which
the
and
several
are
and
entirelyclosed
to
angles of
the
with
6. Each
skin
Fontanels.
of the
crown
meet
sutures
fontanel, which
together;
come
the
the
by
called
are
spaces
of
line
the
maintain
the
and
body
in
the
an
spinal
upright
position.
7.
The
cavity of
lower
time
in
meet
of birth
first
is
and
mostly cartilaginous,
composed
triangular
hip-joint. The
the
limbs
at
side
each
on
These
pelvisis
are
ossified
only
of
three
the
union
in
bones
of the
in their
soft and
middle
the
separate
bone
hip-
pieces.
acetabulum,
and
upper
or
the
portion, at the
and
flexible,
are
unable
210
ANATOMY,
teeth
manent
in size
increased
The
12.
order
and
the ninth
give place
the
in
to
twelfth
the
the
canines
and
fourteenth
years,
the
jaw;
by
and
the last
year,
the permanent
Human
13.
be
thus
from
the
seventh
when
year,
the
From
teeth
of
teeth,
appear.
the
firstset
set ; and
first set
In
the
teeth
milk
period of yoidh.
prime of life;after
begin
teeth
Then
placed
re-
are
thirteenth
protrude firom
the
twenty-second
and
complete
of
time
infancy;
when
the
sixth
from
the
final
twentieth
the
tion
comple-
jear,
decline, and
powers
age,
or
time
is the
period of maturity, or
the
the
the
fall to the
to
eighteenth or
which
period
may
of the
appearance
childhood;
begin
comes
to
periods which
fall out, in
to
of
life,that of old
human
the
first tooth
period
temporary
to
month, is the
teeth
is the
into
birth
of the
period of
following
first molar
teeth,appear
divided
been
seventh
the appearance
or
number.
in the
the
to
both
set
distinguished.
temporary
larger
set
molar
wisdom
or
life has
first tooth, in
second
have
jaws
permanent
of
seventeenth
the
molar,
the
teeth
second
the
the
molars
two
canine
of the
from
and
numerous,
the incisor
bicuspidsof
the
year,
more
the
years^
the
years,
two
aze
this
eighth years,
tenth
mostly larger m
usually appear
seventh
and
HYGIENE.
of twenty ; and
teeth
and
seventh
also
are
accommodate
to
as
the sixth
in the
In
so
permanent
In
and
They
set
instead
thirty-two,
number
and
in texture
harder
are
the temporary
than
ANB
PHYSIOLOGY,
the
last
the
is reached.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. What
of the
2.
is the
growth
What
to talk?
weight
of the
is the
body
condition
and
in
I.
height
height
of
the
of the
What
infant
human
of its
at fir"t ?
infant
growth
What
What
is said
in weight?
of
its
learning
AND
DEVELOPMENT
3. What
is said of the
skeleton
of
in"nt
an
2ll
D1BATH.
of its increase
What
in
strength?
of the
4.
What
is said
of the
bones
5.
What
is said
of the
fontanels
6.
What
of the
development
of the
vertebrse
7.
What
of the
development
of the
pelvis?
is said
of the
digestion in
8. What
9.
What
of the
10.
What
is said
What
of the
development
12.
What
of the
time
13.
What
are
children
of
second
cutting
of teeth
set
the
human
which
periods into
of the
of the
order
and
children?
appearance
11.
respiration in
of the
the
skull
second
set ?
been
.lifehas
divided
""":oc-
Section
Decay
1. The
in
on
loss,from
by
of life
the
to
accident
be
can
the
for when
of the
some
the
The
The
entire
the
if the
newty
limb,
of
lowest
Reparation
the type of
reparation; yet
less
or
include
AracKniday
when
common
cerebral
email
or
into
is necessary
which
and
table.
vege-
animals, the
all animals
is very
into
perfecthydra
the
functions
degree.
this power
orders
developed
scorpions,can,
its head
that the
great
the
ganglion
lizard,can
its tail,whenever
can
and
spidersand
fully developed,reproduce
enailyit is asserted,
this
results.
lobsters, crabs,
include
pieces,
; and
similar
the
shrimps, and
; and
repaired,and
lower
greater
Orusta^cea, which
limbs
constantlygoing
livingorganism, animal
power
a
"
is cut
hy^draya speciesof jelly-fish,
be
may
process
the
in
tear
reproduced,so
piece becomes
each
be
be
of every
this power
2. In
and
wear
must
must
"
properly performed.
existence
As
Death.
and
living body,
the
IL
their
reproduce
be
preserved uninjured.
readily reproduce an eye, an
it loses any
of these
organs.
212
ANATOMY,
3. This
earlier
diminishes
injured
of
process
the
during
PHYSIOLOGY,
in
old
of
periods
HYGIENE.
active
most
in
existence; and
that
so
it
animals
gradually
parts which
imperfectlyrepaired
are
age
the
although
reparation is
life advances,
as
AKD
lost
are
reproduced,
or
same
or
in the
young.
In
4.
and
man
other
warrti-bhoded
limited to certain
reparationis
corpusclesof
red
reparationin
and
in the
all
body
The
5.
low
in
the
bones, and
tissues.
Besides
with
and
of the
organs
7.
as
the
have
not
and
the
with
in structure,
true
these
this power.
or
endowed
are
such
specialorgans,
of
the power
the
removed
or
facility. When
far from
each
divided, and
are
other, they
kept
are
decreases
divided
in
too
far
size,and
is
nerve
quickly
afterwards
are
the
connection.
nervous
8.
Life
and
death
are
by
ends
injured
the
not
are
to
be
thus
united, the
the
muscle
undergoes fattydegeneration.
united
by
formed
so
as
to
continuallytaking place
tissue,
every
organ,
tissue ; and
connective
in this
too
of connective
band
are
apart
soon
nerve-fibres
united
are
the cut
by
become
separated parts
Bones, when
muscle
the
reparation.
when
or
and
as
united
fibres of
are
connective
cartilage,muscles,
across,
repaired; but
not
in structure
the
broken
Cartilage,when
accident, is
such
and
body,
on
complex
glands,and
its
simple
are
also endowed
are
nerve-substance;
dermis
wTiich
these, the
are
going
are
capable of reparation;
peculiar functions,
gray
which
processes
which
also the
constantlyundergoing decay
body,
the nerves,
6. Tissues
of the
epidermis
and
of
life.
through
the
The
the power
membranes,
mucous
the nutritive
vitality,
are
vessels, and
tissues.
blood, are
tissues of the
and
or
the
animals
and
establish
in
every
indeed
DEVELOPMENT
which
from
they
existence, and
they
where
formed
from
The
their
allotted
period of
further
thus
and
others
the
upon
of
stage
life is
up
Death
by
to
be
is made
one
action
living
life of the
of persons.
community,
the
the
which
body,
cells
cells must
preserve
community
the
among
Other
use.
the
bringing
decay.
from
respects the
in
to
removed
places,and
these
work
constantly at
be
no
parts, is like
many
pass
their
In
individual.
of
be
take
to
then
must
can
have
developed
are
213
DEATH,
every
of
AND
is
they
one
equally busy
their
occupy
places.
relative
9. The
different
periods
youth, the
is
system
repaired,and
solid,the full
the
system
has
individual
neither
As
11.
we
of old
feeble
the
the
age,
they
and, therefore,are
by
the
tissues
and
undergo
daily diminished,
body, having
are
for
the
Him
whence
meridian
of
has
velopmen
de-
strength
repair the
of the
body.
degeneration,their
life ebbs
slowly
is
vitality,
dead,
and
!
strong
been
The
attained,
and
the
powers
of
and
the
the
and
more
powers
more
of
death,
organs,
Amctional
until
away
riod
pe-
loss sustained
These
immortal
the
approach
natural
laid in the
tellectu
in-
the
of years.
term
life and
with
pace
organs
came
in the
fore,
; there-
become
has
life become
of
to
it
tem
sys-
and
and
development,
loses for
unable
and
growth
evenly balanced,
now
powers
lost all
appointed
from
decay
highest perfection.
longer keep
no
and
size
of the individual
gains nor
pass
skeleton
its fullest
assimilation
and
nutritive
life.
stature
their
in
and
the
furnished
abundantly
the
childhood
for the
increase
body
reached
powers
is
the
of life,
prime
and
waste
the
waste
material
new
periods of
the
In
10.
natural
individual
parts of
these
during
the
with
vary
In
strong and
so
are
vigor, that
of the
all
life
death
existence.
human
of
powers
full of
so
of
life and
of
powers
"
narrow
soul
quently,
conse-
powers
at
are
last the
house
returns
"
to
214
ANATOMY,
AKD
PHYSIOLOGY,
HYGIENE.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
from
the
1.
What
18
said
of
2.
What
is
said
of
reparation
in
the
3.
What
is
said
of
reparation
at
different
4.
What
of
5.
What
parts
6.
What
parts
7.
What
is
muscles
it
in
the
II.
the
body
the
repairing
Of
repairing
8.
What
is
said
of
life
9.
What
is
said
of
these
10.
What
of
them
in
the
11.
What
of
them
in
old
in
in
powers
of
prime
age
the
of
life
animals
reparation?
reparation?
Of
organized
childhood
life?
body
animals?
repairing
bones
nerves
death
and
of
cartilage
of
periods
of
power
in
tear
order
lower
capable
are
of
and
wear
warm-blooded
other
without
are
and
man
of
said
loes
bodies?
and
youth?
Of
pairing
re-
Appendix.
I.
Section
Carb
Good
1.
is
nursing
Sick.
the
of
important
an
and
among
are
by giving
comfort,
real
the
towards
gentleness
80
in
common
2. Xear
and
dear
of
welfare
calm
of
fear
or
trusting
must
3.
all
Ths
sboidd
ftom
enter,
be
as
so
4.
nxli)
for
the
best
not
to
iiicummude
of
temperature
mid
seventy degree.
so
as
to
be
kept
the
free
from
room
furniture
serve
pre-
patient,
which
upou
which
in
this
we
life I
tiie
room,
liouse
as
sunlight
the
should
be
far
can
moved,
re-
attendants.
sick-room
The
the
by
large, airy
in
for
exhibition
trials
many
aiToost
exhibit
outward
needed
eheerfvl
one
dition,
con-
should
nurse
Power"
the
mci,
nervous
themselves
any
of
and
and
whether
wants,
anxiety they
cases,
Superfluous
The
render
dutita
amid
possible, and
as
mil
the
"Arm
support
the
without
aitnfortable
seieeted
noise
and
and
soothe
to
the
allay
sometinien
all
Kindness
nurse.
do,
to
illness,
severe
In
higher
most
be
sick.
ness.
sick-
of
nwea
willingness
patient's
to
of
perform
for
lean
of
account
on
the
much
cases
demeanor,
that
to
do
aU
disposition
to
friends
the
sorrow,
and
siek,
will
good
attention
imaginary,
or
of
requisites
in
part
should
should
room
all
be
kfpt
be
unpleasant
well
between
lated,
venti-
odors,
and
216
ANATOMY,
from
all
is an
excellent
impurities.
be
never
permitted
taken
best
the
room
oil,and
often
unpleasant odor,
all
6. In
sichroom
in
should
sickroom
should
the
enter
Visitors
their
be
admission,
physician.
than
less
or
more
or
No
needs
of
who
otherwise, should
be
as
; and
be avoided
talking,should
patient.
the
red, and
the
attendants
while
there.
sick; hence,
are
directed
by
the
all unnecessary
All
the
of service
those
disturb
0"al-
giving light,emit
more
be
can
nigki,is by
at
disagreeableto
very
kept quiet.
room
warming
sperm-oil.
for
cases
For
pure.
most
tion
precau-
every
coal.
for lightinga
means
Offensive
patient.
candles,or
sperm
an
the
immediately, and
preferableto
is
of air should
Currents
upon
the air of
keep
wood
The
5.
blow
to
HYGIENE.
or
fire-place,
chimney-place,
open
be removed
to
the room,
An
of ventilation.
means
should
matters
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
stillness should
reign
in the
sick-room.
is
Cleanliness
7.
tumblers, and
other
be
should
sich^oom.
every
vessels
bed-linen
health, and
in
than
in
Both
frequentlywashed.
the
patient and
important
the
soiled
become
or
dress
cine,
mediof the
in sickness
sooner
should, therefore, be
Cups,
frequently
more
changed.
who
Those
8.
wait
re^it/ar/i/
through the day; and
also
of
partake
of
clothing,so
when
9.
sleep.
as
to
10.
should
who
not
attend
to
through
the wants
the
is then
important
that
of the
into
the
should
much
plenty
wear
ing,
morn-
sick ; she
watch
not
at
for want
wearied
the watcher
be
likely to
day
too
is
brought
meals
is exhausted.
the
be
the
They should
plenty of sleepduring
Whatever
their
take
towards
feel cold, particularly
to
the system
It is
during
lightfood.
nurse
because
of
obtain
as
the system
Those
night;
some
should
the sick
upon
keep awake,
so
should, therefore,
day.
needed
sick-room
during
before
the
the
night,
family
218
19.
Beef
half
Take
Tea.
pieces,add
small
off the
HTGIEKE.
of lean
pound
Skim
boor.
an
AKD
PHT8IOI"OOT,
A2fATOMTy
fio,salt
bee^
and
slowly for
boil
taste, and
to
in Tery
cat
off as
pour
needed.
wine
21.
pint of
of ^eny
wineglaasfiil
muslin, and
fresh milk
add
while
and
sugar
Sweeten
Pnnclt
Brandj
add
and
half
to
thin
through
Add
Whey.
Wine
20.
deira
Ma-
boiling. Strain
nutm^.
tumblerfiil
or
of
fiesh
milk,
tablespoonAilof brandy.
-^:"cc
Asphyxia
The
22.
the
for
treatment
suspended
or
other
breathing,
is much
causes,
same.
be not
If the weather
Ist
on
2d.
Loosen
3d.
Turn
4th.
the
the
Lay
fifteen to
the
again.
This
in
nostrils,through
tube
this
Continue
or
as
chest
as
draw
the
tongue
the
his
nostrils.
above
arms
the shoulders
up
should
be
Blow
there
into
is
; then
repeated from
the
without
quill,or
long
the
; raise
minute.
and
Cleanse
back
draw
times
him.
face, and
time
same
down
twenty
available.
his
stantly
patient in-
moving
the neck
the mouth.
patient on
at
in
time
no
the
treat
severe,
his
to clear
as
both
them
waste
patient on
so
bring
too
ever3rthingabout
gently forward
or
asphyxia,
drowning, coal-gas,or
from
whether
Drcwnino.
from
mouth,
them,
hope
of
as
is
exciting
respiration.
5th.
Pass
intervals, so
6th.
and
always
heart,
to
as
so
as
under
containing hartshorn
excite
nervous
the
circulation
one
to
way,
aid
the
of mustard,
application
by rubbing
from
return
nostrils,at
action.
respirationis established,endeavor
When
warmth
and
vial
the
of
the
induce
patient vigorously,
extremities
the
to
venous
towards
blood.
the
The
of heated
APPENDIX.
bricks
to
liquor,will
under
continued
parts with
the
blankets
dry
these
rubbing
hot
useful.
be found
Cover
7th.
legs,and
219
'
as
sible
pos-
friction may
that
preferable,so
are
soon
be
them.
Disinfectants.
23.
the
24.
by whitewashing
and
of
lime, or
gases
25.
The
following disinfectants
of half
a
water
gallon
or
of
of potassa to
26.
dissolved
pound
of the chloride
and
also
boiled.
used
of
in
Tar
and
the
made
one
; or
water
gallon of
freely.
one
grainsof
ten
quarts of
two
fluid-
one
with
the
common
good disinfectants.
clothing
solution
three
of
and
an
is
bedding
in
an
be
oughly
thor-
of the permanganate
ounce
water
hours
hundred
patients should
from
gallons of
Clothing
over
of
soda, and
water
iron
of
of
quart of
one
sulphate of
Articles
be
by adding
made
of the
this purpose.
should
of chlorinated
and
of potassa to
by absorbing
are
acid
are
chloride
vessels in the
useful
of carbolic
water,
petroleum
solid
liquidcomposed
solution
solution
or
fluidounce
pound
purifying.
Labarraque's
permanganate
the
acid
impurities.
need
that
quart of water;
or
also
are
floors
of carbolic
lime, in shallow
other
of
ounce
by placing
or,
charcoal
of
by sprinklingthe
fluidounce
and
places
may,
tion,
purifiedby thorough ventila-
of half
unslaked
common
Pieces
rooms.
Unhealthy places
walls, and
quarts of water,
two
be
may
the
made
solution
of preventing
means
purifiedtemporarily by disinfectants.
Dwelling-honses
with
the best
are
infection.
of
spread
be
however,
cleanliness
and
Ventilation
frequently used
that
oven
degrees.
In
be
cannot
heated
bad
cases
for
washed,
to
of
perature
temcon-
220
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
of filth should
Heaps
be
inches
chloride
by using
of
disinfect
thousand
As
if every
that
should
be
could
where
cases
relieved
be
may
of
water
irritated
by
the
After
water,
as
30.
After
as
of
and
bottle,were
be
the
will
has been
poison
its contents
as
soon
Care
common
table-salt.
commenced,
reason
to
so
as
as
throat
think
be
may
for
necessary,
by
wine
or
quickly as possible.
and
continue
used
the
slipperythe
But
ing
vomit-
all been
pelled.
ex-
same
the person
brandy.
ing.
vomit-
mucilaginous
poison has
the
be
may
induce
to
warm
to
two
or
Copious draughts
the
feather, so
one
tablespoonful of
be continued, and
taken,
in this
poisoning.
flaxseed-tea,gum-arabic water,
be
be well
ing
possible. Vomit-
as
containing
has
known.
water
more
plainly labelled, so
of accidental
cases
the
it would
positivelyknown.
finger,or by
is
in them
lime
generally
cure,
obtained
chloride
be
than
better
stomach-pump
supported,if
of
of
should
should
until there
A
or
vomiting
drinks, such
elm
of
warm
ground mustard,
warm
placed
tumblerfuls
disinfected
be
be
three
or
that
frequently,
so
should
prevent many
In all
two
not
can-
Antidotes.
occur
them
always
its contents
29.
of
for
package, box,
respect would
of the
their
poisoning
is
prevention
should
pound
and
antidotes
common
charcoal
this
Poisons
of
when
gutters, may
lime, which
quantities. One
Cases
with
be covered
in small
; and
be removed
deep.
28.
either be
should
bedding
buried.
or
27.
HYGIENE.
pose.
pur-
be
may
in all
cases
physician should
be
221
APPENDIX.
POISONS.
ANTIDOTES.
Calcined
Nitric
acid
(aquafortis).
Muriatic
acid (spirits
of salt).
Sulphuric acid (oil of vitriol).
Oxalic
acid.
Prussic
Oil
of
acid.
Laurel
(hartshorn).
Potash.
Strong lye.
Nitrate
of Potassa
lime-water
ammonia
juice
be
Arsenic.
of
^fly-poison).
Scheele's
of
Calcined
of
Acetate
(blue vitriol)
of copper
solution
harky
lead
(sugar
of
lead.
white
Corrosive
Sublimate
(bug poison).
Precipitate.
Precipitate.
Pliofjphorus.
Matcnes.
19*
of
eggs,
oroak-
baking
or
mild
Give
'
and
mustard,
follow
salt, and
Salts.
JSu/phuric
teaspoonful
Give
the
by
acid
is
as
salt in
common
of four
or
Jive eggs
and
water.
"ILarge
doses
followed
of
of water.
white
a
mixed
tard,
mus-
this
of water
tumblerful
or,
Vermilion.
and
antidote.
) Give
a
Give
quickly.
water
antidote.
an
emetic
Epsom
mtLS-
antidote.
an
common
an
Nitrate
and
mus-
by large doses
dote
antiThe
Magnesia.
is hydrated perarsenic
is
an
or
water
warm
drinks freely.
lead).
cream.
stomach-pump.
the
JMilk,
Use
of
Acetate
or
ofntUpalljtannin,
is
soaa.
(verdigris).
copper
and
of iron.
the
Sulphate
warm
follow
for
wine.
by
of
emetic
oxide
emetic.
oil
stomach-pump
an
Green.
Antimonial
water
warm
use
or
and
Cobalt
White
of
emetic
tard
Use
Red
weaJc
or
followed
emetic
An
Spirituous liquors.
White
freely.
tardy followed
Alcohol.
quickly.
vinegar. These
by sweet-oil,casmay
thick
cream.
or
tor-oil,
linseed-oil,
An
(saltpetre).
them
Take
warm
one
of
1-
Iodine.
Tartar
take
\ Lemon
L
Soda.
and
water,
Drink
water.
Ammonia
be
substituted.
may
in copious draughts of
soap,
them
\ Give
bitter almonds.
chalk,
soap-suds,or
of
Oticined
by mucilaginous
with
flour
milk
Magnesia,
drinks.
222
AND
PHYSIOLOGY^
ANATOMY,
POISONS.
HYGIEKE.
ANTIDOTES.
Opium.
Laudanum.
Paregoric.
Morphine.
Cordial.
Godfrey's
Produce
vomititig by
Carminatives.
tard and
(monkshood)*
Aconite
be
(nightshade).
Belladonna
continued
the
for
possible.
Lobelia.
Stramonium
Use
as
quickly as
patient awake.
the
Keep
mas*
should
time.
some
stomach-pump
Hemlock.
of
means
water, which
warm
Weed).
(Jamestown
Camphor.
Tobacco.
Nux
(strychnine).
Vomica
j Give
food.
Poisonous
mustard,
Ammonia
Sting
of
Insects.
of
emetic
an
or
or
salt.
common
be
(hartshorn) may
baking-floda made
paste with
and
water
warm
water
plied,
apinto a
be
may
kept
on
the part.
the
Bite
of
with
caustic
iron
of
Rattlesnakes
Serpents.
ligature
it is
the
Poisonous
or
on
remedies
above
of
one
air and
out
redrhot,
bitten
part.
is
This
one
known.
the
the
Tie
when
wound
limbs.
J-Fresh
gases.
the
out
best
the
other
a
patasaa^
freelyof whisky.
of
and
cut
Drink
Bite
}Suck
animals.
Rabid
artificial
the
Suck
mouth.
respiration.
QUESTIONS.
SECTION
1. What
Why
2.
always
said
of
4.
the
What
ventilation
sometimes
when
kind
in the
of
should
a
room
unfit to be
sick-room
should
be
be
the
sick-room
temperature
of kindness
nurses
selected
How
for
the
of
sick-room?
5. What
is said
of
lightinga
What
is said
of
keeping
6.
What
to the
should
sick ?
sick ?
a
nurse
What
is
in it?
furniture
in
good nursing?
friends
are
appear
What
3.
is said of
I.
sick-room
the sick-room
at
night ?
quiet ?
What
is said
of
223
APPENDIX.
7.
dress
What
the
of
patient
of
is said
9. What
is remarked
11.
What
What
12.
How
broth
of beef?
Beef
19.
What
is the
23.
What
is said
24.
How
25.
How
26.
What
should
27.
What
with
28.
What
is said
29.
be
30.
with
of
filth
of
cases
Lime
physician?
whey?
asphyxia
18. Essence
punch?
cleanliness
and
be
Brandy
and
water
purified ?
the
clothing
from
patients?
dwelling-houses
near
What
poisoning?
?
.
should
care
be used
to
poisoning?
be
should
?
in all
done
How
it be
may
poisoning
of
cases
continued
the patient'sstrength be
may
14.
purified or disinfected
be
be done
of
water?
21.
may
heaps
by
Wine
other
rest?
the
17. Arrowroot?
ventilation
places
retiring to
16. Panada?
dwelling-houses
produced
How
of
clothing
given
Rice
13.
may
What
the
changing
for
treatment
accidental
prevent
20.
tea?
22.
of
before
directions
made?
water
15. Chicken
milk?
food
of
preparation
is toast
of
night?
at
made
be
the
of
What
nurse?
watchers
the
of
remarked
is
the
of
for the
food
preparation should
What
What
sick-room?
the
8. What
10.
in
cleanliness
of
How
may
ing
vomit-
supported?
3"0{00.
II.
Section
Glossary
AnflB^mia.
Poverty
A
An'eTirisiiL
of blood.
soft
produces
Ap'oplexy.
by
death
formed
tumor
of its coats.
in
the
The
of
course
rupture
an
of these
by hemorrhage.
Sudden
pressure
Diseases.
of
upon
loss
of
consciousness; usually
the brain
from
increased
an
duced
pro-
supply
of blood.
Suspended breathingfrom
Asphyxia.
of gases,
Asth'ma.
constriction
chloroform,
or
drowning,
the bronchial
halation
in-
ether.
Difficultyof breathing,caused
of
the
tubes.
by
spasmodic
224
ANATOMY,
PHYSIOLOGY,
Bronchi'tis.
of the
An
bronchial
An
inflammation
disease
causing dimness,
Catarrh'.
and
of
Chil'blain.
"
attended
with
An
bad
Chore'a.
Asiatic
severe.
more
skin.
the
on
four
The
five
or
between
time
days.
causing
disease
incessant
voluntary muscles,
of the
Chorera
with
second
witibout
in
time
Chd'era
mostly
Mdr'bus.
in
in the
Often
this
first visited
It
very
in
country
The
with
attended
vomiting and
unripe
or
region,often
abdominal
young
cities.
to
disease
of
complaint
summer
confined
A
limbs.
the
; often
Pain
epidemic disease,attended
cramps
Infant'iun.
; and
An
Cholera.
contagious.
not
and
Coric.
nary
the ordi-
of the will.
diarrhoea, and
diarrhoea
eye,
contagious disease,
mild,
Dance.
St. Vitus's
Chorera.
children
attack, lasts
irregularmovements
fatal, but
the
of
epidemic disease,with
eruption
and
the control
crystallinelens
loss of vision.
even
Varicella.
an
the exposure
extensive
more
Chick'en-pox.
1832
membrane
mucous
similar,but
of the
Influenza.
symptoms
with
of the
boil.
Cat'aract.
and
inflammation
HYGIENE.
tubes.
Car'buncle.
than
AND
fruit.
attended
with
cramp.
Congestive
in
marshy
Southern
the rice
places, especiallynear
States.
About
in
one
Fever.
Pernicious
Fever.
of the
occurring
plantations of
the
die.
eight cases
Conjunc'tivitis. Inflammation
fever
conjunctiva of
the
eye.
Convul'sions.
during
which
Comef
The
the
tis.
body
involuntary contraction
is
rigid,and
Inflammation
the
of the
cornea
of the muscles,
consciousness
of the
absent.
eye.
Coxal'gia. Hip-disease.
Delir'iiLm
use
Tre'mens.
of alcoholic
Mania
stimulants.
potti. Caused
by the
cessive
ex-
226
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
of the
Laryngi'tis.Inflammation
Tetanus.
Lock-jaw.
contraction
This
the muscles
Rubeola.
eruption
the
there
is a
muscles.
Toluntarj
of the
tinued
con-
Most
jaws.
cases
An
Mening^'tis.
contagious disease,attended
skin.
the
on
and
larynx.
in which
stifiness in
or
HYGIENE.
week.
Mea'sles.
an
disease
usuallybegins in
die within
AND
The
fifteen
to
ten
between
time
the
with
exposure
days.
inflammation
of
the
meningeal
brane
mem-
of the brain.
A
Mumps.
contagiousinflammation
Henral'gia.
Pain
in
in the
without
nerve,
when
is called^tic douloureux,
of the
in the
parotid gland.
inflanmmtion.
and
fiice,
It
sciatica,when
hip.
Fal'sy.
plete,in
loss of
paralysisor
the muscles
of
An
Fericardi'tis.
motion,
more
less
or
C(mi-
side.
one
of the membrane
inflammation
ing
invest-
the heart.
An
Feritoni'tis.
serous
membrane
liningthe
Fharyngftis.
of the
inflammation
The
of
the
peritoneum,
or
abdomen.
ordinary
throat.
sore
Inflammatkm
pharynx.
Fulmonalls.
Fhthi'sis
Consumption
continues
disease which
until there
is not
to
enough
An
the
lungs. A
destroythe substance
left to support
Fleu'risy. An inflammation
covering the lungs.
Fneumo'nia.
of
of the
inflammation
of
of
the
lungs,
life.
pleura, or
the
membrane
substance
of
the
lung.
ftuin'sy.
of the
Tonsillitis.
lung
and
An
the
An
pneumonia.
flammation
in-
inflammation
of
the
tonsil
glands.
Eemit'tent
spring or
slow
Fever.
Fever.
autumn,
streams
Often
of
Bilious
and
water.
fatal.
in the
Fever.
Occurring mostly
More
severe
than
in
or
Intermittent
227
APPENDIX.
Khen'matism.
which
column,
consider
it
Scrofula.
of the
disease
bleeding
the want
by
It is apt to end
Scorbutus.
of
; and
the
best
preventive is
epidemic fever;
half the
Sun'stroke.
A
wet
food, clothing,and
attended
general
bility
de-
vegetable food.
fatal.
often very
Fever.
spinal
The
visited
contagious.
not
in the
towel
or
lungSi.
by swelling and
and
spirits,
in
this country
with
time
tween
be-
twelve
da)rs.
very
fatal,
of the
crown
More
than
1806.
by excessive
Unconsciousness, caused
sponge
of the
vaccination.
First
die.
cases
stance
sub-
produced by hereditary
of
probably
but
of the
contagiousdisease,attended
Cerebro
Spot'ted Fever.
between
days.
and
sore
writers
time
wasting
of fresh,
skin, and
the
the exposure
The
spinal
with
Most
The
five
disease
want
Variola.
eruption on
fatal.
Consumption
lowness
gums,
attended
skin.
of proper
produced by
Small-pox.
the
is
in
of the
curving
causes
which
tender.
very
disease
very
which
and
body,
transmission, or
Scur'vy.
Often
largerjoints,
children.
and
air.
in young
Scarlatina.
contagious.
exposure
fresh
with
the
to
limbs,
Fever.
throat, and
mostly
disease,attended
of the
or
Scarlet
an
confined
frequently become
Rick'ets.
the
Pain
hat
heat.
is the best
preventive.
creosote
with
wet
remedy,
in the
used
same
filthyplaces.
About
Typhoid
Fever.
produced by
foul
Not
contagious.
Fever.
caused
one
is
exposed,
piece of cotton,
cloves
case
one
Fever.
by living in
in
twenty
is
good
case
other
Pertussis.
in
Jail Fever.
overcrowded
and
dies.
A
Fever.
air, fatigue,and
Whoop'ing-congh.
of
Camp
Nervous
About
small
Oil
tooth.
nerve
way.
Ship
Fever.
contagious fever,
the
the
Place
aching.
in
creosote,
Ty'phuB
When
Odontalgia.
Tooth'-ache.
twenty
very
slow
fever
depressing causes.
dies.
228
with
tended
time
Yellow
the
It
contagious.
About
climates.
one
days.
usually
frequently
most
occurs
in three
case
six
fatal
The
sound.
and
very
HYGIENE.
whooping
causes
exposure
Fever.
considered
which
cough,
between
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
in
warm
dies.
""";oo.
Glossary
do'
Ab
tab'
ce
Ad'
bu'
Al
of
an
bu' mi
Tissue
the
which
composed
substance
animal
ve
nas' to
nat'
To
mose.
hip-bone.
of
fat.
resembling
the
white
class
resembling albumen,
and
vegetable kingdom.
the animal
the
sockets
communicate
with
of
the
each
teeth.
other,
as
Tlie
my,
or' ta.
rach'
of the
The
while
body
largestartery
noid.
One
tube
te ry.
the structure
study of
in
of
of the
membranes
which
conveys
the
position
of rest.
state
the
and
body.
covering
blood
away
the
brain.
from
heart.
tic
Ar
At' las.
A
ryt' e
And'
one
another.
of the organs
Ar'
Pertaining to
lar.
both
from
artery with
A
in
the heel.
leg to
Substances.
noid
obtained
Al'
A
An
men.
the
contains
thigh-bone.
of the
sue.
It
egg.
Al
and
Tis'
i pose
part of the
front
pelvis.
of the tendon
name
of the calf
muscles
the
cup-like cavity
of the
The
chil' les.
the
in
digestiveorgans.
The
lum.
and
other
the head
It receives
A
chest
liver,and
stomach,
large cavity
the
between
body,
A
The
men.
Words.
of
la' tion.
The
joint.
first vertebra
noid.
i to ry
One
Nerve.
of
the
The
next
to
the head.
cartilagesof
nerve
of
the
larynx.
hearing.
the
229
APPENDIX.
"
An' ri cles.
il'la.
Ax
Bi cus'
tooth
having
of the
Belonging
The
chL
to
two
fangs.
liver.
the
arm.
branches
or
given
name
points or
two
divisions
two
The
cum.
to its base.
next
armpit.
secretion
i aL
Bron'
two
pid.
Brach'
Cm'
The
The
Bile.
The
of the trachea.
the commencement
to
of the
large intestine.
nine'.
Ca
Like
Cap' il la
Car' di
Feeding
The
Gristle.
brain
; the
Cer'
the
than
The
agus.
oesoph-
each
on
side of the
neck.
The
elastic substance
softer than
ligament.
which
lower
coagulatesin
and
smaller
milk.
division
of
the
little brain.
The
brum.
An
substance
bel' lum.
the
wrist.
to
next
flesh.
upon
large artery
The
Car' ti lage.
Cer
rons.
Car' pus.
blood-vessel.
small
The
rof id.
Ca
ry.
ac.
niV
Car
dog.
and
upper
largerdivision
of the
brain;
large brain.
Ce m'
Ear-wax.
men.
Cer' vi caL
Relating
Cho' roid.
A
Chyle.
to
the neck.
Common
um.
of the coats
milky-looking
salt.
of the
fluid
eyeball.
consistingof
food
in
digestedstate.
Cil' ia ry.
ClaV
i cle.
Coch' le
a.
Co' Ion.
Con
June' ti
and
Cor'
the
Belonging
ne
a.
The
eyelids.
portion of
va.
the
collar-bone.
The
covering the
eyeball.
20
The
to
name
the
large intestine.
membrane
mucous
front of the
of
ear.
lining the
lids,
eye-
eyeball.
membrane
230
ANATOMY,
Cra' ni
The
um.
Cri' coid.
Crys' tal
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
HYGIENE.
skull.
cartilageof
A
line Lens.
the
larynx.
double
lens
convex
the
in
front
taL
layer of
The
ivory of
Derm'
The
deeper layer of
from
chest
phragm.
to
The
be absorbed
Dor' saL
Dn
the teeth.
the skin.
muscle
separating
process
by which
the
of
cavity
the
food
is
changed,
so
Eelating
de'
side to side.
the abdomen.
ges'tion.
Di
epidermiJa.
the teeth.
Pertaining to
is.
the
Den' tine.
Di'
as
external
sa' tion.
CUB
Den'
The
to
The
num.
the back.
intestine
next
to
the
stomach.
Du'
ra
ter.
The
eL
The
hard
am'
En
each
Ma'
membrane
external
substance
of the
covering
brain.
the
of
crown
tooth.
do car' di
En
membrane
The
nm.
lining the
interior
of
the heart.
Ep i derm'
The
is.
Ep i glot'tis.
Ep i the' li
free
surface
the skin.
the
cartilagecovering
The
um.
layer of
external
of
glottis.
serous
and
mucous
membranes.
sta' chi
En
Fas' cia.
cic'
Fas
Fem'
Fib'
ra'
Gan'
sheath
li.
Bundles
canal
or
of
leadingfrom
the
middle
small
The
muscle.
fibres.
of muscular
Pertaining
The
la.
forms
Fo
The
ral.
Fi'brin.
or
tube
the throat.
to
ear
an.
to
the femur,
of the
bone
substance
in
the
or
thigh-bone.
leg.
blood
which
coagulates,
clot.
men.
gli on.
Gas' trie.
An
An
aperture
in
enlargement
Pertaining to
bone.
in the
the stomach.
course
of
nerve.
231
APPENDIX.
Gm
ne' mi
trocll
the
forming
from
calf
An
Gland.
or
one
Glos'
ao
Olot'
tis.
Hem'
The
biv'
or
Hn'
mer
na.
Hy'
the
thin
In
ci'
In
ter
In
tea' tine.
am.
bone
taste.
top of the
part of
the
to
of
the
the
at
lower
The
aor.
liquid
larynx.
the
body.
the
shoulder.
eye.
liver,
the
beat
root
of
for
meaiis
preserviug
of health.
The
H'
pluuts.
next
8tu")yof
state
The
the
any
membrane
to
of
at
from
arm-bone
The
Hy' oid.
forth
poura
neiTe
Feetiiog on
Relating
The
Bleeding
ene.
in
body
and
secretes
opening
narrow
The
loid.
Hy" gi
cle
mus-
leg.
al.
ge
ons.
pat' io.
He
large
the
to
ducta.
plia ryn'
Her
given
name
which
rtagG.
or
the
of
organ
more
"
The
us.
of
name
cob' taL
the
front
Between
the
part of
The
of
portion
the
tongue.
small
intestine.
tooth.
ribs.
the
canal
alimentary
below
the
Etomach.
The
ria.
Je
jn'
Jn'
gu
Lab'
lar,
Lach'
Lac'
small
Lar"
Ug'
to
the
Liv*
portion
The
large
The
rintll.
ry
mal.
of the
vein
interual
eye.
iutestina
each
on
of the
pupil
amall
side
of
the
neck.
ear.
Pertaining
to
vessels
which
The
te ala.
the
tears.
absorb
chyle
from
the
intestine.
The
ynx.
upper
A
meat
of
part
the
strong, fibrous
windpipe.
membrane
giving strength
joints.
er.
large gland
just beneath
Lymph.
Mar'
nnm.
the
ring surrounding
the
The
right
side
of
the abdomen,
diaphragm.
colorless
row.
in the
fluid
in the
lymphatic
in
the
vessels.
cavities
of the
bones.
Maa
ti ca' tion.
Med'
ul la ry.
Me
whi"-h
dnl' la
joins
Ob
the
The
act
of
Pertaining
Ion
to
marrow.
Tliat
ga' ta.
nird
siiiiial
chewing,
I.1
part
tlie brain.
of
the
nervous
eord
232
ANATOMY,
Mef
and
PHYSIOLOGY,
Oftr'pus.
The
palm
Mi' tral.
The
AND
between
the
fingers
hand.
between
valve
HYGIENE.
left auricle
the
the left
and
ventricle.
Mo'
lar.
The
Mo'
tor.
Causing
Mu'
00U8
which
Mem'
Na'
grinder.
or
membrane
saL
fluid secreted
The
oles.
fleshyor
Pertaining to
ri lem'
Neu
tooth,
motion.
brane.
The
0U8.
Mus'
back
lining
all cavities
externally.
open
Mu'
of
name
Oc
cip'i
(E
soph' a
The
ma.
tal.
lean
the
The
membrane.
mucous
nose.
sheath
Relating to
gU8.
by
of
nerve.
the back
tube
extending
"om
the
throat
to
the stomach.
01 fao' to ry.
0 men'
the
Pertaining to
A
tum.
fold
of
of smell.
sense
membrane
serous
covering
the
Op' tic.
the
Pertaining to
Or' gan.
part of
Any
sight.
body capable
the
of
special
function.
Os'
86
Pertaining to
0U8.
Os' si fy.
To
Pal' ate.
The
Pal'
Pal' pe braL
Pan'
pil'la.
Pa
rot' id.
The
Pa
tel' la.
The
Pec' to raL
and
to
palm
of the hand.
eyelids.
the
the stomach.
behind
gland
Pa
Pel' vis.
the
to
Relating
creas.
bone.
of the mouth.
roof
Relating
mar.
into
change
the bones.
minute
prominence.
largestof the salivaryglands.
knee-pan
Pertaining to
cap
of the knee.
the chest.
formed
basin
The
; the
by
the
hip-bones,the
sacrum,
the coccyx.
Per
Pe
Per
i car' di
ri os' te
i to
nm.
ne'
nm.
fibrous
The
stomach, intestines,and
enclosingthe heart.
membrane
The
nm.
membrane
serous
abdomen.
covering the
membrane
bones.
investingthe
234
PHTBIOLOGT,
ANATOMY,
Bter'
The
num.
8tom'
ach.
ola' yi
Bub
lin'
the
the tongue.
under
fluid which
bones
The
of the abdomen,
the clavicle.
jointsbetween
The
a.
8U8.
under
Situated
The
left side
diaphragnu
Situated
gnaL
Syn o' yi
Tar'
the
the
in
large pouch
an.
8n' tores.
HYGIENE.
breast-bone.
just beneath
8ub
AND
the bones
of
the skulL
lubricates
the
joints.
forming
the
heel
and
the
instepof
foot
Ten' don.
The
cord
The
chest
which
by
muscle
is attached
to a
bone.
The'
rax.
Tib' i
Tis'
a.
sue.
The
large bone
The
texture
of the
of which
shin-bone.
the
leg ;
part of the
any
body
is
composed.
A
Ton' slL
Thy'
cartilageof
The
a.
cus' pid.
Tri
the
roid.
Tra' che
in the throat.
gland
the
larynx.
windpipe.
The
valve
between
the
right ventricle.
Tym'
pa
TJl' na.
TJ'
la.
vn
Vas'
cu
Van'
bone
A
middle
drum
; the
ear
of the
ear.
of the forearm.
soft
body
attached
to
the
palate.
Containing blood-vessels.
lar.
A
Vein.
The
num.
tube
which
The
tri cles.
conveys
two
towards
blood
cavities
of the
given
each
the
heart
heart
next
to
its
apex.
Ver'
te bra.
The
name
to
bone
of the
spinal
column.
Ves' ti bule.
Vil' li.
Vit'
re
Elevations
ous.
in the
humor
mucous
ear.
coat
of the eye.
-"*^5%^
of
the
small
tine.
intes-
Index.
rtat
AbttoHttnal
Anatmnv
ottbecl
ftarta....
Ahdvcenfaene....
Absorption.
Ihrangh
the
skin
AeeUtbmhttn..
^sAlUM.tDnibDof.
canip"H[t1oa
Animal
lieHt....
of
ArtleHlatioHtxa"iaB.U...,.
ArtteulatUttiot-KOtia
Arytenoid
cortllajtoa.
...-"-.
236
IKDEX.
PAGK
Baek'bone
37
Baldness
BtUl
204
.-
and
socket
time
of
temperature
Beds,
of.
change
of
essence
Beef'tea
teeth
Bicuspid
171
Carotid
171
Carpus
171
Carbonate
32
193
of lime
217
of
Carbonic
62
from
the
arterial
the
in
air
106, 163
lungs
162
wells
161
of
148
Cartilage
204
of
161
20, 100
larynx
99
86
palpebral
136
16
acid
sources
Blood
16
16
potassa
218
18,71
checked
81
"
BUiverdin
taste
89
of soda.
in
how
"
in
arteries
66,71
Bluer
78
circulation
BUe
Bleeding
62
Capillaries
39
for
JtatiM,
teeth
joints
Bathing
Beef,
PAOI
Canine
89
cricoid
composition
of.
86
thyroid
coagulation
of.
86
Cartilagin
17
87
Casein
17
Telocity of
89
Cell,
venous
89
100
"
of
quantity
Body,
tissues
of
in
birds
in
fishes
m
of the
ear
of the
face
Cellars
22
Cells
23
Cellular
23
Cement
28
Cerebellum
27
Cerebrospinal
in
head
26
Cerehrum,
trunk
28
Changes
22
from
matter
classes
of
in
"
color
of
growth
of
mineral
matter
number
of
in
20
54
teeth.
01
117,130
116,130
town
Chest
23
CfUck"n'broth
23
Childfwod
26
Children,
23
Chloride
heat
to
210
8ea.t8 for
of
of
potassium
of
36
Chords,
Vocal
37
Choroid
coat
36
Chyle
24
Circulation,
causes
Circulatory
system
Brain
113, 115
convolutions
of
parts of
motor
sensitive
Brandy
parts
130
of
pwnch
Bread
Breast
bone
^
187
Cleanliness.
218
Clot
185
Clothing
of
216, 219
articles
of
176
of.
177
object of
217
warmth
in
"!atuils, Semicircular
175
of.
Coato
of
177
contagious
Coagulation
142
87
174
100
65
86
Bronchi
Cascum
75
of
blood
change
89
32
167
Chicken
of.
Clavicle
Breathing
Broth,
139
eye
71
130
30
100
of the
physiology
116
16
16
physiology
Bone-blaeh
199
Bodiun
Chocolate
of
166
167
30
26
uses
cold
217
of..
of
to
country
ossification
structure
113, 124
system
from
23
22
161
cartilage
layer
of the
animal
houses
under
of
of the
of
13, 156
19
anatomy
112
nerve
primitive
"
Bimes
99
of
diseases
blood.
219
86
of arteries
78
stomach..
6i
...,
SOI
of
eUtntU,
plnnl
-.
ii.rv"..
.FtbrUt
In
Itlooil
tlbnla
Ftria
vl
tIiIod.
JIafr.
_
iMpiiis
Bant
Hrnd,
irator
lwn"
Uearlnff,
iHWUngoT.
dlgutlaaaf
iw
Gan^lleH,
fJanIHe
the
or
"iok.....
"por"o
gluoili..
Jllp-Jal,,t.
Jlvrtc-radlah...
of
hj(i"n
JWunovoMa
Jolota.
IncUar
..
Iwtb
IxttlaH
ai
";om,
taoa..
ot.....
Xiquora,
MembraneSf
J^tfimim
kinduf...
itiamaDU
Juice,
at...
liilwlliul.,.
nlli
Xl^anddralb.,...
U/tifoni-
KiAritaoat
luscin
240
INDEX.
PACK
Museiet,
itrength
tendons
of
p
""""""""""""""""""
of
Muscular
flbret
21
tiuue
"""
""""""
Falpehral
.44, 61
"
"""
""
""""""
""""""
"""""""""
cartilages
.....
136
""""""
136
"""""""
""""""
............
66
" """""""""
Juice".
"
""""""""""
71
""""""""""""
! Panereatln
17
"""""""
ynila
"
duct
217
Pancreas
JPaiuTreo^tf
centres
eo
"""""""""
"
Jferve
127
""""""
Panada
..ise,220
J^iTMal
"""
glands^
21
Mustard
"""
JPniote
62
"""
voluntary
P4B1
61
146
Parotid
137
Patella^
113
Pathetic
"""""""""
g\Hnd
00
83
"
119
nerra
"
communication
botwoen.
excitability of
MnMibility
"
of
125
PearUdivera
125
Pelvis
30
in
125
167
infant
128
Pepper
1:^6
Pepsin.
112
Pericfirdlunt,
cprebro-spinal
113
Periods
cranial
119
Periosteunt.
131
Peritoneum
Verve
fibres, decussation
union
of.
of
Nerves
of
motion
ofwnsation
of
131
sense
i"|H)rial
,
syniiMtthetic
termination
Nervmis
131
112,122
of
112
216
Nff^fe
Nutritive
apparatus
of human
life
210
24
63
|Perspiration,
office
of
145, 163
Phalanges
32
Pharynx
'
Phenomena
63
of life
\i
Pliosphates
16, 17
Phospfiorus
exercises
Phgnlcal
24
^
198
P/A2f#iolo0r2/;definition
215
"
Nutrition
77
.,
.136^ 148
Nursing.
186
"
Ill
system.
watchers
3r/(jr/it
206
the
of
12
bones
94
of
54
of the
circulation
86
of
digestion
68
86
"
the
of the
Joints
38
119
of
the
muscles
49
148
of
the
162
of the
o
Oeulo-motornervc
Odors
oflTunsivK
fEsop/iagus
Oils,
for
food
Omentum
Organ,
definition
Orgufis
of circulatiou
of communication
digoHtion
Polsotis
09
bodies
Organised
Pons,
125
rnHpi ration
colls
of
75
59
In
Prime
16
of
Primitive
12
11
IProtein
210
cell
Ostein
17
Pulfnonary
U2,
15
69
circulation.
88
102
Pulse
Ihtpil,
155
15
elements
lobules
107
105, 163
life
compounds
IHyalln
200
186
Potassa
26
Overstudy
Oocggen
118
food
as
OW/lcff
Ossification
exercise
120
nerve
brain
Potatoes,
J*rooclm,ate
OtU'door
122
nerves
220
64
of stomach
86
.55,102
PneumogastrU
156
Orgnnle
of blood
14
of.
grouping
of
of.
117
163
Ple^^ises
119, 140
nerve
119
Pleura
63
Optic
147
sense
gland
P^""""*",
119, 136
nerves
special
Plants
210,213
Olfactory
of
nmtor
Pineal
184
OWttgo
of
Pia
63
124
system
nervous
organs
..83,88
of the
eye
139,
150
Text-Books
Model
will ^iill"B",
^4wIj,
^fltfcinkj,
""{w
CEASE
STUAST'S
AND
CLASSICAL
BDITED
CHASE,
THOMAS
P.
ZUILIOITS
lATIN
ALLEN'S
XOBBIS'S
The
publication
the constantly
this
would
render
his
to
necessary
diEBcult
passages
and
yet would
and
Dictionary.
is believed
Is
very
of
edition
give
OBAHHAB,
LAHN
to
of
the
OBAHHAB.
Classics
hy teachers
for
student
the
the
suggested t^
was
edition
aji
which,
assistance
really
interpretation,
require him
to
use.
of
roake
general
QBAHKAB,
LATIN
increasing demand
by judicious notes,
GBAHXAB,
LATDT
OBEENOtrsH'B
af
BBAHKAS,
LATIH
HAKUAL
ALLEN
OSAIOUB,
LATIN
OILDBBBLEEVE'S
A.M.,
A.M.,
STODDABD'B
ft
STUAET,
CEOWELL,
HABKHESB'S
ANDREWS
BT
GEORGE
A.M.,
E.
SEBIES.
The
Series
peculiarities of
faithful
needs
publishers
use
claim
his
of
only
Syntax,
to
be
for
"c.,
Grammar
known
it
to
peculiar
merit, and
leave
beg
call
to
attention
to
The
text
the
following important
particulars:
The
purity of
The
the text.
ciearnett and
notet, and
concitenett
the
adaptation to
their
beautyof type
The
handsome
The
convenience
low
based
binding.
shape and
of the
which
the
The
preparationof the
original work
of
Series
that
the
Points
learner.
have
they
been
are
adopted
satisfaction
proud
text-books
in
of
adapted
in
the
to
statingthat they
clusively
con-
very
of the
Union,
class-room.
and
this time
at
are
scholars.
proves
wants
of the
State
every
books,
these
to
the
with the
explainedIn accordance
are
given
well
best
geography,
antiquities
history,mythology, and
American
welcome
the
helpfulto
of
generous
They
accurate, clear,and
notes
scholars.
The
ence
refer-
constant
volumes
whole
proved
im-
most
manuscripts.
size.
the
Is the
is
ing
painstak-
authorityof
the
to
paper.
style of
price
carefiil and
upon
but
reprint,
mere
with
editions,
and
at
tne
sold.
are
It not
of students.
wants
The
The
of
we
have
the
ard
stand-
than
more
|" |h""""t
|.ho.l|.
and
the number
largestand
is
The
Publishers
teachers
of Latin
for the
the
desire
throughout
Series
In
shall
those
of
two
Large
2.
Snch
And
we
are
insured
the
The
facts
to
these
them.
to
books,
Grateful
pledge
we
the
for
ourselves
Attractive.
Most
The
Most
Prioe
Durable.
The
who
do
not
them
use
Most
Beafonable.
suggest
we
the
ation
consider-
permanent
BncceBB
has
confident
contains
if
obtained
they
they
bestowed
the
follows
sncceBS
been
that
success,
commendation
Series
country.
to Kone.
The
and
this
the
using
are
of the
many
be
Binding
teachers
are
indebtedness
received,
have
Inferior
In
To
who
accorded
Appearance
In
of
they
Soholarship
In
has
been
in
their
the country
has
welcome
flattering
the entire
institutions
acknowledge
to
very
that
classical
important
most
these
will
upon
these
by
will
only
inquire into
find
that
they
them.
following works,
viz.
real
merit.
books.
the
are
merit
well
which
worthy
rASAR'S
^
COWMENTARIES
With
Explanatory
of
Index, Map
Prof.
George
Lexicon,
Notes,
Gaul,
the
on
Plan
Stuart.
the
of
Price
Gallic
Geographical
Bridge,
by
War.
"c.
By-
mail, postpaid,
|l.2S.
FIRST
SIX
BOOKS
OF
VIRGIL'S
Chase.
VIRGIL'S
Index
of
Chase.
Price
With
TUM.
Prof.
its
S^^uart.
Prof.
rical
Met-
Thomas
MORE-
Notes, Lexicon,
"c.
By
by mail, postpaid,
Price
of
AND
With
Cicero,
Plan
of
the
"c.
By
Prof.
Explanatory
List
Consuls
of
Roman
Forum
George
and
Stuart.
WAR.
Prof.
rORNELIUS
AND
Explanatory
George
Jl.25.
Life
Life,
CALLUST'S
By
Notes,
Prof.
By
ORATIONS.
Surroundings,
Price
By
Versification,
GEORGICS,
Explanatory
Notes, Lexicon,
his
"c.
Names,
SELECT
dnring
Classical
George
riCERO'S
Classical
on
ECLOGUES,
VIRGIL'S
"c.
Explanatory
Remarks
Proper
on
^^th
With
"ENEID.
Remarks
Proper Names,
Price
Index,
of
viENEID,
Notes,
Price
Stuart.
Lexicon,
Sac.
mail, postpaid,
by
"
With
NEPOS.
Lexicon,
JUGORTHINE
"c.
By
Prof.
Explanatory
George
Notes,
Price
Stuart.
HORACE'S
*"*
With
Proper
Price
ODES,
SATIRES,
Explanatory
Names,
"c.
Notes,
By
AND
Metrical
Prof.
EPISTLES.
Key,
Thomas
Index
of
Chase.
lASE.
^B
*^
Books
from
XLV.
With
"c.
By
AND
I.,XXI.
BOOKS
I IVY.
xxvi.
ix.
xxxv.
With
XXII.
,
xxxviii.
extracts
and
xxxix.
Thomas
Prof.
Price
mail,
by
postpaid,$i-5o.
riCERO
^
SENECTDTE
DE
ET
"c.
Explanatory Notes,
With
Professor
A.M.,
of
Instructor
Latin,
of
DE
By
and
H.
in Amherst
Latin
AMICITIA.
E.
P.
B.
Crowell,
Richardson,
College.
Price
by
mail, postpaid,1^1.25.
riCERO
^
E.
By
"c.
P. Crowell,
A.M.,
TUSCULAN
The
First.
Explanatory
Notes,
of Latin
Professor
in Amherst
riCERO'S
with
OFFICIIS.
DE
Dialogues on
DISPUTATIONS.
Scipio, and
Dream
of
Old
Age
and
By
Prof.
Notes.
Book
Extracts
from
Friendship.
Thomas
the
With
Chase.
planatory
Ex-
Price
by mail, postpaid,$1.25.
TEXT-BOOKS
OF
SERIES
THE
ON
LANGUAGE.
ENGLISH
By John
The
And
in
Lessons
Short
and
Coarse
for
of Rhetoric
Professor
LL.D.,
in
the
College
Bhetorio,
Literataroi
Colleges and
Manual
of American
Manual
of
Higher
"
Institutions
of
$0.90
'*
1.50
"
1.60
"
...
Literatnre,
English Literature,
"
of
Jersey.
Price,
Composition,
in
and
New
of
viz.
Series
Composition
A
Hart,
English Language
the
First
S.
Learning :
""
2.50
"*
2.50
Hart's
A
First
help
greater
which
expression
can
it to
use
Hart's
of
the
make
has
intended
as
the
of
of
use
Hart's
for
character
and
as
these
In
his
the
with
clearness
as
the
entitle
these
The
and
the
Prof.
of
volumes,
call
years
for
respect
It is
devote
to
of
books
is
the
to
the
designed
study
Series.
as
book
text
reference.
is
Literature
with
which
is
intended
Hart
has
this
in
as
volume
companion
it
corresponds
text-book
of
of
in
for
general
Colleges,
the
plan,
the
topics are
practical convenience
of the
culture
books
plan
to
and
style,
and
for the
and
shown
of
sincerest
the
critical
the
opinion
commendation.
works
many
of
opinions,
and
the
the
the
beauty
arrangements.
displayed,
English
on
novel
precision
which
they
subject, in
much
of
mechanical
present
of
believe
on
presented,
soundness
We
literary judgment
among
arrangement
the
in
excellent
high place
freshness
fruits of
matured
letters.
text-books
other
any
the
embodied
department
of
advance
thoroughness
elegance
volume
American,
is intended
the several
scholarly
of
for
this
In
and
time
which
The
room.
class-
Examples
"
to
published.
the
judgment
as
the
present
favor.
Academies.
sound
well
in
and
the
and
larger
pains
no
reference.
comprehensiveness
materials, the
of
It
of
tant
impor-
one-third
the
English
Literature
Literature,"
volumes
in
the
American
of
of
found
be
book
life-long studies
will
not
in
which
heretofore
Schools
English
as
of
full
this
use
than
general
to
work
have
design.
book
book
in
school-room,
Literature,
down
of
the
to
more
copiousness
similar
who
laid
and
and
the
for
English
"
be
tolerably
with
spared
adapted
subject
and
text-book
Manual
the
to
in
can
read
scholar
has
for
of
duties
in
Manual
Hart's
class
prepared
and
and
engaged
Coarse
as
Colleges,
been
any
those
Literature
o^
progress
to
lutionize
revo-
power
his
able
been
author
the
practical
variety
by
Short
pupil
teacher
and
commend
unequalled
Hart's
both
specialty of the
great
will
Practice"
has
The
treats.
of
practical
made
increased
which
in
has
Rhetoric
eminently
the
but
Any
It will
it doubles
pupil,
use.
and
wants
Hart
in
century
By
school
education,
book
Dr.
for
the
of
branch
it is
not
the
beginners.
advantage.
Composition
knowledge
past
is
the
to
for
invented.
was
teaching.
formed
well
gives
There
study.
every
it
never
of
work
is intended
Composition
Teacher
the
to
whole
the
in
Lessons
of
ature.
liter-
features,
statement,
characterize
the
Text-Book
"
for
Families.
it is
as
of
that
there
to
the
consideration
so
far
as
comprehended
has
matter
much
Hygiene
the
in
it does
which
subject.
the
other
any
it is
book
such
been
text-book
style in
be
readily
Superfluous
in
completed
the
on
avoided,
to
as
be
claims
The
designed.
can
occupy
following
of
the
nized
recog-
Martindale's
have
use
that
not
Dr.
the
presents
important
as
generally
so
instruction.
treatment
so
than
period
become
is
Technicalities
for whose
omitted,
been
has
Health
not
those
by
shorter
and
is
of
of
course
with
consistent
delphia.
Phila-
School,
Laws
schools
of teachers.
it is written
which
the
the
in
Physiology,
Anatomy,
and
few
now
prominent position
Grammar
importance
Its
are
late
M.D.,
Physiology
interesting.
and
Colleges,
Martindale,
Madison
the
Price
study
C.
HYGIENE.
Academies,
Schools,
By Joseph
Principal of
The
AND
PHYSIOLOGY,
ANATOMY,
subject
yet
as
published.
circular
Descriptive
sent
application.
on
-"K""d;o"-
LESSONS
IN
For
Beginners.
By Joseph
late
Principal
riRST
*
book
"
Philosophy
an
any
and
easy
his
attention
to
the
interest
is
means
of the
and
The
thus
excited,
after
of
of
is
are
of
presented
so
as
the
clearly and
most
be
can
has
been
plainly
things
set
in
first
profitin
will
with
be
in
forth, that
simple
directing
When
with
by
in
much
so
public
our
found
to
every-
day
they
the
made
are
Only
truths.
with
unfolded
objects
given
met
met
such
instruct
is familiar.
common
taught
phenomena
so
pupil by
gradually
familiar
in
and
it does
as
Natural
in
subject
interest
he
is
philosophical
yet what
common
of the
Lessons
the
fail to
subject
private schools,
more
the
another,
teaching great
subject
facts
First
"
which
with
School.
cents.
it cannot
nature
M.D.,
Grammar
division
the interest
secures
objects in
walks
all the
60
each
style,that
it
presenting, one
the
it presents
Martindale,
manner,
every-day
C.
familiar
of
child
and
and
easy
what
is
PHILOSOPHY.
Madison
the
of
by mail, postpaid,
Price
This
NATURAL
are
brace
em-
life.
en-
lO
*"
HETIC
BUSINESS
AND
the
for
Use
of
Consulting
Groesbeck,
every
High
class
in
will
Forms,
yield
and
the
of
progressive
study
so
direct
to
""
to
of
its
secure
the
Price
Mitchell.
Melody
of
of
and
Voice,
will
the
upon
Classified
with
Arranged
to
Instruction.
of
meet
M.
By
S.
Attitude,
OF.
Accent,
Emphasis,
Inflections, Sense,
Rhetorical
and
and
by
TREATED
Poetry, Action,
fillingit
Pronunciation,
Stress, Grammatical
many
channel
of
means
Founded
Human
SUBJECTS
Articulation,
in
advantages.
Difficulties
Practical
the
tion
atten-
scholar,
welfare, will,
prove
be
tion
introduc-
the
to
as
to
special
this, the
attractive
ELOCUTION.
Illustrations, Suggested
the
the
from
result
only
will
that
success
application.
on
of
and
full
OF
Philosophy
on
and
receive
future
his
organization
Calculations
this the
apart
favor, and
its
in
address
MANUAL
College.
intrinsicallyvaluable
so
were
But
welfare
the
containing
any
teacher.
is
should
and
to
bearing
anxious
students
sent
Principal
land, the
Business
interesting in itself,so
so
popular opinion
Circulars
be
subject itself
entitled
be
the
popularity
of
element
The
instance, decide
with
in
having
an
of
of
By John
Commercial
Arithmetic,
an
it would
gained,
Academies,
and
Accountant,
Academy
Commercial
prove
of
means
and
School
results.
rich
Men,
Price
In
Designed
Colleges.
Philadelphia
Crittenden's
of
Business
Commercial
and
ARITH-
MANUAL.
Teachers,
Schools,
High
of
COMMERCIAL
CRITTENDEN
THE
Pauses,
Analysis
of
the
Modulation,
Cadence,
Force,
Movement,
Reading
Principles of
Gestures,
Oratory.
The
compiler
general
literature
so
varied
cannot
may
and
conceal
tempt
to
the
hope
individual
inexhaustible;
"
that
that
this
research
this
glimpse
among
text-book
of
our
its treasures,
for
the
II
school-room
whose
become
may
hands
it is
and
accomplish
of
of
the
higher
and
placed,
training
many
overcome
only teacher,
not
while
the
elocutionary
in
friend,
aiding, through
practical
work
but
difficulties
the
of
cultivation
those
in
velopment
de-
systematic
ol
powers
to
the
pupil, to
instruction,
may
refinement
and
of
character.
""o"":o"
"
MODEL
THE
*'
in
SPEAKER:
Prose,
Public
Compiled
Price
book
and
is
bound
durably
and
variety
and
in
the
various
may
be
relied
been
alterations
the
have
of
book
any
this country
It is believed
as
use
series
used
of
the
been
this
readers
it to
attention
interest.
Normal
of
have
address
on
of
sides.
mechanical
work
similar
any
authorized
the
in
their
in
for
now
the
later
poems
into
their way
first time
ference
pre-
issues,
Many
found
of
works
instances,
some
before
extant.
editions
from
extracts
For
execution,
improvements.
never
published
in
form.
will
in
or
to
of
the
For
be
taken
different
Principals
purpose
of
application.
admirably adapted
with
connection
this
and
found
be
up
any
by
entire
of
classes
series, need
the
for
regular
that, having
variety
as
an
particularly commend
we
Seminaries,
Academies,
Institutions
bevelled
with
though,
handsomely
and
book
Schools,
the
deemed
either
reading books,
higher
that
;
an
which
Reader,"
"
to
Schools,
not
that
incentive
the
to
permanent
Philip
Prof.
paper,
beauty
consult
to
selections, being
in
"
Academies,
Schools,
unequalled by
accurate
given
introduced
been
is
taken
as
have
of
English cloth,
represented,
upon
Exhibitions,
for
of selections,
been
writers
has
fine
price, it
has
care
School
superfine,tinted
on
in
freshness
economy
Great
printed
Suitable
Classes, by
Private
Lawrence.
The
Use
the
Exercises
of
Verse,
Blank
Readings,
for
and
Colleges,
Consisting
and
Poetry,
Declamation,
"c.
"
for
Young
List
of
High
Ladies.
Contents,
sent
to
12
'^
DEFINER.
Beginners,
containing
Sentences
MODEL
and
which
only
obtained
be
can
the
to
To
All
proof
trial
of
its
of
similar
in
for
future
be
derived
given,
from
the
Saving
paid,
post-
2.
Increased
3.
Ease
4.
to
only the
but
also
the
containing
that
quaintance
ac-
correct
analysis
the
difficulties
any
Webb.
C.
not
intimate
viz.
present
Price
Definer
and
illustrate
the
by mail,
the
the
by
to
is
ModeL
word,
form
sentences
the
allowed.
child
of the
one
any
Etymology
meaning
only authority
by memorizing
or
Model
containing
sentence
by requiring
as
simple
sentences
as
models
following advantages
to
Series.
Word-Book
Model
of
is the
convince
1.
Descriptive
Model
Dictionaries
cither
will
use,
the
use,
work,
those
to
mail,
an
authors,
A.
good author,
correct
the
of
use
cents.
good
from
([uote
by
from
could
By
60
plan adopted
new.
correct
Analysis,
Key
which
learner.
post-paid,
The
With
word
every
best
the
of Words.
of
the
Giving
Definitions, Etymology,
use
and
Etymology,
Price
CTYMOLOGT.
with
not
Webb.
for
cents.
25
THE
exhibiting
C.
A.
By
Book
Elementary
Definitions,
Models,
as
Words.
*"
An
MODEL
THE
time.
knowledge
teacher
knowledge
Circular
sent
and
of
of
words.
scholar.
the
correct
of
use
words.
application.
on
-""o""";oo-
MARTINDALE'S
STATES.
close
of
TiNDALE,
School,
60
cents.
OF
HISTORY
From
the
late
M.D.,
the
of
Discovery
Rebellion.
Principal
Philadelphia.
THE
By
of
Price
the
by
UNITED
America
Joseph
Madison
mail,
to
C.
the
Mar-
Grammar
post-paid,
13
With
this
book
obtain
term
States
as
his
complete
as
has
in
heretofore
Descriptive
hand,
the
knowledge
required
circular
sqholar
sent
of
the
double
in
can
single school-
of
History
the
time
and
the
United
effort.
application.
on
""":o")-
HE
YOUNG
STUDENT'S
Elementary
Lessons
and
English into
from
Principal
of
COMPANION;
Exercises
French.
Price
M.
By
Seminary
for
in
A.
"r.
Translating
Longstreth,
Young
Ladies,
delphia.
Phila-
TABLES
'*'
OF
Aid
the
to
N.
"
LATIN
Study
Currier,
of
Designed
SUFFIXES.
Latin
of the
A.M.,
Iowa.
Grammar.
Professor
Price
of
as
By
Latin
an
Amos
in the
versity
Uni-
by mail, postpaid, 50
cents.
^""-oo_
FRENCH
"
Verbs
in
French.
Professor
of
Modem
of
the
conjugations,
and
tenses,
the
be
A. M.
,
embraces
method
in Mount
St.
Mary's
of
found
full
comprehensive
for the
paradigm
exemplified by
will
book
Book
new
complete
and
Expositor
Lagarde,
Languages
Verb
French
Lagarde's
Ernest
By
New
the
or,
Price
College.
of
BOOK
VERB
all
formation
the
valuable
aid
to
the
It
of the
use
verbs, the
illustrations.
analysis
and
whole
is believed
study
of
plained
ex-
that
the
French
Com-
language.
OF
rOMPENDIUM
^
of
pendium
the
Grammatical
By
F.
Language.
French
in
FRENCH
the
A.
THBSB
PABT
FIB8T.
PAET
SECOVD.
PABT
THEEU).
Price
Rules
Br^gy,
University
IN
RULES.
of
A.M.,
the
FABT8.
by mail, postpaid, 75
Preparation.
"
French
Professor
Pennsylvania.
"
In
of
50
cents.
"
of
14
These
hand-books
language
and
to
enabling him,
would
lead
They
system.
any
in
advantageously
the
the
short
time,
and
nsed
from
student
through
tedious
prove
be
can
the
principal rules
to
in
of the
first elements
of
the
French
Syntax,
intelligentlywhat
master
with
connection
otherwise
difficult task.
-"K"04Koo"
CELECTIONS
^
FOR
Poetical
Selections
postpaid, 50
That
the
is
glad,
especially
well-spring
This
ten
of
of
pleasure
in
work
of the
author
for
those
to
mind
past, has
make
to
with
such
the
poetic
happiness
child
utterances,
becomes
lifetime.
compiler
children
already
not
tlian nine
more
feel it
would
good
should
extant,
or
for
excuse
the
little
ones
teacher
can
of
S.
State
the
Hart,
Normal
sent
on
the
experience
a
period
and
of
observation
extending
years
century.
afford
teacher's
circular
John
Jersey
for
School-room"
of
It is
New
of
results
one-third
No
By
in
the
the
"in
Chapters
or.
Education.
of
gives
Descriptive
by mail,
with
Simply
of
intended
Price
than
of
it.
School.
This
Price
present
volume.
storing its
Principal
LL.D.,
more
for
the
Philosophy
over
this
the
link
SCHOOL-ROOM;
THE
and
book
another
adding
IN
is
age,
to
remembrance
delight
little book
years
find
the
of
for
motive
when
Book
Children.
for
loves
preparation
worthy
FOLKS.
cents.
which
sympathy
prompted
LITTLE
to
in
library
without
be
a
it.
single book.
application.
"0r9"0*
*-
of
No.
ROLL-BOOK,
MODEL
THE
Schools.
Containing
Intellectual
Geography,
History,
and
enumerated.
several
Price
Record
of
Arithmetic,
Grammar,
blanks
the
Reading,
Practical
metic,
Arith-
Analysis, Parsing
for
Use
Attendance,
Orthography,
Punctuality, Deportment,
Penmanship,
For
1.
special
studies
by mail, postpaid,Jls.oo.
and
not
THE
MODEL
"^
of
ROLL-BOOK,
High
Academies
Schools,
Record
Roll-Book
of
No.
use
taining
Conin
Declamation,
cution,
Elo-
Rhetoric,
Composition,
Physiology,
studies
special
for
tbe
mentioned
studies
with
Philosophy,
Latin,
blanks
the
Geometry,
Algebra,
French,
all
For
Seminaries.
and
together
ly
2.
Ho.
and
not
enumerated.
Model
RoH-Books,
several
Price
first
the
of
pablicadoa
and
one
month,
price
eadi
and
has
page
has
space
RoU-Books
York,
Fhihidelphia, Baltimore,
throughout
most
use
them
THE
in
extensively
very
the
in
are
the
practical
REGISTER
MODEL
BOOR.
Roll-Book,
combined.
Adapted
in
Academy,
College,
bevelled
sides, crimson
SCHOOL
in
the
securing
of
to
week.
the
parent
of
the
Schools
found
be
to
teachers
who
Grade-Book
or
Primary
fine
English cloth,
Price
by mail, postpaid,
in
edges.
GRADE-
High
Seminary,
or
the
will
of
Scholar,
of
the
for
guardian
post-paid,
dozen,
Designed
parents.
Attendance,
the
close
Copies
examination,
per
Lotus,
classes, whether
of
DIARY.
of
"c.,
At
signature.
Price
be
and
grades
co-operation
Record
Recitations,
the
St.
High
All
New
""o5";o"
MODEL
aid
smnmaiy.
cents.
"
all
bound
Handsomely
THE
for
Boston,
AND
Record,
to
School.
65
and
published.
yet
reoMti
and
examination,
on
in
unqualified approval.
with
them
in
Chicago,
Seminaries,
wiU,
uiiform
monthly
schools
leading
Academies,
and
of
speak
the
made
have
they
exhibit
to
for
Cincinnati,
They
been
arranged
assigned
in
use
Country.
complete
been
been
These
have
They
materially improved.
very
size
and
the
be
on
his
It
it is to
be
receipt
teachers
to
of
ten
in
day
every
examination
mailed
sists
con-
Deportment,
for
week
an
as
sent
and
for
cents.
i6
THE
MODEL
"*"
MONTHLY
character
of
the
Model
for
the
will
postpaid,
excepting
Monthly
instead
of
mailed
receipt
postpaid,
of
These
books
for
been
have
in
students
treatise, and
will
be
and
Book,
Price
90
for
dozen,
of
Cash
Book
laneous
Miscel-
by mail,
book
books
six
of
set
six
Book,
for
each
entire
the
or
by
cents.
prepared
as
Book-keeping.
sold
Pupil.
per
Book,
Day
Bill
cents;
mail, postpaid,
the
Consisting
follows
as
of
Report
Price
cents.
tended
it is in-
$1.05.
Exercises.
15
ten
that
examination,
for
BLANKS.
Journal,
postpaid,
teachers
to
as
that
of
"c.,
general
same
Weekly
Recitations,
books,
Ledger,
is the
Report
Diary,
KEEPING
blank
The
School
be
on
mail,
DOOK*^
Monthly
Attendance,
Copies
by
the
of
REPORT.
singly
in
or
matter
They
sets,
as
can
may
of
practical
be
used
be
desired.
with
venience
con-
any
-"o""^o#-
Teachers
a
copy
the
of
the
Principal,
Descriptive
address
on
with
corresponding
circular
or
which
circulars
are
of
catalogue
or
with
us
of
they
all
our
arc
requested
the
school
to
of
supply
which
us
they
are
to
any
connected.
publications
will
be
sent
application.
Please
address,
"
ELDREDGE
No.
17
with
North
BROTHER,
Seventh
PHILADELPHIA.
Street,